016 - Fire - Alarms - System - BS-100-2 - Documentation PDF

BLOCK DIAGRAM
M82.2319.01
SALES SHEET BS-100
BS100/10/A/E
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
BS100/FBE 1
INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
BS100/04/A/E
FINAL COMMISSIONING HANDBOOK

BS100/EBE
BATTERY (2 X 12 V 14Ah )
DOCUMENTATION A512/16G5
DATA SHEET RELAY RS-30 / RS-32
FOR BU-4982 / BU-5083
DIM. SKETCH BS-100 CABINET
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BU-6202
ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
BS-100/2 M82-2319..02
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
SAMSUNG /1139 M82-2319..03-08
AUTRONICA REF. M82-002319

SUB DISPLAY BU-70
BU-4624
P-BU70/CCE
BU70/04,05,06BE
AUTOMATIC DETECTORS:
BH-31.BJ-31, BE-30, BWP-40B
BN-33A/S610
MANUAL CALL POINTS
BF-31.BF-35
EX-DETECTOR
P-DET/Ex/RAE
BZ-32/1
BJ-31/EX
DOOR HOLDING MAGNET
GT-50
BELLS
0-5312/5319/5310/5311
8
AIR HORN
0-5305
DATA LISTING
S3-1282
fluTRDKICB- AUTRONICA REPRESENTANTIVES
G\M82\002319BS\GEM\FORSIDE 04/10-1995 RAJ 10

350362 A ACC.TO L/ RBE/RAJ/OSL x 002319
ORDER 1M-0719
1620
SAMSUNG HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. LETTER OF CREDIT
530 JANGPYUNG-RI
SHINHYUN UP, KOJE GUN SAMSUNG / 1139 - FIRE ALARM FCA TRONDHEIM AIRPORT
KYUNG NAM ACC. TO L/C.
KOREA ACC. TO L/C
9542 13/10/95
BRS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL BS-10Q/2-SOLAS

FOR CONSOLE MOUNTING, CONSISTING OF:
1 BS-100/01 CONTROL PANEL, 2 LOOPS, ENGLISH TEXT
1 BUP-10 PRINTER UNIT, COMPLETE
1 BSJ-100 OUTPUT MODULE (16PCS)
1 BSL-100 COMMUNICATION MODULE
1 PROG-BS100 CUSTOMER SPECIFIED PROGRAM FOR BS-100
129 TXT-BS100 COSTS PER ADDRESS
3 7624-025.0001 RELAY TYPE RS-30/11002-2
6 7624-025.0002 RELAY RS32/940612 2VX F/TS 24VDC/4A WEI
1 7633-055. TIMER GZAH20 OFF-D 1S-10MIN. 24-48V
1 7461-008.
7461-008. RELAY SOCKET Z-345 KUHNKE 11PINS
1 UEA-23/2
UEA-23/2 STEEL CABINET, 14E
1 UE-891
UE-891 MOUNTING PLATE
1 UE-946
UE-946 COVER PLATE, 7E, FOR UEA-22/2 CABINET
2 2 4160-002. BATTERY 12V/16AH
3 2 BU-70/GB DISPLAY UNIT, ENGLISH TEXT
4 84 BJH-31 SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD, IONE
5 4 BJH-31/EX SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD, IONE, EX
6 2 BEH-30 HEAT DETECTOR HEAD
7 90 BWA-40A/1 DETECTOR SOCKET
8 61 BWP-40B CONDUIT BOX
9 100 BJ-309 ADDRESS PLUG FOR 30/31 SERIES DETECTORS
10 4 E-1940 ADDRESS STICKER E-1940- /O-l (2x001-199)
11 17 BF-35 MANUAL CALL POINT
13 30 BFG-3/GB GLASS FOR MAN.CALLPOINT KG1 ENGLISH
14 2 5861-019. IR FLAME DETECTOR, S610 441304
I 350362 A ACC.TO L/ r RBE/RAJ/OSL \
ORDER 1M-0719
002319
J.OO/
1620
530 JANGPYUNG-RI
KOREA ACC. TO L/C
9542 13/10/95
15 2 5861-019.0001 BASE, ZAS6 442016

16 2 5861-019.0002 CONDUIT BOX, ZS6
17 2 BN-33A/24 ADDRESS/INTERFACE UNIT
18 2 BZ-32/1 ZENER BARRIER UNIT
19 6 6731-003. DOOR HOLDER, GT50R/62 24V-1,5W
20 6 6731-004. ANCHOR, GT50 R6-200
21 2 0-5312 BELL 1200 N.W.T. W/LAMP, SEUN ELECTRIC
22 1 0-5319 BELL 1200 W.T. W/LAMP, SEUN ELECTRIC
23 8 0-5311 BELL 2000 W/PILOT LAMP, SEUN ELECTRIC
24 2 0-5310 BELL 2000 W/PILOT LAMP W.T. SEUN ELECTR.
25 1 0-5305 AIR HORN, SU-1022/SEUN ELECTRIC
26 1 B-DOKU WORK/WARRANTY AND ABS APPROVAL CERTIFIC.
27 5 B-DOKU FINAL DOCUMENTATION
CLASS/RULE SPARES

32 1 BJH-31/EX SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD, IONE, EX
33 1 BEH-30 HEAT DETECTOR HEAD
34 10 7580-002.4963 FUSE 6,3A 5X20MM SLOW
35 10 7580-002.4910 FUSE 1A 5X2 OMM SLOW
36 10 7580-001.4910 FUSE 1A 5X20MM QUICK
37 1 6745-011. STANDARD KEY FOR FIRE ALARM PANEL
WORKING SPARES
r 350362 A ACC.TO LA
/( RBE/RAJ/OSL {
( 002319
ORDER 1M-0719
1620
530 JANGPYUNG-RI
KOREA ACC. TO L/C
9542 13/10/95

39 3 BWA-40A/1 DETECTOR SOCKET
40 2 BWP-40B CONDUIT BOX
43 1 0-5311 BELL 2000 W/PILOT LAMP, SEUN ELECTRIC
POS. 21-25 V -,L BE SUPPLIED SEPARATELY

FROM SfcUN ELECTRIC CO.LTD. BUSAN, KOREA
POS.26-27 TO BE PACKED SEPARATELY AND

MARKED "EL.DESIGN TEAM"
SAMSUNG / 1139
All rlgh^ -^served. SpeclflcatlonB subject to change without notices
BS-f 100/2 W/PRINTER

BRILV ( DETECTORS (
LOOP oo
E3 FIRF
DYFI
DETECTORS
LOOP 01
8 A NO
GENERAL ALARM
NO
k i r\ K 2.
FIRE NOT DELAYED 1 RM
FIRE 2 MIN. DELAYED J
24V
SUPPLY FLAME DETECTOR
CABINET UEA-23/2
24V
. BELLS DELAYED
. BELLS NOT DELAYED YARD EMERGENCY

ALARM
SEVEN-7 SHORT + ONE-1 LONG GENERATOR
DOOR HOLDING MAGNETS

BU-70
6
F 10A - BU-70 REPEATER
PANEL
A NO K1
-FAILURE FIRE DEL SYSTEM^
MAINS NO AUX ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
i^~- FIRE ALARM NOT DELAYED ^
220VAC
NO BMA [ENG.RM MONITORING SYSTEM
-FIRE ALARM DELAYED I
V
24V
CABLE SIZE
NO. FUNCTION SI7F RFMARKS
MAINS 2 X 1.5 Date Dsgn/Dwn Tpac Scale DdOQDDn
LOOP 2 X 1.5 18.05.95 RAJ 1:2.5 gggSSBg Autronlca AS
ALARM BELL 2 X 1.5 EACH CIRCUIT Checked Spec Ctrl Approved
amanmaa
amaamaa
GEN.ALARM
BATTERY
2
2
X
X
0.7
4 RAJ aa
DBQDIDQ
DATAUNE 6 X 0.7+SCF PDDDDDD Mnnuni
Norwayi
OUTP.RELAY 2 X 1.5 LOAD:BADC/1 OAAC-240V SAMSUNG/1139/1140 -flUTRDNICR-
Ref. Next
10
24VDC
DICONNECT.
2 X 1.5
4 X 0.7
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 GAM82\002319\DWQ\001 8heet
BLOCK DIAGRAM Dvg no. Sh.no. Rev.
SIZE IN SQMM M82-002319 001 B

| ~~l 1
Fire Alarm
Control Panel BS-100DYFI
:
Applications Optional programmable control outputs,
Fire alarm control panel type BS-tttO DYFI is a in modules of 16 to a maximum of 240 outputs.
control panel for analogue addressable fire detectors RS232C and 20 mA current loop interface for data
for medium and larger installations. DYF!'( Dynamic communication to remote text or graphics dis-
Filter Process) is the registered name for a number of plays, repeaters or building management systems.
dynamic fillers built into the BS-100 software that 2 x 40 character fluorescent dot-matrix alpha-
ensure discrimination between "real" fire conditions numeric display for clarity.
and otlier "non-fire" phenomena. . Detector or loop disablement with timed auto-
matic or manual restoration.
Historical event logging. On optional printer, all ;
Features events and changes of status are printed.
Day/night alarm organisation facility.
Standard unit includes two detector loops, each Self-diagnosis of "fault" condition.
allowing connection of up to 99 addresses. Ad- Sensitivity of all devices easily examined.
ditional modules can be added to allow a total of Reduces maintenance costs due to inherent reli-
16 loops (1584 addresses). ability.
"Pre-warning" enables the system to inform about
a fire, in its earliest stages. Tested and complies with BS-5839 part 4:! 988 for
control and indicating equipment.
Faulty, damaged or missing detectors are reported Full range of devices for hazardous areas avail-
without compromising the system. '.',::',',, able.
User controls through multi-level menu. ' * : : ; : ;
All detectors and manual callpoints have a unique
address.
Multiple microprocessor control for increased
reliability.
Cause and effect, and message data stored in non-
volatile memory with on-site changing capability.
Monitoring of all field devices and alarm path.
-a WHESSOE company Protectina environment, life and Dronertv ... -RutRDNICH- $ ''.',
Fire Alarm
Control Panel BS-100DYF1
Applications Optional programmable control outputs,

Fire alarm control panel type BS-100 DYFI *is a in modules of 16 to a maximum of 240 outputs.
control panel for analogue addressable fire detectors RS232C and 20mA current loop interface for data
for medium and larger installations. DYFI*\Dynamic communication to remote text or graphics dis-
Filter Process) is the registered name for a number of plays, repeaters or building management systems,
dynamic filters built into the BS-100 software that 2 x 40 character fluorescent dot-matrix alpha-
^ ensure discrimination between "real" fire conditions numeric display for clarity.
and other "non-lire" phenomena. Detector or loop disablement with timed auto-
matic or manual restoration.
Historical event logging. On optional printer, all
Features events and changes of status are printed.
Standard unit includes two detector loops, each Day/night alarm organisation facility.
allowing connection of up to 99 addresses. Ad- Self-diagnosis of "fault" condition.
Sensitivity of all devices easily examined.
ditional modules can be added to allow a total of Reduces maintenance costs due to inherent reli-
16 loops (1584 addresses). ability.
"Pre-warn ing" enables the system to inform about Tested andcomplies with BS-5839 part 4: 1988 for
a fire, in its earliest stages.
Faulty, damaged or missing detectors arc reported control and indicating equipment.
without compromising the system. Full range of devices for hazardous areas avail-
User controls through multi-level menu.": able.
All detectors and manual callpoints have a unique
address.
Multiple microprocessor control for increased
reliability.
Cause and effect, and message data stored in non-
volatile memory with on-site changing capability.
Monitoring of all field devices and alarm path.
~ **.
..
irt
-a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and Drooertv ra

Technical Specifications: BS-100 DYFI
Mechanical data:
Dimensions: Cabinet sizes vary in accordance with system specification,

details on request.
Material: Steel cabinet with "Lexan" front door. Colour: Grey RAL 9003.
Protection class: IP 43
Electrical data:
Power supply: 230 V AC +IO/-15 %. Frequency: 44 - 440 Hz.

Batteries: 2 x 12 V - 24 V, not included.
Current cons.: Normal condition: 170 mA without detectors and no outputs connected.
(370 mA in alarm condition.)
More information: See "Calculation sheet for power consumption".
Inputs: 2 detector loops as standard. (16 loops max by using 7 additional modules
BSD-100).
Day/Night alarm organization (D/N): I circuit, activated when connected to 0 V.
Monit. ofext. equipment (E): 1 circuit, activated when disconnected from 0 V.
General alarm (GA): 1 circuit, activated when connected to 0 V.
Group disablement (GRU1 to 3): 3 circuits, freely programmable, activated when

connected to 0V.
Outputs: Alarm outputs, bellslsounders (AK); Standard 4 circuits, each max. load 1 A /
24 V DC. (20 circuits by using 4 additional modules BSB-100 .)
Remote^ alarm signal (BMA): 1 circuit, max. load 1 A / 24 V DC.

(Volt, free relay contact).
Prewarning signal (BMFO); 1 circuit, max. load l O O m A / 2 4 V DC. (NPN

transistor with open collector.)
Remote fault signal (BMP): 1 circuit, max. load 100 mA / 24 V DC.

(NPN transistor with open collector.)
Special national function (SP): 1 circuit, max. load 100mA/24 V DC.

(NPN transistor with open collector.)
Electromagnetic door holders IDHM); 1 circuit, max. load 1 A / 24 V DC.

(Normally closed relay contact.)
Control output (AUX): 1 circuit, max. load 1 A / 2 4 V DC. (Volt, free relay contact)
Optional Control output module(s) (BSJ-100 / BSJ-101): Max. 15 modules, each

with 16 outputs.
Optional Communication module(s) (data output module(s)) (BSL-100): 20 mA

current loop or RS232C output.
Approvals:
American Bureau of Shipping 90-C.B23984-XNo.17, Bureau Veritas 3781/3590/AO/O, Del

Norske Veritas A-4024, Germanischer Lloyd 94552 HH. Lloyd's Register of Shipping 91.0287,
Polski Rejestr Statkow TE/362/930052/89, Registro Italiano Navale 5/075/91, * Sjofartsdirektora-
tet A-60726/90, -Sjefartsvcrket 9074579, Statens Skibstilsyn Y.20-2-6-19, USSR Register of
Shipping 90.289.262, Forsikringsselskapenes Godkjenningsnemnd S-022/89, Dansk Forening for
Skadeforsikring 232.740.01, *Vation Teknillinen Tutkimuskeskus SM 794/91. BS-5839 Pt.4 1988.
See Autronica publication "Type Approvals, Sitmey of Approvals", P 634.
Autronica AS, Autronica Offshore AS

N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Stavanger, Norway.
Phone: +47 73 58 10 00, Fax: +47 73 91 93 00 Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Autronica Marine Autronica Industrial Ltd.

Oslo, Norway. Watford, England.
Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46. Phone: 0923 233768, fax: 0923 225577.
BS-100DYFJ expansion
modules
BS-100/'/7* is of a modular construction and allows for expansion of all parts of the
system.
BSD-100 BSL-100
Additional detection loops. Communications output.
Each BSD-100 module allows for the The BSL-100 module providesa single
connection of 2 additional detection output which can be selected as either
loops each with a maximum of 99 RS232C or 20mA current loop. The
addresses. The BS-100 can monitor up module is used to operate remote
to 16 detection loops. (7 additional displays or PC based information sys-
BSD-100 modules per BS-100). tems.
BSB-100 BSL-110A
Additional alarm outputs. Transmitter unit.
The BSB-100 module allows for the Each BSL-110A module provides
connection of 4 additional alarm outputs, facilities via an 12C bus to remotely
each with a maximum of 1 Amp loading control sounder outputs or
at 24 volt DC. The BS-100 can control programmable control outputs.
up to 20 standard sounder outputs (4
addi-tional BSB-100 modules per BS-
100).
BSJ-100 (BSJ-101) BSL-111A Receiver unit.

Programmable control outputs. The BSL-111A module is mounted
Each BSJ-100 and BSJ-101 can provide remote from BS-100 and acts as a
16 programmable control outputs. The receiver for the 12C-bus output from any
BS-100 can control up to 240 BSL-110A.
programm-able control outputs. (8 BSJ-
100 modules and 7 BSJ-101 modules per
BS-100).
mtrol AutroMaster 300 (or
AutroMaster 3000) colour
graphic presentation
system
Communication line: ASAP
BU-lOO(orBU-lOl)
parallel indication panel
Communi cation
line:
ASsP. INO
BU-70
display unit
amm
BU-65 (or
BU-66) zone
indication panel
Pocket pager, via ESPA 4.4.4 communication line
Output for special functions: SP
4 alarm outputs: AK-1 to AK-4 for connection of

external alarm devices. (The number can be extended to a
total of 20 outputs when using 4 BSB-100 modules.)
Remote alarm signal; BMA. For alarm transmission to

the fire brigade or fire fighters
Remote fault signal: BMP. For transmission to the fire

brigade or fire fighters.
Electromagnetic door holders: DHM. Activated at alarm. > "O
Control output: AUX. Activated at alarm
Prewarning signal: BMFO. For transmission to the fire

brigade or fire fighters.
BS-100 DYFP System design
I BS-60 fire alarm control
Communication line: ASSP. BS panel.
Here connected as a sub-
r unit to the BS-100 DYFl*
The total number of
detector loops including the number of BS-60s
must not exceed 16.
BS-100 DYFI fire i

alarm control panel
230 V AC 24V DC
mains
General alarm input: GA
3 inputs for (detector) group disablements: GRU-1 to

GRU-3
Input for monitoring of external equipment: E (EKFE)
Input for day-Might alarm organization of the fire alarm

control panel: D/N
BS-100 DYFP System design
BS-60 fire alarm control
Communication line: ASSP, BS panel.
Here connected as a sub-
unit to the BS-100 DYFI.6
The total number of
detector loops including the number of BS-60s
must not exceed 16.
DEViCEISi STILL
IN ALARM COND
M
oke
BS-100 DYFP fire

I
alarm control panel
230 V AC 24V DC
I mains
General alarm input: GA
3 inputs for (detector) group disablements: GRU-1 to

GRU-3
Input for monitoring of external equipment: E (EKFE)
Input for day-/night alarm organization of the fire alarm

control panel: D/N
Optical smoke
detector BH-31A.
Address 004
Spur:
Can comprise one
or more detectors,
all with individual
addresses.
Short circuit Optical smoke Heat detector Ion chamber smoke

isolator BK-30 detector BH-31A BE-30. detector BJ-33.
1 pP Address 003 Address 002 Address 001
Configuration of a typical
Manual
call-point detection loop
BF-33L. The BS-100 DKF/*standard version has 2 Ion chamber smoke
Address 005 detector loop inputs. Each loop can take up detector BJ-31
to 99 addresses. with socket base
By using 7 BSD-100 modules a total of 16 BWP-40A
loop inputs will be available. for wet areas.
Address 099
Interface unit
BN-35 for
conventional
heat detectors.
Address 006
Short circuit
isolator BK-30
Optical smoke
detector BH-31 A.
I
Address 007
I
Sub loop:
All detec-
tors con-
nected in a sub loop
via an interface unit
will have one common
address. Conventional Conventional
heat detector heat detector
BD-20. BD-25.
Address 006 Address 006
Operators handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fire Alarm Control Panel
Operators handbook
Fire Alarm Control Panel

BS-100 DYFI
Program version: Pl-BS 100-3.20
P5-BS100-3E20
P-BS-100/FCE
Autronica AS
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway
Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, telex 55 334 autro n.
Autronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway

Phone: + 47 51 89 19 60, fax: + 47 51 89 16 12, telex: 73 763 autrs n.
Autronica Marine, Oslo, Norway

Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: + 47 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n.
Autronica Industrial Ltd., Watford, England

Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
P-BS100/FCE/PM5/GKa/210895 1 Autronica AS
Contents: Page
1 Operating/control panel ..3
2 Prewar n ing ..4
2,1 Indications on the control panel in the event of a "PREWARNING" .4
2.2 Actions to be taken in the event of a "PREWARNING" .. 5
3 Fire alarm .. 6
3.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of a TIRE ALARM" .. ..6
3 2 Actions to be taken in the event of a "FIRE ALARM" .. 7
4 More alarms (multiple alarms) .. 9
4.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of "MORE ALARMS" ..9
4.2 Actions to be taken in the event of "MORE ALARMS" 10
5 Fault 12
5.1 indications on the control panel in the event of a "FAULT" 12
5.1.1 Indications at more (multiple) fault 12
5.2 Actions to be taken in the event of a "FAULT" 13
6 Menu 14
6.1 Menu structure 14
6.2 Menu operation 16
6.3 Main menu 17
7 Out/in control 17
7.1 Disable .. .'. 18
7.1.1 Disable address 18
7.1.2 Disable zone 19
7.1.3 Disable controls 20
7.1.4 Disable sounders (AK) 21
7.1.5 Disable fire-brigade (BMA, BMFO, BMF) 22
7.2 Restore 22
7.2.1 Restore address .22
7.2.2 Restore zone .23
7.2.3 Restore controls .24
7.2.4 Restore sounders (AK) .24
7.2.5 Restore fire-brigade (BMA, BMFO, BMF) .25
8 Show status .26
9 Test .28
9.1 Lamp test ..28
9.2 BMA/BMFO/BMF (Fire-brigade) ..28
9.3 Fault ..29
_J
^
9.4 Sounders ..29

9.5 Buzzer ..30
10 System ..31
handbooks covering internal mounting and internal connections.
10.1 Sensitivity ..31

system BS-100 DYFI ready designed and assembled from the
This handbook contains instructions for operation of fire alarm
10.2 Internal ..34

If the system is to be expanded on site, please see separate
10.3 Configuration .35

10.4 Data .35
11 Feed paper ..35
12 Service ..36
Appendix A - Country variations ..37
A.1 Strapping ..37
A.2 Functions ..39
A.2.1 SOLAS ..39
A.2.2 LPC (England) ..40
A.2.3 Denmark .40
A.2.4 Sweden .40
Appendix B - Replacing the paper roll in the optional printer ..41
Appendix C - Multiple BS-100/Control panel with common repeater
units
(BU-1 00/1 01/70) ..42
C.1 Alarm/Prewarnino/Fauit/More alarms ..43
C.2 Operation ..44
C.3 Disable/Restore .45
F Please note!
C.4 System ..45

Appendix D Control unit with BS-60 slaves ..46
factory.
D.1 Alarm/Prewarning/Fault/More alarms ..47

D.2 Operation ..47
D.3 Disable/Restore ..48
^
D.4 Svstem ..49

P-BS100/FCE/PM5/GKa/210895 Autronica AS
U L -7 L,
1 Operating/control panel
The operating panel consists of text display (information window), indication
lamps, operating buttons and a five elements key-pad. See below.
By means of these control and indication devices, the entire fire alarm system
is controlled.
Indication devices: Operating buttons:
MORE ALARMS MORE ALARMS

Red lamp lights when more This black control button
alarms are present. allows the second line of the
text display to be scrolled,
Revealing additional alarms
Text display
on the system.
(Information window)
SOUNDER SILENCE
FIRE
When the red button is
|Red lamp (sign) lights in
pressed, all alarm devices
dann condition. *
and the internal buzzer are
muted.
These lamps will have
custom designed text. (One
RESET
is red and the lower two are
When the green button is
amber (yellow). See app. A.
pressed, all events in the
system are reset
DEVICE(S) STILL IN
ALARM COND.
Amber (yellow) lamp lights
PRINTER
when an address (detector) is
Optional printer
automatically disabled.
PREWARNING
Amber (yellow) lamp lights Five elements key-pad:
with pulsating light when a The five elements key-pad
prewarning situation has consists of four arrow keys and one
occurred. * "carry-out" (enter) key.
The key-pad is used for
interrogation of the system. The
four arrow keys control the cursor
Amber (yellow) lamp lights on the control panels text display.
for any fault.
Pulsating light. *
The keys for scrolling in the menu
and for moving the cursor up or
FUNCTION DISABLED down in the menu text on the text
Amber (yellow) lamp lights display. These arrow keys also
when any part of the the scroll figures and letter values
system is disabled (isolated) when they are to be entered in the
menu functions.
MAINS Arrow keys for scrolling in the
Green lamp lights when the menu and for moving the cursor to
power is on. the left or to the right in the menu
on the text display
* Lamps go steady when
"Carry-out" (enter) key. Selects the
"Sounder silence" button is
menu part on which the cursor is
operated. pointing.
Fig. no. 1: BS-100 DYFI operating/control panel with

indication lamps, text display, operating buttons
and key-pad.
All address related text indicated in the display together with the text printed
out on the optional printer may be custom designed. In this Operators hand-
book mainly default texts will be used.
f Prewarning J 2 Prewarning
f Indications J 2.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of a
"PREWARNING11:
2: The text display indicates the
address(es) of the detector(s) in
prewarning condition.
1 :The amber (yellow)

PREWARNING lamp lights
with pulsating lights.
3: The internal buzzer is Functions activated at "Prewarning":

activated. (BMFO) Common prewarning output.
Example of text in the display (and on the optional printer):
PW 01 ADDRESS NO. 0504

INVESTIGATE PREWARNING LOCATION
Print out on optional printer: ""PREWARNING"**

DATE: 15.08.91 T1.04.57
PW 01 ADDRESS NO. 0504
If more than one prewarning event is registered the display will change to:
PW 01 ADDRESS NO: 0504

02 PREWARNINGS REGISTERED
All active prewaraings may be seen through the menu function "SHOW STATUS",
"PREWARNING". Access to the menu is obtained by pressing the g -key on the
front panel.
c Actions 2.2 Actions to be taken in the event of a "PREWARNING11:

A: Always treat a "PREWARNING" condition as if it is a fire alarm.
B: Follow all precautions described in the local fire instructions step by
step.
C: Open the control front door.
D: Press the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button.
(The built in buzzer will give a short signal approx. every fourth minute as long as
the door remains open).
The "PREWARNING" indication lamp will now change to steady light.
E: Press the "RESET"-button.

Wait for a while, while the following text appears in the display:
RESET PROCEDURE IN PROGRESS

WAIT
This text will remain for up to 60 seconds.

(The seconds are counted on the display with one point appearing every sec. from 0
to 30 sec., and then removed the following 30 sec.)
The reset procedure is executed in this 60 seconds period.
If everything is in a normal condition the following text will appear in the display:
RESET OK
NORMAL CONDITION
F: Close the door.
In normal condition only the "MAINS" indication lamp should be illuminated when
the door is closed.
[ flrealarm 3 Fire alarm

indications 3.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of a
"FIRE" alarm
1: The red FIRE 3: The text in the display indicates the address of the
indication lamp lights detector which has initiated the first alarm. Possible
with pulsating light. disablements (isolations) of BMA, bells/sounders and
control outputs are indicated in the lower line of the
display.
2: If the address initially

had given a prewarning,
the amber (yellow)
PREWARNING lamp
will light with steady
light.
4: The internal buzzer is Functions activated at alarm condition:

activated. (BMA) Alarm message to the fire-fighters
(AUX) General control output.
(DHM) Control output for door holders.
5: All sounders connected to Optional custom designed control outputs.
the fire alarm are activated.
(Control of sounder outputs
can be custom designed).
Example of text in the display if detectors with address no. 345 has initiated the
alarm.:
AL 01 ADDRESS NO. 0345
****FIRE****
DATE: 15.08.91 T1.05.02
Print out on the optional printer:
AL 01 ADDRESS NO.: 0345
Actions 1 3.2 Actions to be taken in the event of a "FIRE" alarm:

A: Follow all precautions described in the local fire instructions step by
step.
When the scene of the fire is investigated and the necessary actions are
carried out, the sounders may be switched off.
B: Open the control panel front door.
C: Press the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button.

All alarm devices (including the internal buzzer) will be muted.
The red "FIRE" indication lamp will switch to steady light.
All alarm outputs from the control panel will be turned off when the
"SOUNDER SILENCE" button is pressed
However, the message to the Fire Fighthers (BMA-) remains on.
If the silent alarm function (day/night) is in operation, the time delay (Tl) will
start. Alarm outputs and the BMA-output will not be activated.
If the alarm is acknowledged within the delay period (Tl) by operating the
"SOUNDER SILENCE" button, an additional delay period (T2) will be activated.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button not is operated within the delay period
T1 or reset within the delay period T2, the alarm outputs and BMA will be
activated.
x '' ~
The alarm delay of sounder outputs and the BMA-output applies only for
alarm from detectors. Alarms from manual call-points or 2 or more
detectors, over-ride the alarm delays Tl + T2, and the sounder outputs and
the BMA-output will operate immediately.
^ ^
Silent alarm/alarm organizations (list L3.11) is controled by external manual switch
with time controlled relay or automatic from external clock.
C If the "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp lights, please see section 4.1
D: Press the "RESET"-button.

The following text will appear in the text display:

WAFtU~M,.^~M
This text will remain in the display for up to 60 seconds. The reset procedure is as
the one described in section 2.2 part E.
If everything is normal after the reset procedure is carried out, the following text
will appear in the display:
functions accord-
RESET OK
SOLAS-require- NORMAL CONDITION
ments, described in
appendix A This text remains in the display for 15 seconds, and then the menu selection will
appear.
After resetting, an address may still be in an alarm condition. This can be due to
mechanical damage, water damage, the presence of smoke still within the chamber
or an electrical fault. The address still in the alarm condition, will automatically be
disabled (isolated from the rest of the system).
The amber (yellow) "DEVICE(S) STILL IN ALARM COND."-indication lamp
will light, and the following text will appear in the display:
01 ALARM ADDRESS(ES) DISABLED

CONTROL PANEL IN ABNORMAL CONDITION
Contact technical personnel,
E: Close the door.

In normal condition only the "MAINS" indication lamp shall remain
illuminated when the door is closed.
While an address is automatically disabled, the amber (yellow) "DEVICES

STILL IN ALARM COND." indication lamp also will be lit.
If the alarm condition disappears, the indicator lamp will turn off and
the address automatically restored to the system.
[ More alarms J 4 More alarms

1f
^ Indications 4.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of MOR
ALARMS'1:
1: The red FIRE 3: The red MORE ALARMS 4: The upper line in the display
indication lamp lights indication lamp lights. indicates the first address in
with pulsating light. alarm condition. The lower
indicates the last address in
2: The amber (yellow)

PREWARNING lamp lights
with pulsating light.
However, if the address
initially had given a
prewarning, the lamp will
light with steady light.
5: The internal buzzer is

activated. Functions activated at alarm condition:
(BMA) Alarm message to the fire fighters.
(AUX) General control output.
6: All sounders connected (DHM) Control output for door holders.
to the fire alarm are Optional custom designed control outputs.
activated.
(Control of sounder outputs
can be custom designed.)
Example of text in the display if more than two detector addresses

(here we show 3) are in an alarm condition:
AL 01 ADDRESS NO: 0007

Print-out on the optional printer: ***FIRE****

DATE: 21.10.91 T1.15.33
****FIRE****
DATE: 21.10.91 T1.15.28
****FIRE****
DATE:21.10.91 T1.15.24
e Actions 4.2 Actions to be taken in the event of "MORE ALARMS":

A: Follow all precautions described in the local fire instructions step by
step.
B: Open the control panel front door.
C: Press the "MORE ALARMS "-button.
At the first press on the button, the second alarm will normally be indicated
on the lower line,
However, if the following functions - BMA, bells/sounders and control

outputs are disabled (isolated) this will be indicated on the lower line for
a short period before the second alarm is indicated.
Pressing the button a second time will show the 3rd alarm in the display.
Each new press of the button will show the next alarm in the queue.
If the button is not pressed for 15 seconds, the last alarm will automatically
show on the lower line.
D: Press the "SOUNDER SILENCE"-button.

All alarm devices including the internal buzzer will be turned off.
See section 3.2 C for description of silent alarm function (day/night).
The red "FIRE" indication lamp will switch to steady light.
All alarm outputs from the control panel will be turned off when the
"SOUNDER SILENCE" button is pressed.
Special SOLAS* However, the message to the Fire Fighters (BMA-) is not turned off.
functions are de-
scribed In appendix E: Press the "RESETM-button.
A.
The following text will appear in the text display:
RESET PROCEDURE Eft PROGRESS

WAIT,,.,.,,,.,,,..,,*,,.....,,. -
This text will remain in the display for up to 60 seconds. The reset procedure
is identical to the one described in section 2.2.
If everything is in a normal condition the following text will appear in the text
display:
RESET OK
NORMAL CONDITION
This text remains in the display for 15 seconds, and then the menu selection will
appear.
After resetting, one or more addresses may still be in an alarm condition. This can
be due to mechanical damage, water damage, the presence of smoke still within the
chamber or an electrical fault. The addresses still in the alarm condition, will
autotically be disabled (isolated from the rest of the system).
The following text will appear in the text
01 ALARM ADDRESS(ES) DISABLED

CONTROL PANEL IN ABNORMAL CONDfTION
Contact technical personnel.
F: Close the door.

In normal condition only the "MAINS" indication lamp shall remain
illuminated when the door is closed.
While an address is automatically disabled, the amber (yellow) "DEVICES

STILL IN ALARM COND." indication lamp also will be lit.
If the alarm condition disappears, the indictor lamp will turn off and the
address automatically restored to the system.
c
L
Fault
Indications
5 Fault
5.1 Indications on the control panel in the event of
"FAULT":
2: The text display indicates the nature of the
fault. If the following letters are indicated at the
start of the upper line:
FA means loop / detector fault.
SF means system fault.
1: The amber (yellow) FAULT

indication lamp lights with
pulsating light.
3: The internal buzzer is Functions activated at "Fault":

activated. BMP Common fault warning output.
More faults 5.1.1 Indications at more (multiple) fault:

If more (multiple) faults (here we show two) the following indications can be
shown in the display:
FA 01 ADDRESS NO: 0123

LOOP/DET,FAULT: 1 SYSTEM FAULT: 1
""SYSTEM FAULT*"*
Print out on the optional printer: DATE: 25.11.91 T1.09.52
SF 1 SOUNDER CIRCUIT 4 OPEN
""DETECTOR FAULT*"*
DATE: 25.11.91 T1.09.50
FA 1 ADDRESS NO: 0123
(EO) NO OR SHORT ANSWER-PULSE
This text means that there is one fault present on detector no. 0123, and that there is
one system fault present (sounder circuit). The nature of the faults can be identified
by using the menu.
Access to the menu is obtained by pressing the g -button on the five elements key-
pad.
T Actions j 5.2 Actions to betaken at "FAULT11
The internal buzzer is muted, and the amber (yellow) "FAULT"

indication lamp will switch to steady light.
B: Note the fault text indicated hi the display and file the printout
from the optional printer.
C: Contact technical / service personnel.
Menu ) 6 Menu
Menu structure j 6.1 Menu structure
The whole menu structure is shown here, but "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" and
"SERVICE" is described in full detail within the "Commissioning Handbook"-
BS-100.
SELECT MAIN MENU (Program Pl-BS 100-3.20 / P5-BS100-3E20

T
^T.U*JJ.\^l>4j
control -Zone
1) -Controls 1- BT-outputs (AUX,DHM)
3) L-Sounders ^ Controls (1-240)
Fire-brigade (BMA,BMFO,BMF)
- Restore i Address
-Zone
-Controls r- BT-outputs (AUX.DHM)
-Sounders "- Controls (1-240)
L Fire-brigade (BMA,BMFO,BMF)
Show-status r- Alarm
-Prewarning
Addr./loop-fault
-System fault
Disablements
-Alarm counter
L- Stored events (last 150)
Trrt ., -Front panel (lamp test)

-BMA,BMFO, BMP
-Fault
-Sounders
'-Buzzer
. . . A jj o- i jj
System
- Bey ond-limit H- Loop
"-Total [-Printer
rouuiea i rnnier uispiay
*- Display
-Internal 1 Program- version
pAdjust-clock
*- Show-clock
:
2) - Configuration -Comm.channel r- Panel address
'-Alarm info
-Silence alarm TT1
(Alarm delay) T2
~BU-units (display units)
~DYFI-changes -T- Alarm
~Battery-voltage rPrewarning
""Pocket-pager "-Filter
Cont on next page: System-Data
Change
Add
IPrint out p-Detector data
IPrinter texts
Feed paper
2) ' Service 1Report DYFI-factors Single-address
Restarts -j-Main prc.(processor)

l-Loops (processor)
L-Clear
Disable "|Loop
I Internal buzzer
* Internal printer
Restore Loop
Internal buzzer
Internal printer
Test T-Address-in-alarm
-<!ontrols Controls
BT-outputs
Address control Loop From detector
LFrom front
LData control -Tranfer comm.port Yes
No
Select "RET" to go 1 step back in the menu structure.
Select "MM" to return to main menu.
1) Password protected on level 1 .(Operator level)
2) Password protected on level 2. (Service level)
3) Can be password protected in different market and installations.
Password 6.1 Password pretected functions.

J Some of the functions in the BS-100 menu are password protected on two levels.
Following functions are password protected:

L L Password level 1): "OPERATOR LEVEL".
* Disable - Controls
* System - Data
* Disable - Sounders
Password level 2): "SERVICE LEVEL"

* System - Configuration
* Service
P-BS10WFCE/PM5/GKa/210895 15 Autronica AS
f Operation J 6.3 Menu operation
Information given in this section follows the MENU STRUCTURE given in

section 6.1.
That particular parts of the menu structure is shown prior to each section in
order to ease the function overview.
V J
When the control panel front door is opened, the following text will appear in the
r ^ displa y:
Short form opera-
tors instruction. AUTRONICA FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100
This appears In the USER MENU
display on the front
panel Thenlthe text changes to:
^_ .J SELECT MAIN MENU PRESS <J

USERS INSTRUCTION PRESS V
If the operator selects to read the short form users instruction by pressing the ^^
arrow key in the key-pad , the following text will appear in the display:
USER INSTRUCTION, PANEL IS OPERATED BY

USING MENU FUNCTIONS. TO CONT. PRESS ^r
VARIOUS MENU FUNCTIONS ARE SELECTED BY

USE OF< > AND <v^ LAST PICT, NEXT PICT, ^ A
CHOSEN FUNCTION IN MENU IS MARKED AND IS

EXECUTED BY PRESSING g ^^
IN ADDITION TO MENU FUNCTIONS THERE ARE

TWO FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN BE USED V ^
"RET" WHEN THIS FUNCTION IS CHOSEN,

YOU TAKE ONE STEP BACK IN MENU ^>v
WHEN SELECTING "MM" THAT TAKES

YOU BACK TO MAIN MENU v /,
"ARROWS" ARE USED IN ORDER TO BRING UP

MORE SUB-MENUES WITHIN SAME MENU LEVEL v A
v ^ ALSO TO BE USED WHEN SETTING REQUIR.

VALUES OF DIFFERENT PARAMETERS v^
VA SCROLLING FIGURES/VALUES/CHAR ACTERS

WHEN TO BE SET
USERS INSTRUCTION FINISHED

TO MAIN MENU: PRESS 1
MAIN MENU 6.4 "Main menu"

If the "MAIN MENU" is selected, part of main menu will appear in the display:
Out/in-control
MAIN MENU: SELECT WITH < > PRESS
OUT/IN-CONTROL SHOW STATUS
Show status The arrow pointing down next to the word TEST indicates more text in this line. By
pressing the *^t arrow key in the key-pad, the remaining text is shown in the lower
line:
Test
MAIN MENU: SELECT WITH < > PRESS
SYSTEM FEED*fAPER SERVICE RET
System
The required function is selected by moving the cursor by means of the arrow keys
in the key-pad on the control panel front.
Feed-paper The function is selected, by pressing the [4!] -key.
Service*
Out/in-controi J
7 Out/in-control
Main menu
Out/in-control Disable - Address

Zone
1) Controls*- BT-outputs(AUX.DHM)
3) Sounders* Controls (1-240)
Fire-brigade (Fire fighters)
L Restore Address
Zone
Controls i BT-outputs
Sounders IControls
Fire-brigade (Fire fighters)
* See section 6.1 "Menu structure".
If the "OUT/IN-CONTROL"is selected in the main menu, the following text will
appear in the display:
OUT/IN-CONTROL: SELECT WITH < > PRESS

DISABLE RESTORE
f Disable J 7.1 Disable

When disabling parts of the system, the amber (yellow) lamp "FUNCTION
DISABLED" on the front of the control panel will light as long as the disabling
lasts.
All disablements must be allocated a time period.

By selecting manually disable time of 99 hours, the function will be disabled until
restored.
The maximum automatic disable time is 24 hours.
When disable time is out, those disabled functions will automatically be restored.
,^^
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL" is selected and then "DISABLE", the following text will

DISABLE: SELECT WITH < |> PRESS Ujfl

ADDRESS ZONE CONTROLS SOUNDERS v
("FIRE BRIGADE" will appear when ^( is pressed.)
f Disable address 7.1.1 Disable address

When disabling an address (detector, manual call-point or an interface unit), the
address will be isolated and not generate an alarm, prewaming or fault as long as
the disabling lasts.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE" and then "ADDRESS"are selected, the

following text will appear in the display:
DISABLE ADDRESS(ES)
SELECT ADDRESS OOOQ RET MM
Select the address no. to be disabled and press
The following text will appear in the display:
The selected address is ready to be disabled.
C This address is not yet disabled, - only prepared for disablement!
The next address (XXXX) will automatically appear. Select this or another address
by pressing ftl!.
If selected address is not present in the system, the following text will appear in the
display:
THE ADDRESS DOES NOT EXIST IK PANEL

LEGAL ADDRESSES xxxx TO XXXX
xxxx - lowest address in the system.

XXXX - highest address in the system.
When all addresses to be disabled are selected, move the cursor to "TIME" by
means of the arrow key and press [^j
DISABLEMENT OF n ADDRESS(ES)
DURATION 02 HOURS RET MM
n = number of addresses ready for disablement.
The time limit is automatically set to 2 hours (default value).

Press 'v'^to select other values, and press
DISABLEMENT OF ADDRESS(ES) OK
NUMBER: n TOTALm RfcT Him
n = number of addresses disabled in this operation,

m = number of addresses disabled total in the system.
f Disable zone 1
7.1.2 Disable zone
It is only possible to disable zones if zones have been programmed in custom data.
If not programmed the menu will not allow you to enter zone area.
When disabling zone(s) the addresses in the zone will be isolated and will not
generate an alarm, prewarning or fault.
The total number of zones are 240. Zone addresses are 1-240
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE" and then "ZONE" are selected, the

DISABLE ZONE 001 NEXT PREVIOUS TIME

*ZONETEXT RET MM
Select the zone number for disablement by pressing the 'y^ -key.
It is also possible to move the cursor to "NEXT" and "PREVIOUS" and press i to
select the zone numbers.
When correct zone number 1-240 is selected, move the cursor to "TIME", press >J
and the following text will appear in the display:
DISABLE ZONE 001 NEXT PREVIOUS TIME

TIME- DURATION 02 HOURS BET Milt
Select duration for disablement and press j^J
ZONE YYY DISABLE

MORE? YES HO
YYY is selected and that zone is disabled.
If more than one zone is to be disabled select "YES", press {^] and repeat the
disable procedure.
Select "NO" to end the "DISABLE ZONE" procedure.
f Disable controls H 7.1.3 Disable controls (password protected on operator level)

Disabling controls, ensures that output controls will not activate in the event of a
alarm.
When "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE" and then "CONTROLS" are selected, the

DISABLE OUTPUT CONTROLS

BT-OUTPUTS CONTROLS RET HIM
7.1.3.1 Disable BT-outputs (DHM, AUX)

If the BT-outputs is disabled, the outputs DHM (door holder magnets) and AUX
(controWalarm output) will not operate at alarm.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE", "CONTROLS"are selected and then the

"BT-OUTPUTS", the following text will appear in the display:
DISABLEMENT OF BT-OUTPUTS
Select the duration time for disablement by means of the arrow keys and press
DISABLEMENT OF BT-OUTPUTS
DISABLEMENT EXECUTED
Press 141 and the system will return to "DISABLE CONTROLS"-menu with
possibility to return to the main menu.
7.1.3.2 Disable controls (BSJ-100/101)

When disabling the controls, the control-outputs from external control-output
modules BSJ-100/BSJ-101 will not operate at alarm.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE", "CONTROLS" are selected and then the

"CONTROLS", the following text will appear in the display:
DISABLEMENT OF CONTROLS
Select duration time for disablement by means of the arrow-keys and press
DISABLEMENT OF CONTROLS
Press ,JJ, and the system will return to the "DISABLE CONTROLS", with
Output controls can be disabled/restored from a supperior computer thrue the

communication line.
f Disable sounders
j 7.1.4 Disable sounders (AK) (can be password protected in different
countries)
When disabling sounder output(s), the sounder(s) will not be activated at alarm. This
is applicable for the 4 standard sounder outputs and the outputs from external
sounder output board (BSB-100).
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE" and then "SOUNDERS" are selected, the

DISABLEMENT OF SOUNDERS
Select the duration time for disablement by means of the arrow keys and press
Press ^ J , and the system will return to the "DISABLE"-menu with possibility to
return to the main menu.
Disable 7.1.5 Disable Fire Brigade (BMA, BMFO, BMF)

Fire Brigade When disabling the Fire Brigade output (BMA), prewaming output (BMFO) and
fault output (BMF) will also be disabled.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "DISABLE" and then "FIRE BRIGADE" are selected,

the following text will appear in the display:
DISABLEMENT OF FIRE BRIGADE OUTPUT

Select duration time by means of the arrow keys and press
DISABLEMENT OF FIRE BRIGADE OUTPUT

Press 14! [ , and the system will return to the "DISABLE"-menu with possibility to
r~^ Restore 7.2 Restore

When disabled parts of the system (functions) are restored, these will revert to their
normal function.
The "FUNCTION DISABLED" lamp will turn off only when all disablements have
been restored.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL" and then "RESTORE" are selected, the following text will
RESTORE: SELECT WITH < > PRESS g

ADDRESS ZONE CONTROLS SOUNDERS
("RESTORE", "FIRE BRIGADE" will appear when <^ is pressed.)
f Restore address J 7.2.1 Restore address

Before restoring addresses it is always advisable to check the sensitivity to ensure
that an alarm is not present.
By restoring the address(s), the addresses will revert to their normal function.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE" and then "ADDRESS" are selected, the

RESTORE ADDRESS(ES)
SELECT ADDRESS 000$ RET MM
Select the address(es) to be restored by means of the arrow keys and press
n ADDRESS(ES) RESTORED OK
ADDRESS XXXX RET MM
n = number of restored address(es).
The next address (XXXX) will automatically appear. Select that or a another
address by means of the arrow keys and press [jj].
If selected address is not present in the system, the following text will appear in the
display.
THE ADDRESS DOES NOT EXIST IN PANEL

LEGAL ADDRESSES xxxx TO XXXX
xxxx - the lowest address in the system.

XXXX - the highest address in the system.
f Restore zone J 7.2.2 Restore zone

It is possible to restore zones only if zones are programmed in custom data.
When restoring of zones, addresses connected to the zones will revert to their
normal function.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE" and then "ZONE" are selected, the

RESTORE OF ZONE 001 NEXT PREVIOUS OK

zonetext zone 1' RET MM
Select zone number to be restored by means of the arrow keys and press
It is also possible to move the cursor to "NEXT" and "PREVIOUS" and press
to select zone number.
When correct zone number is selected, move the cursor to "OK?", press and
ZONE YYY RESTORED

MORE? YES NO
YYY is selected and restored zone.
If more than one zone is to be restored select "YES", press j^jj and repeat the
restoring procedure.
Select "NO" to end the "RESTORE ZONE"-menu.
f Restore controls j 7.2.3 Restore controls

By restoring the controls, these will activate at alarm.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE" and then "CONTROLS" are selected,

RESTORE OUTPUT CONTBOLS

BT-oirmurs CONTROLS RET MM
7.2.3.1 Restore BT-outputs (DHM, AUX)

By restoring BT-outputs, the outputs DHM (door holder magnets) and AUX
(controWalarm output) will activate at alarm.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE", "CONTROLS" and then "BT-OUTPUTS1

are selected, the following text will appear in the display:
RESTORE OUTPUT CONTROLS

RESTORE COMPLETED
Press Q, and the system will return to the "RESTORE CONTROLS" with
7.1.3.2 Restore controls (BSJ-100/101)

By restoring the controls, the control outputs from external control output
module(s) BSJ-100/BSJ-101 will activate at alarm.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE", "CONTROLS" and then"CONTROLS"

are selected, the following text will appear in the display:
RESTORE OUTPUT CONTROLS

RESTORE COMPLETED
Press yJ], and the system will return to the "RESTORE CONTROLS "-menu with
f Restore sounders J 7.2.4 Restore sounders (AK)

By restoring the sounder(s), the sounder(s) will revert to their normal function at
fire alarm. This is applicable for the 4 standard sounder outputs and the outputs
from external sounder output board (BSB-100).
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE", and then "SOUNDERS" are selected, the

RESTORE: SELECT WITH < > PRESS gl)

RESTORE COMPLETED
Press , and the system will return to the "RESTORE"-menu with possibility to
Restore Fire Brf-

I 7.2.5 Restore Fire Brigade/Fighters (BMA, BMFO, BMF)
By restoring the Fire Brigade/Fighters output BMA (Alarm output), BMFO
(Prewarning output) and BMF (Fault output), the output will revert to their normal
function at alarm, prewaming or fault.
If "OUT/IN-CONTROL", "RESTORE" and then "FIRE BRIGADE" are selected,

RESTORE: SELECT WITH < > PRESS gj]

RESTORE COMPLETED
Press |^JJ, and the system will return to the "RESTORE"-menu with possibility to
f Show status J 8 Show status
r MAIN MENU
Out/in-control
MAIN MENU
Alarm
Show status
- Prewarning
Addr./loop-fault
Show status System fault
- Disablements
Alarmcounter
Stored events (last 150)
Test
System
When "SHOW STATUS"is selected, the following text will appear in the display:
Feed-paper SHOW STATUS SELECT WITH < > PRESS gl]

ALARM PREWARNING ADDR7LOOP-FAULT v
By pressing the ^-key the rest of the text will appear in the lower line.
Service*
Alarm: The last 20 stored alarms

*)Prewarning: The last 20 active prewarnings.
*)Addr./loop-fault: The last 20 active faults from detectors/detector-loops.
*)System fault: The last 20 active system faults.
Disablements: All stored disablements.
Alarmcounter: Number of stored alarms.
Stored-events: The last 150 stored events.
*) - These events are cleared when the "RESET'-button is pressed.

Move the cursor to the required function and press the I^Jl key.
For the function "SHOW STATUS", option "ALARM", the text in the display will
be:
SHOW STATUS ALARM

ADDRESS 0296 DATE; 11,02,91 TL 16.25
Use the 'v'Â. arrow keys to scroll through the stored alarms.
Use the 3 arrow keys to return to "SHOW STATUS"menu.
f Stored events J "STORED EVENTS" is continually up-dated detailing the last 150 events in the
system. The last event will always be shown first.
All activities eg. alarms, prewarnings, faults, silence, reset, open and closing front
door etc. are stored with date and time.
If the "STORED EVENTS" function is selected, the display will indicate as

follows.
SHOW STORED EVENTS

ON;PRINTER DISPLAY RET #m
As indicated in the above, the stored information can be shown in the display or on
the optional printer. The printer will start with the latest events.
The optional printer may be stopped at any time simply by pressing one of the
arrow keys in the key-pad located on the control panel front.
If display is selected, use the arrow keys to scroll through "STORED

EVENTS".
The "STORED EVENTS" function presents the events in a reduced format with
date and time.
The content is:
* All alarms.
* All prewamings.
* All faults (internal and external).
* All button operations at event handling (SILENCE/RESET).
* All automatic disablements at reset.
* All disablements carried out by means of the menu and the arrow keys.
* All disablements executed via data line.
* All manually executed restorations.
* All group disablements, externally controlled.
* All group restorations, externally controlled.
* All functions related to alarm organization (time delay of external alarm).
* All functions entered (carried out) via password.
* Openings of the control panel front door.
* Closing of the control panel front door.
* "Cold-start", the system has been powered up.
* "Warm-start", ("watch-dog" internal function).
c Test 9 Test
*AIN MENU
Test Front panel

BMA/BMF/BMFO
Fault
Sounders
Buzzer
When entering the "TEST"-function in the main menu, the following text will
TEST
FRONT PANEL BMA/BMF/BMFO FAULT
In the lower line the arrow indicates more text.
Move the cursor to the required function and press the \^Ji\ key.
:\
9.1 Front panel
If the "FRONT PANEL" function is selected, the display is tested by showing all
characters, and all lamps on the control panel front will light. The function is
stopped by pressing any of the arrow keys. A special test sequence is also printed
out on the optional printer, if this is installed.
RepelteFunits"lrriay also be tested in this function by opening door (BU-100/101) or
operating test button (BU-70).
i 9.2 BMA/BMF/BMFO
If the "BMA/BMF/BMFO" function is selected the following text will appear in the
display:
TEST OF TRANSMISS. LINE TO FIRE BRIGADE

WHEN COMPLETED PRESS gjf
This function will activate the corresponding outputs.

Inform the fire brigade if connected!
*
Fault 93 Fault
If the "FAULT" function is selected the following text will appear in the display:
TEST EARTH-FAULT ACTIVE
The test process takes one minute. It is indicated by dots appearing in the display
for the first half minute. Then the sequence is reversed the next half minute. This
test process is a real one, and an genuine earth fault is introduced. The internal
buzzer is activated. The test is terminated by pressing the \jJ^ button.
When this earth fault test sequence is finished, the next sequence will automatically
start. The following text will appear in the display:
TEST ADDRESS FAULT ACTIVE
In this sequence the control panels ability to receive fault messages from the
detectors/detector-loops is tested. This sequence also lasts for one minute. A fault
message on address 0001 will be shown provided this address is not disabled. The
fault will activate the internal buzzer.
When this address test sequence is finished, the next sequence will automatically
start. The following text will appear in the display:
TEST BATTERY ACTIVE
This sequence (which is a real battery capacity test) lasts for 10 seconds and
normally should not give any fault message. (This test is automatically carried out
by the BS-100 every day at 10:00 AM).
Before continuing operate the "SOUNDER SILENCE" and "RESET" pushbuttons.
Sounders 9.4 Sounders

When the above test sequence is completed, return to the "TEST" option and select
the "SOUNDERS"sequence by moving the cursor with the arrow keys and then
press the [^| key.
SOUNDER TEST ACTIVE

WHEN COMPLETED PRESS
During this test sequence all alarm outputs will be activated (0,5 second ON every
8th second). The sequence is terminated by pressing the [41 key.
c Buzzer
i 9.5 Buzzer
When the sounder test sequence is finished, return to the "TEST" option and select
the "BUZZER" sequence by moving the cursor with the arrow keys and then press
the [J] key.
BUZZER TEST ACTWE

WHEN COMPLETED PRESS
The built-in buzzer will be activated until the buzzer test sequence is terminated by
pressing the j^j key.
Buzzers on all repeater units will also operate during this test sequence.
T System J 10 System
MAIN MENU
System
Beyond-limit Loop
1 Polluted Total 1 Printer
I Display
Intcmnl _ Prnnram vf*r5io n
1 Adjust-clock
f Show-clock
2) f nnfini iratinn* r*nmm /-.h^nnai

Silence alarm (alarm delay) , Standard (T1)
BU-units l-Additional (T2)
DYFI-changes Alarm
Battery voltage [ Prewaming
Pocket Pager I Filter
1)
Add
Transfer Printer texts
* See section 6.1 - "Menu structure".
Select "SYSTEM" in the main menu, and the following text will appear in the
display:
SYSTEM SELECT WITH < > PRESS <J

SENSITIVITY INTERNAL CONFIG. DATA MM
The rest of the text will appear by pressing the ^?t key.
f: Sensitivity 10.1 Sensitivity

The "SENSITIVITY" function enables the user to read the analogue value of an
individual detector(address), from a loop or from all addresses connected to the
control panel. The analogue value is automatically updated every 5th second. To
achieve all advantages available in this function, the optional printer must be fitted
to the control panel.
An analogue value may be seen even when device is disabled.
If the "SENSITIVITY" function is selected by moving the cursor with the arrow
and enter-keys, the following text will appear in the display:
RET MM
10.1.1 Address
By selecting "ADDRESS" the following text will appear in the display:
ADDRESS SENSITIVITY
SINGLE ADDRESS LOOP TOTAL RET MM
If "SINGLE-ADDRESS" is selected, the following text will appear in the display:
ADDRESS SENSITIVITY
ADDRESS: 0000 RET MM
Here it is necessary to select the address number by moving the cursor to the correct
column and then setting the number in question by using the ^>t or tfa keys.
When the correct address no. is set, operate the [4^] key.
If detector address 0001 is selected, the following text will appear in the display:
ADDRESS: 0001
SENSITIVITY: 074WHEN COMPLETED PRESS I+T
The analogue value (sensitivity) is updated every 5th second. The value will alter
slightly at each update due to minor environmental changes. (During the first few
seconds of the sequence the display will show sensitivity = 000).
Normally the value shall be between 32 and 112 (standard range). Values below 32
indicate detector fault. Values between 112/128 indicate prewarning, and values
above 128 indicate fire alarm.
The sequence is terminated by pressing the 1^] key. Another address may now be
selected.
If the sensitivity (analogue signal) from all detectors in a loop is to be checked,

the loop number has to be selected from this text in the display:
ADDRESS SENSITIVITY
LOOP 02 RET
When the loop number in question is selected with the arrow keys and the [4! key,
the following text will appear in the display (when selecting loop 01):
ADDRESS LOOP 01
PRINTER DISPLAY RET MM
In this sequence it is possible to select between a print-out from the optional printer,
or an indication in the display. The selection is carried out by moving the cursor to
"PRINTER" or "DISPLAY" with the arrow keys and then press the [^J key. The
sensitivity value for one detector will remain in the display for about 1 second
before changing to the next detector.
This sensitivity sequence can be terminated by pressing the j^j key. The sequence
is automatically terminated when the sensitivity of all detectors has been indicated
in the display:
If a total sensitivity check is to be carried out, select the "TOTAL" menu option
under the "ADDRESS" sequence by moving the cursor to "TOTAL" with the arrow
keys and press thej^j key. The sequence is carried out the same way as described
above and a selection between printer or display can be made.
10.1.2 Beyond-limit
If "SENSITIVITY" and then "BEYOND-LIMIT" are selected from the menu, only
detectors beyond limits are listed out in the display or on the optional printer.
ADDRESSES SENSITIVITY BEYOND LIMITS

HIGH LEVEL: 100 LOW LEVEL: 045
The limits appearing in the display are preset at the factory. Detectors having a
sensitivity beyond these limits should be serviced.
The preset limits can be changed by means of the arrow keys. The[^] key must be
pressed to activate the function.
Also in this sequence it is necessarry to select if the result shall be presented in the
display or printed out on the optional printer. If the display is selected, each detector
address beyond the preset limits will be indicated for approx. 5 seconds. The
following text appears in the display:
SENSITIVITY BEYOND OMITS TESTING

ADDRESS: 001 XXX PRESS H TO STOP
This sequence will be automatically completed when all detector addresses beyond
limits have been listed, or when the |^| key is pressed.
SENSITIVITY BEYOND LIMITS TESTING

ALL EXAMINED. XXXX BEYOND LIMIT
A smoke detector exposed to air pollution, dust or similar environment will slowly
be polluted and may approach the alarm limit. This can lead to an unwanted alarm.
When an address reaches the monitoring level (Between 96 - 103 answer pulse), the
BS-100 DYFI function will automatically raise the alarm limit so that the quiscent
value and alarm level threshold is maintained.
P-B S 100/FCE/PM5/GKa/210895 33 Autronica AS

10.13 Polluted
If "SENSITIVITY" and then "POLLUTED" are selected, the following text will
ADDRESSES POLLUTED (LIMIT 9:00)

As indicated above, a selection has to be taken if the information is to be given in

the display or printed out on the optinal printer. When this selection has been made,
only those detectors which have had their alarm level raised will be shown.
All indicated detectors should be serviced.
c Internal 10.2 Internal
MAIN MENU
*- System Sensitivity
Internal -i Program-version
Configuration I Adjust-clock
* Data I Show-clock
10.2.1 Program-version
If "SYSTEM", "INTERNAL" and then "PROGRAM-VERSION" are selected by
means of the arrow keys, it is possible to see the programme version present in the
system. The following text will appear in the display:
INTERNAL PROGRAM VERSION

PROGRAM: X-XX SYSTEM-TEXT: X-XX
"SYSTEM TEXT" indicates the menu program version.
10.2.2 Adjust-clock
If "SYSTEM", "INTERNAL" and then "ADJUST-CLOCK" are selected by means
of the arrow keys, it is possible to adjust the built-in clock. The following text will
ADJUST DATE AND TIME

DATE: dd.mm,yy Tl: hh.mm RET
Adjustment of date and time will be stored in "STORED EVENTS" described in

section 8.
10.2.3 Show clock

If "SYSTEM", "INTERNAL" and then "SHOW-CLOCK" are selected by means of
the arrow keys, it is possible to check that clock shows the correct time. The
SHOW DATE AND Tl ME

DATE: dd.mm.yy TI: hh.mm BET MM
f Configuration J 10.3 Configuration

See "Commissioning Handbook" - BS-100.
10.4 Data
f Feed paper J 11 Feed paper

MAIN MENU
I Feed paper
When "FEED PAPER" is selected from the main menu a fixed length of paper is
fed from the optional printer each time the [^j key is pressed.
If the 14! key is kept constantly pressed, the paper feed continues until the pressure
on the key is released.
f Service J 12 Service
MAIN MENU
1
Service
Appendix A Country variations

A.1 Strapping
Within the menu/system text EPROMs there is a country code that must
correspond to the code set with the function code straps (jumpers) W14, W15,
W16 and W17 located on the main board BSA-100.
The function code is used inside the system program to perform the required
functions for that particular country or market, (e.g. SOLAS and Offshore etc.).
Country Program code Function code

Menu program 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 10 11 12 13 14 15
Norway P5-BS100-3N20 X X X
Sweden P5-BS100-3S20 X X X X
Denmark P5-BS100-3D20 X X X
England P5-BS100-3E20 X X X X
Finland P5-BS100-3F20 x x X
Holland P5-BS100-3H20 X X X
Italy P5-BS 100-3120 X X X X
Hungary P5-BS100-3U20 X X X X
Germany P5-BS100-3T20 X X X X
France P5-BS100-3A20 X X X X
Spain P5-BS100-3P20 X X X X
Strapping field W14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BSA-100 W15 1 1 1 1 o o 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Ref. fig. 2.6 in W16 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Comm.handbook W17 1 0 10 10 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0
*) Function code 8 is SOLAS version.
**) Function code 15 is OFFSHORE version.
I= Installed strap.
0 = Open strap.
Function codes and belonging functions.
--^Function code
Function no. ^-~->^^ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Function number: 0 7 2 1 1 5 0 0 16 7 0 1 0 0 0 16
See description 12 3 4 3 11 22 12 4 22
15 14 8 6 15 23 15 10 24
18 If 9 13 18 21 25
19 n 10 If 20 23
20 22 16
21
23
Menu Program
J 1--ES LOO . XNXX
1 Versions no.
1 Language (N = Norwegian)
11
" rrogram no.
Control panel type
System program
:xx
1 - BS100 - 2
Version no.
r- j. ___ _ .
system program
Functions:
Function no. Description of function

0 Standard function
1 LED no. 2, Lights up when alarm sounders are disabled.
2 LED no. 2, Lights up when address control is activated.
3 LED no. 3. Lishts UD when front door is open.
4 LED no. 3. Lights up when BMA is disabled.
5 Mains LED, Lights when the central panel has working voltage.
6 Mains LED, Lights when the central panel is in normal condition.
7 LED, "More Alarms" is pulsating when more alarms is active, and
switched off at the first registrated alarm in the scrolling function.
8 Internal buzzer gives signal when detectors are disabled. Silence
by pressing silence sounder button.
9 Internal buzzer gives signal when BMA and AK are disabled.
Can not be silenced by silence sounder button.
10 Internal buzzer gives signal after pressing silence sounder button in
alarm condition.
11 Internal buzzer gives signal every 4th minute when the front door
is closed and the central panel is normal condition.
12 Disabling of internal buzzer when the front door is open.
13 Disabling of BMA, BMFO and BMP when the front door is open.
14 Disabling of BMA, BMFO, BMP and output control when the
front door is open.
15 Output no. 10 (SP) is active when the front door is open.
16 System message is given 1 minute after interrupt of 220V AC.
17 Svstem message is given 30 minutes after interrupt of 220V AC.
18 Silence sounders and reset buttons have to be operated for more than
2 seconds.
19 Only 4 digit of text on the first line, additional text on the second line
20 BMP is active in normal condition and "open" in fault condition.
Resets to active at silence sounders.
21 Disabling of detectors and alarm sounders can be password protected
on operator level in different countries.
22 Alarm delay for marin installations (SOLAS) .
See spesial description.
23 Automatic disabling of detectors in alarm condition after reset has
to be accepted within 10 seconds.
24 No automatic disabling of detector in alarm condition after reset.
25 Reset time is programmed to be a minimum, also after alarm
Appendix A.2 Functions
A.2.1 SOLAS (Safety of life at sea)

SOLAS program version can be chosen for any language.
Verification before automatic disablement, see section 3.2 and 4.2 in the "Operators
Handbook"- BS-100.
If one or more addresses are still in an alarm condition after the "RESET"
procedure, an operator acknowledge is required to have these addresses disabled.
At the end of the "RESET" procedure the following text will appear in the display:
ADDRESS(ES) STILL IN ALARM

TO DISABLE PRESS l+fj WITHIN f 0 SECONDS
If the |4i[ key is not acknowledged within the limit of 10 seconds, new alarms will
be given for these addresses.
By pressing the [^JJ key within the time limit, the address will automatically be
disabled. To find the addresses concerned, the menu function "SHOW-STATUS",
"DISABLEMENTS" should be used.
Alarm delay (Tl, T2), see section 3.2 and 4.2.
If the silent alarm input is active the alarm outputs will be delayed by period Tl at
alarm from an automatic detector. In the standard version the additional alarm delay
period T2 will be started when the "SILENCE SOUNDERS" button is pressed.
For the SOLAS version the alarm delay T2 will not be activated by operate
"SILENCE SOUNDERS" and the alarm outputs will be blocked.
This means that there will be no automatic alarm after ended alarm delay Tl.
If "SILENCE SOUNDERS'* is not operated, there will be a automatic alarm at
the end of Tl.
If more than one alarm is present within time limit of alarm delay (Tl), the alarm
delay will proceed unchanged from the first alarm and to the end of the selected
alarm delay. If "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated within selected alarm delay,
the AK/BMA-outputs will be blocked. If new alarms are registered after operating
the "SOUNDER SILENCE", a new delay period will start from the time the new
alarms are registered.
If the AK/BMA-outputs are required to be activated the silent alarm input must be
removed or a manual call-point operated.
A.2.2 LPC (England)

Disablement of loop (under service-menu) activates the internal buzzer.
If one or more addresses are still in alarm condition after the "RESET" procedure,
an operator acknowledge is required to have these addresses disabled by pressing
the [^] key on the front panel (as SOLAS).
Disablement of internal buzzer is not allowed.
Disabling the sounders through the menu will illuminate the "SOUNDERS
DISABLED" lamp.
Disablement of the fire brigade output will illuminate the "FIRE BRIG.
DISABLED" lamp.
A.2.3 - Denmark
If one or more addresses are still in alarm condition after the "RESET" procedure,
an operators acknowledge is required to have these addreses disabled by pressing
the gJ] key on the front panel (as SOLAS).
BMA, BMFO, BMP and output controls are disabled when the front door is open.
System fault is given after 30 minutes interrupt of 220V AC.
A.2.4 - Sweden
Inverted BMP-output (active when there is voltage on the control panel).
Internal buzzer is disabled when front door is open.
Sounder silence and reset button must be pressed for more than 2 seconds to
activate the function.
Custom spesified address text is presented on line 2.
Appendix B - Replacing the paper roll in the

optional printer
If a printer is fitted, it is located on the inside of the control panel inner door.
A: Open the control panel inner door.

B: Remove the empty roll by releasing the locking clip on the right-hand side
of the paper roll shaft, and pull the shaft out to the other side (See fig. A).
C: Let the free end of the new paper roll point downwards. Bend it and
guide it into the printer paper slot in the lower end of the printer.(See fig. A).
D: Bend the end of the paper in a arrow shape to simplify the import into
the printer paper slot.
E: Put the new paper roll in its correct place, insert the paper roll shaft again
and secure it by means of the locking clip.
Paper slot
Control panel
inner door
Paper roll
Paper roll
shaft
Printer paper
Locking clip
(ten hand)
Fig. A: Side view of the optional printer located at the rear side
of the inner door.
Ribbon
container
Adjusting
wheel for
ribbon
Slot for ribbon
Fig. B: Location of the finger screw on the optional printer (front view).
F: Feed the paper manually through the printer by turning the finger screw.
(See fig. B)
G: Close the control panel inner door.
P-BS10fl/FCE/PM5/GKa/210895 41 Autronica AS
Appendix C - Multiple BS-100/-Control panels

with common repeater units (BU-100/101/70)
BS-100
I* CL EA-
CL Display-unit CL Display-unit
Protocol (BU-unit) (BU-unit)
Fire alarm control
panel
\ interfacer
LL
I)igital inputs
BS-100
Fire alarm control
Li] 4 Jigital outputs
_ P rnoramv^rcinn in PA
panel P1-EAC4/A1-22
* Program variant 1XX

(ex. 103) promises that the
program is communicating
with BU-units.
BS-100
Fire alarm control
panel
There is no communication between the individual BS-100 control panel.

Each individual BS-100 control panel gives warning about its own condition and
relays this to the common BU-units.
(BU-units, common name for repeater units BU-100, BU-101 and BU-70.
- Custom designed texts within each BS-100 control panel is presented to all
BU-units.
- The EA-computer has to contain a special system program for comm. with BU-
units.
- Digital in-/outputs can be used as supplement function from EA-.
The table below shows which operator buttons. Indication lamps are fitted to the
various BU-units.
Indication lamps BU-100 BU-101 BU-70
H1 Indicator lamp X X
Device(s) still in alarm cond. X X
Prewarning X X X
Fault X X X
Function disabled X X
Mains X X X
More alarms X X X
Operation buttons
More alarms X X X
Sounder silence X
Sounder silence (buzzer) X X
Reset X
C.1 Alarm /Prewarning / Fault /More alarms

BU-units can be programmed to present fire alarm, prewaming and fault with
text on the display.
C.1.1 Fire alarm from a BS-100

Fire alarm message (panel address, loop, detector no. or custom text) will only
appear in the display of the BS-100 control panel which has registered the
incident and on the BU-units.
BU-100 will present alarm from all detectors, BU-70 and BU-101 can be
programmed into presentation zones.
Fire alarm message will only appear in the display of the BS-100 control panel
even if the door is open.
Internal buzzer and FIRE indication lamps will activate on the BS-100 control
panel which registered the fire alarm and on the BU-units.
Only the BMA-output on the control panel which regisered the fire alarm will
operate.
Only those control outputs on the BS-100 control panel which registered the
fire alarm will be activated.
Only those sounders connected to the control panel which registered the fire
alarm will operate.
Alarm output on the EA- will be activated (output L57).
C.1.2 Prewarning
Prewaming message (panel address, loop, detector no. or custom text) will only
appear in the display of the BS-100 control panel which registered the
prewaming and on the BU-units.
If the front door is open on the BS-100 control panel, there will be no
message in the display or transmitted to the BU-units. The message will
appear when the door is closed.
Internal buzzer and PREWARNING indication lamps will activate on the

BS-100 control panel which registered the prewaming and on the BU-units.
Only the BMFO-output on the control panel which registered the prewaming
will be activated.
Prewaming output on the EA- will be activated (output L58).
C.13 Fault
Detector-/System faults registered on a BS-100 control panel will only give
message to that control panel and on the BU-units. On the BS-100 control panel
the fault message will appear in the display. Internal buzzer and FAULT
indication lamp will also be activated.
If the door is open on the BS-100 control panel, there will be no fault message
in the display. The message will appear when the door is closed.
On the BU-units the internal buzzer and the FAULT indication lamp will be
activated. (No text in the display)
Fault output (not comm.fault) on the EA- will be activated (output L59).
Only the BMA-output on the control panel which registered the fault will be
activated.
If a communication failure between the BS-100 control panel and the EA

occurs, the fault message will be printed out on the printer on the BU-units.
Comm.fault output BS-/EA- will be activated (output L61).
When there is a communication failure between the EA and the BU-units the
comm.fault output EA-/BU- will be activated (output L62).
C.I.4 More alarms

The "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp will light on the BS-100 control panel
which is registering more than one alarm. When there is two alarms on diffe-
rent BS-100 control panels the "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp will not
light.
The "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp on the BU-units will light if there is
more than one alarm registered in the system. Two alarm from two different
BS-100 control panics will activate the "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp on
the BU-units.
C.I.5 Device(s) still in alarm cond.

After "RESET" the "DEVICE(S) STILL IN ALARM COND." indication lamp
may light on those BS-100 control panels which still has addresses in alarm
condition. If this lamp lights on one of the BS-100 control panels , it will also
light on the BU-units.
C.1.6 Function disabled

The "FUNCTION DISABLED" indication lamp will only light on the control
panel which is partly disabled. If this lamp is illuminated on one of the BS-100
control panels, it will also light on the BU-units.
C.1.7 Indication lamps HI, H2, H3

The indication lamps HI, H2 and H3 on the BS-100 control panel are
controlled separately.
The indication lamps HI, H2 and H3 on the BU-units are controlled from the
control outputs on the EA 2/3 (input L51, 52, 53).
C.2 Operation
C.2.1 SOUNDER SILENCE
C.2.1.1 From fire alarm control panel
When "SOUNDER SILENCE" button on the BS-100 control panel which has
registered the alarm is operated, all alarm devices connected to this control
panel and the internal buzzer on the BU- units are switched off.
If another BS-100 control panel is also in alarm condition, "SOUNDER
SILENCE" must also be operated at that control unit.
C.2.1.2 From EA- or BU-100

If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated from the EA 1/2/3 (separate input)
or the BU-100, all alarm devices and internal buzzers on all BS-100 control
panels will be silenced.
C.2.2 Reset
When operating the "RESET" on a control pane! hi abnormal condition (all other
control panels are hi normal condition), this will reset the entire system.
If another BS-100 control panel is in abnormal condition, operating of the "RESET"
will only reset the control panel which is operated.
To reset the entire system (BS-100 and BU-units) operate the last control panel in
abnormal condition.
C2.2.2 From EA- or BU-100

Operating of the "RESET" from EA 1/2/3 or BU-100 will reset the entire system.
C.2.3 More alarms

When operating the "MORE ALARMS" on the individual BS-100 control
panels, it is only possible to scroll alarms registered in that particular BS-100
control panel which has operated.
When operating the "MORE ALARMS" on BU-units, it is possible to scroll

alarms registered in the entire system.
C.3 Disable / Restore

Disablements on a BS-100 control panel will activate "FUNCTION
DISABLED" only on this control panel and on the BU-units.
Disablements will be stored in "STORED-EVENTS" and only showed hi the

menu "SHOW-STATUS DISABLEMENTS" on the control panel where the
disablement was carried out.
Disablements / restorations of address, zone, controls, sounders and Fire

brigade can only be carried out on the individual BS-100 control panel.
C.4 System
C.4.1 Sensitivity
Sensitivity control must be carried out at each individual BS-100 control panel.
C.4.2 Internal
The real-time clock in BS-100 control panels have to be set manually via
menu.
The EA- clock will be set equal to the clock in control panel with address A.
Appendix D BS-100 master / Control unit

with BS-60 slaves
BS-60
Fire alarm
control panel
1 loop
BS-60
BS-100 Fire alarm
Main fire alarm control panel
control panel 1 loop
BS-60
Fire alarm
control panel
1 loop
BS-60
Fire alarm
control panel
1 loop
When a condition (fire, fault, prewaming) is registered on a control panel (BS-100/

BS-60), the indication lamps on the panel front will light, the outputs will be
activated etc. in the normal way.
The custom texts presented in the display on both BS-100 and BS-60 have to be
manually programmed in both control panels.
There is no communication between the BS-60 control panels.
D.I Alarm /Prewaming / Fault/ More alarms

D.I.I Fire alarm
Fire alarm from the BS-100 control panel is only registered on the BS-100 control
panel. There will be no display on the BS-60 control panel(s).
Fire alarm from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60 control
panel and on the BS-100 control panel.
There will be no display on any other BS-60 control panel.
D.1.2 Prewaming
Prewaming from the BS-100 control panel is only registered on the BS-100 control
Prewaming from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60 control
D.I 3 Fault
(The BS-100 control panel will look at the BS-60 control panels as ordinary loops).
Fault from the BS-100 control panel is registered on the BS-100 control panel.
There will be no display on BS-60 control panel(s).
Fault from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60 control panel
and on the BS-100 control panel.
D.I.4 More alarms

More alarms from the BS-100 control panel will only be registered on the BS-100
control panel. There will be no display on the BS-60 control panel(s).
More alarms from a BS-60 control panel will also be registered as more alarms on
the BS-100 control panel. There will be no display on other BS-60 controll panels.
2 alarms from 2 different BS-60 control panels will be registered as more alarms on
the BS-100 control panel.
D.2 Operating
D.2.1 Sounder Silence
The "SOUNDER SILENCE" function will be dependent upon how it is configured
within each of the BS-60 control panels.
When operating the "SOUNDER SILENCE" on the BS-100 control panel, all alarm
devices will be switched off (also devices connected to the BS-60 control panels).
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" function is set to "OFF", the "SOUNDER

SILENCE" can only be operated from the BS-100 control panel.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" function is set to "ON", the "SOUNDER

SILENCE" can be operated from both the BS-60 and the BS-100 control panel.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated from a BS-60, alarm devices connected

to the BS-60 control panel which is operated, will be switched off.
D.2.2 Reset
The "RESET" function will also be dependent upon how it is configured within
each of the BS-60 control panels.
When operating the "RESET" from the BS-100 control panel, the entire system will
be reset.
If the "RESET" function is set to "OFF", the "RESET" can only be operated from
If the "RESET" function is set to "ON", the "RESET" can be operated from both the
BS-100 and the BS-60 control panel.
When operating the "RESET" from the BS-60 control panel, only the BS-60 which
is operated will be reset.
D.3 Disable / Restore

When disabling on a BS-60 control panel, the "FUNCTION DISABLED"
indication lamp will light only on this control panel.
This will be logged in "SHOW-STATUS DISABLEMENTS" and in "STORED-

EVENTS" only on the current control panel.
It is advisable to disable / restore BS-60 addresses from the BS-100.
D3.1 Address
The BS-100 can disable/restore all addresses in the system.
The BS-60 can only disable/restore addresses connected to it.
D3.2 Zone
Only zones defined in the BS-100 control panel can be disabled/restored from the
BS-100 control panel. Zones defined in a BS-60 control panel can be disabled/
restored only at the relevant BS-60 control panel.
D33 Controls
Controls connected to the BS-100 control panel can only be disabled/restored from
Controls connected to the BS-60 control panel can only be disabled/restored at the
relevant BS-60 control panel.
D3.4 Sounders
Sounders connected to the BS-100 control panel can only be disabled/restored from
Sounders connected to a BS-60 control panel can only be disabled/restored at the

relevant BS-60 control panel
D3.5 Fire brigade / fighters

BMA, BMP, BMFO outputs from the BS-100 control panel can only be disabled/
restored from the BS-100 control panel.
restored at the relevant BS-60 control panel.
D.4 System
D.4.1 Sensitivity
All addresses in the system (including those connected to the BS-60 control
panel(s)) can be interrogated from the BS-100 control panel.
From the BS-60 control panel it is only possible to interrogate the addresses
connected to it.
D.4.2 Internal
In all control panels the internal clock has to be set manually.
The internal clocks of all control panels are independant and must be set
individually.
Installation handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fire Alarm Control Panel
Installation handbook

BS-100 DYFI
P-BS100/DBE
Autronica AS
N-7005 Trondheim.
Phone: +47 73 58 10 00, fax: +47 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro n
Autronica Industrial Ltd., Watford, England

Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12, telex: 73 763 autrs n
Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n
P-BS100/DBE/PM5/210895 Autronica AS
Contents:
1 Mounting page 3
1.1 Location 3
1.2 Wall (bulkhead) mounting 3
1.3 Flush mounting 6
1.4 Cut-out and flush mounting in a (control) desk 8
1.5 Mounting in a 19" rack 9
2 Connections 10
2.1 Connections on list 10 and list 20,

alarm outputs and fire detector loops 11
2.2 Connections on list 3,
various outputs, group isolation, external alarm,
relay contacts, general alarm, electromagnetic
door holders and quiet (delayed) alarm output. 12
2.3 Connections on list 1 and list 2,
mains and accumulator (battery) 13
3 Expansion modules 14
3.1 External connections to

optional detector loop module BSD-100 14
optional alarm output module BSB-100 15
optional control output module BSJ-100 16
optional data output module BSL-100 17
Please observe!
This handbook contains installation instructions for fire alarm

system BS-100 DYFI ready designed and assembled from the
factory.
If the system is to be expanded on site, please see separate
booklets concerning internal mounting, internal connections,
switch settings, commisioning a.s.o.
1 Mounting
1.1 Location
The control panel is to be located in, or near by, the entrance according to local
regulations and in consultation with the fire brigade (fire fighters).
Wall/bulkhead 1.2 Wall (bulkhead) mounting
The BS-100 DYFI panel is delivered as standard in two types of steel plated
cabinets:
Cabinet UEA-22/1 for panels with up to two detector loops (max. 198
addresses).
Cabinet UEA-22/2 for panels with more than two detector loops (more than
198 addresses).
1.2.1
Release the electronic cassette by unscrewing the four screws on the front frame.
See fig. no. 1. The cassette including the front door can now be lifted out of the
cabinet.
If the cassette is fixed to the cabinet, bend it out carefully by using a screw
driver.
Fig. no. 1: Front frame screws
Front
screws
Front
screws
f ' Mounting height 1.2.2

The recommended mounting height of the panel top is 175 cm above the floor
due to optimal readability of the texts in the display.
In order to open the front door completely, there must be a free space of min. j
450 mm on the left hand side of the panel. J
1.2.3
The cabinets have four (4) mounting holes located at the rear wall. The two
upper holes are of the "key-hole" type. See fig. no. 2a (for cabinet UEA-22/1)
and fig. no. 2b (for cabinet UEA-22/2).
Mark and drill holes for fixing screws and plugs (max. 6 mm screws). See fig.
no. 2a and 2b.
Partly fasten the two upper screws.
446
387
310
246
'6,6
141
Fig. no. 2 a: Cabinet dimensions.
Cabinet UEA-22/2
DETAIL A
(CABINET) 446
SECTION *~
6.8 mm
45ZCUTC,.
Fig. no. 2b: Cabinet dimensions.
Please observe: The three small holes at the front of the four cabinet sides
are intended for mounting a cover frame used when the
cabinet is to be flush-mounted. See section 1.3.2.
1.2.4
Hang the cabinet to the two upper screws and check that the cabinet is angu-
larilly mounted. Fasten the two lower screws, and tighten all four screws.
1.2.5
Feed all cables into the cabinet from the top and/or the bottom through the
suitable cable inlets. See fig. no. 3.
In the fixed mains wiring to the panel a two-pole disconnect device

shall be provided to disconnect theequipment from the supply for
servicing.
When feeding cables into the cabinet from the bottom side, the following
precautions must be taken:
a) The mains cable must be fed through the cable inlet at the very
left hand side.
b) All other cables should be fed through the succesive inlets.
Let the thinnest cables be fed through the rightmost inlets.
c) If cables are fed into the cabinet from the top, all cables must be put
closely to the cabinet rear wall, guided to the bottom and bent
out to the front.
d) All cables fed into the cabinet must have a minimum length of 1 m
inside the cabinet.
26mm 17mm
Cable inlet holes

3 20mm
Fig. no. 3: Cable inlet holes.
1.2.6
All cables are guided through the the open space at the lower left hand side of
the electronic cassette. Then the cassette is mounted and the fixing screws are
fastened. See fig. no. 1.
Cables fed into the cabinet from the top are now partly hidden behind the
cassette.
1.2.7
The cables' length are adjusted according to the appropriate terminals, then
stripped and connected. See section 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5.
Installation handbook: BS- 1 00 DYFI Fire Alarm Control Panel
f Flush mounting ) 1.3 Flush mounting
(, Cut-out i :, - J
' . ,. . ' ^ ...^jf
h t
1.3.1
Cut-out for mounting of the cabinet in a wall. See fig. no. 4.
Before the cabinet is mounted, remove the electronic cassette as described in

section 1.2.1,
The dimensions given include space for the cover frame. See fig. no. 5.
Cables are fed into the the cabinet from the top and/or from the bottom.
Cabinet UEA-22/1
Cabinet UEA-22/2
Fig. no. 4 Cut-out and cable inlets, both types of cabinet
C 1.3.2
Flush mounting of cabinet in a wall.
If a flush mounting is planned before construction of the wall, the cabinet can be
used as casting form for the wall. The cover frame must be mounted and the
electronic cassette must be removed. The cover frame is fixed by means of
"POP"-riveting.
C Please observe that the cabinet must be supported before concreting to

avoid deformation.
The cable tubes needed are fed into the cabinet by means of a socket joint.
1.3.3
Mounting of cabinet in a wall. See fig. no. 5.
Cover frame for flush mounting of cabinet UEA-22/1 = UE-818/L
Cover frame for flush mounting of cabinet UEA-22/2= UE-818/H
Cabinet UEA-22/1
475,5
1
< 387
Screws
246
0 6,8
\ I
Cable tubes
Cabinet UEA-22/2
475,5
Fig. no. 5: Dimensions, cabinets mounted in a wall
1.3.4 Cable insertion.
See section 1.2.5, 1.2.6 and 1.2.7.
Control desk
1.4 Cut-out and flush mounting in a (control)desk
When the control panel is mounted in a control desk or similar, the cabinet is not
needed. The cut-out dimensions therefore are only for the electronic cassette. See
fig. no. 6
09
Fixing screws M4x10, DIN965, UTN 007/4F
gj 9- , t-^ 1
y i
j 427
h
288
274
.. - /7> IP 7
26 <- _ 335 'W f 7 ^-J
^
* 20 ^ : ^
"^
Neoprene gaskets, 2 pcs. 10x4x270 mm <J
! 20
/^. HO. 6:Cut-out for mounting in a control desk
1.5 Mounting in a 19" rack

When the control panel is to be mounted in a control desk, two (2) mounting
brackets type UE-814 must be used.
The control panel is mounted without the cabinet.
The mounting brackets are fixed to the electronic cassette with two screws 0 5
mm in each bracket as shown in fig. no. 7. The figure shows the cut-out
dimensions and the location of the fixing holes.
When all cables are fed into the rack, the control panel with the mounting
brackets is put into the rack and fastened.
6,8x10,3
Fig, no. 7: Dimensions (incl. mounting bracket) for mounting in a 19" rack
c 2. Connections
Remove fuses Fl and F2 before any connection work ! }
Location of fuses and terminal blocks ( list 1, list 2, list 3, list 10 and list 20 ) are
clearly indicated on the main board cover. See fig. no. 8.
FuseFl FuseF31
Fuse F32
lin board
cover with text
information
List 10 and list 20
List 1 and list 2

Front panel
Plastic door
Fig. no. 8: Location of terminals and fuses
Fuses
Fuses: Size Type Protecting
Fl 1A Slow Mains
F2 6,3 A Fast Battery
F3 1A Slow External 24 V DC
F31 1A Fast Alarm output 1
All fuses are located on the main board just above the terminals.
P-BS100/DBE/PM5/210895 10 Autronica AS
c List 10 and 20 2.1 Connection on list 10 and list 20

Alarm outputs and foe detector loops
Function External List 10 Internal

connection function
Alarm output 1
for bells/sounders
i~cns~
o
g
' '
+24V
ov
10
en
ro
o>
10
>
F
N- V3>
n o
^5-
cr
4 4
Alarm output 2 +24V ->i > 3K
^ ^
for bells/sounders ^ SS g
ro
o ov 00 StL
IS. c
o a3
+24V ro >
Alarm output 3
for bells/sounders >t_i \J-i(^' vhci' OV
CO
w
o
X

C 0
a o
0-3
Q&
s gf
<
Alarm output 4 8
+24V CO
> 5.
for bells/sounders ^Q[ OV
CO
ro E
List
20
Detector loop
connection.
(The example
c S'8
Og
A
A'
0
(0)
shows a single mriHi og B +

loop system.)
( $>g B' (+)
Detector loop
^S5 A 0
| \
connection. 08 A' (0)
(The example ^^J3
shows a double og B +
loop system.)
B' (+)
Fig. no. 9: Connections on list 10 and 20.
c 2.2 Connection on list 3

Various inputs/outputs; group disablement, external alarms, relay contacts,
general alann, electromatic door holders and "quiet" (delayed) alarm input.
Function
External ListS Internal
connection function
ov
mm*tt~
Special domestic
(national) functions ^^~ SP 0 o
Alarm organization ~^+ D/N 0U Delayed alarm

signal
P> H
Monitoring of external
equipment ~^ E <S>*
Fault signal. When
used, cut strap W13
"5
f
an
3
3
General alarm _^-_ GA 05 Steady signal to all
"Alarm outputs"
Group disabling 1 1 0 Disable

groups
O
Group disabling 2 0s; of detectors.
Freely
*.
Group disabling 3
^r
Max 1 A at 24 V DC
3
+
programmeable.
0 ^ "Ext. 24 V" (list 2)

Electromagnetic O
ffi and "DMH+" have
door holder(s)
^>n i
common fuse. F3
(location: + leader)
r. r.
0 :
O Max. 1 A at
Changes at fire G
13 24 V DC. X
alarm condition ?| "71
5?
"* 8
OS
Changes at fire Max. 1 A at w

OB; ft o ^3
alarm condition 24 V DC.
Fig. no. 10: Connections on list 3

f List-land 2 J 2.3 Connection on list 1 and list 2

Mains, chassis (earth), battery, test output (internal funtion) and
power output 24 V DC.
Function External List Internal

connection 1 function
Chassis (earth) _t $a:l
230 V AC, Mains 0 &
230 VAC, Mains L :;01S;
List
2
BATT + 0 ' &
Accumulator
(battery)
BATT- 0^
Internal function Test 0o>

ffl
X
r* + "Ext. 24 V " and
24 V DC output NJ
"DHM+" list 3
Max. load 1 A
i 00B
have common
fuseF3
Fig. no. 11: Connections on list 1 and list 2.
The fire alarm control panel shall not be connected to the mains and battery,
and the removed fuses shall not be installed until commisioning of the system.
C 3. Expansion modules
3.1 External connections to optional detector

module BSD-100 loop module BSD-100
The module features two optional detector loops. Each loop has a capacity of
max. 99 addresses.
Example of a
single loop system
Example of a
double loop system
Fig, no. 12: External connections on BSD-100.
The figure shows two different types of loop connections: The double loop
system and the single loop system. The two types of loop systems can both be
connected to eighter of the two terminals.
The "T"-output (open collector control output) terminals (no. 5 and 10) are
triggered by a fire alarm on any address in the loop.
Steady light in the LED until the BS-100 panel is reset.
3.2 External connections to optional alarm output module BSB-100

The module features 4 optional outputs (bells, buzzers, sounders, alann lights).
All alarm outputs (AK-1 to AK-4) are freely programmeable.
Connections ready made at the factory
24 V DC power supply
to the next BSB-100 unit 0 -. 0V
+ 24V DC
^mfsô
,F1 F2 F3 F4
'1A 1A 1A 1A
A 820Ohm/0,3 W
resistor must be
connected when the
output is not in use.
Alarm light
Electronic buzzer.
When the internal resistance exceeds
820Ohm, a parallel resistor of 820Ohm
must be connected in parallel to avoid
constant breakage signal.
Alann bells.
When using non-polarized alarm bells,
only the cables up to the first bell are
monitored.
820Ohm
When an alarm circuit with polarized bells are used,a 820Ohm resistor
must be connected in parallel to the last bell on the circuit as indicated in
the fig.
Fig. no. 13: Example of external connections on BSB-100
All alarm outputs (AK1 to AK4) are relay outputs: Max. load 1 A at 24 V DC.
?.u,
r
If
3.3 External connections to optional
control output module BSJ-100/BSJ-101.
The module features 16 control outputs. All outputs are freely programmable.
Lamp test (operates all outputs

on the same module)
0 V from the
BS-100 DYFI
panel -
51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011 1213 141516
At inductive
load, a
protecting
LED with diode must
serial resistor be used
R=l,5 kOhm
+ 24V DC
from BS-100 DYFI panel
(list 2, pt. 7 and 8, be
aware of the total load)
Fig. no. 14: Example of external connections on BSJ-100.
All outputs: Max. load 100 mA, open collector (NPN).
The control output modules BSJ-100 are used for up to 128 outputs. If more
outputs are needed, the control output modules BSJ-101 must be used.
Installation handbook: BS- 1 00 DYFI Fire Alarm Control Panel
3.4 External connections to optional data output module BSL-100

The module features both "20 mA current loop" and "RS232C" data outputs.
a aaapaa
nnnnnnn
1
I CLT- 2
S CLT + 3
ov 4
5 CLR- 5
CLR + 6
RTS 7
$ TXD 8
g DTR 9
* RXD 10
F/^. no. 15: External connections to data output module BSL-100
The mostly used connection configurations for BSL-100 and the corresponding
peripheral equipment are shown below:
3.4.1 Connection of peripheral data equipment to the BSL100 module.

Data output: 20 mA current loon.
Max. cable capacitance: 200 nF (at 1200 baud).

Max. cable capacitance: 25 nF (at 9600 baud).
Configuration A (on BSL-100): Active transmitter - Active receiver
Data output module Perpheral data

BSL-100: equipment:
Active transmitter, (Passive transmitter,
active receiver passive receiver)
ov i 0 0CLR-
CLT- 2 0 0 CLR+
CLT + 3 0 0
OV 4 0 0 CLT-
CLR - 5 0 0 CLT+
CLR + 6 0 0
RTS 7 0 0
TXD 8 0 0
DTR 9 0
0
RXD 10 0
0
Fig. no. 16: Active transmitter active receiver.
Configuration B (on BSL-100): Active transmitter - Passive receiver
Data output module Periphery data

BSL-100: equipment:
Active transmitter, (Active transmitter,
passive receiver passive receiver)
0V 10 0CLR-
CLT- 2 0 0 CLR+
CLT+ 3 0 0
0V 4 0 0
CLR- 5 0 0ov
CLR+ 6 0 0 CLT+
RTS 7 0 0
TXD 8 0 0
DTK 9 0 0
RXD 100
0
Fig, no. 17: Active transmitter - passive receiver
Configuration C (on BSL-100): Passive transmitter - Passive receiver
Data output module Periphere data

BSL-100: equipment:
Passive transmitter, (Active transmitter,
passive receiver active receiver)
0V 1 0 0
QOV
CLT- 2 0
CLT+ 3 0 0 CLR-
0V 4 0 0
CLR- 5 0 0ov
CLR+ 6 0 0 CLT-
RTS 7 0 0
TXD 8 0 0
DTR 9 0
0
RXD 100
0
>. 18: Passive transmitter passive receiver
Installation handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fke Alarm Control Panel
3.4.2 Table of connections between data output module BSL-100 and

Autronica manufactured peripheral equipment
Autronica Connection between Max. loop

peripheral equipment BSL-100 and resistance
type: peripheral equipment: (Ohm):
Ipc. 690
BU-100 Configuration type A 5 pcs. 450
Fireman's panel 10 pcs. 150
1 pc. 690
BU-101 (marine vers.) Configuration type A 5 pcs. 450
Fireman's panel 10 pcs. 150
Configuration type A Ipc. 690

BU-70 5 pcs. 450
Indication panel 10 pcs. 150
Configuration type B Ipc. 690

EA-2 5 pcs. 450
Micro computer 10 pcs. 150
Configuration type B Ipc. 690

EA-3 5 pcs. 450
Micro computer 10 pcs. 150
AutroMaster 200. Connected via driver

Alarm presentation unit RTZ-20
system (contact Autronica)
AutroMaster 3000. Connected via driver

Alarm presentation unit RTZ-20
system (contact Autronica)
Please be aware of the information given in section 3.4.1 conserning

max. cable capacitance.
For configuration of other types of peripheral equipment, please

contact Autronica.
"Configuration types": See section 3.4.1
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fire Alarm Control Panel
Commissioning handbook

BS-100 DYFI
Program version P1-BS100-3-20
P5-BS100-3E20
P-BS100/ECE
Autronica AS
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway
Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, telex 55 334 autro n.

Phone: + 47 51 89 19 60, fax: + 47 51 89 16 12, telex: 73 763 autrs n.

Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: + 47 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n.
Autronica Industrial Ltd.. Watford, England

Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
P-BS100/ECE/PM5/170895 Autronica AS
Commissioning handbook: BS-100DFF7 Fire Alarm Control Panel
Contents: Page
1 Test 4
1.1 Recommended test equipment 4

1.2 Test procedure 4
2 Setting of DIP-switches
on main board B S A-100 4
2.1 DIP-switch location 4
2.2 DIP-switch S401 6
2.6 Straps (jumpers) on the main board BSA-100 9
2.6.1 Straps functions 10
3 Expansion modules 11
3.1 Detector loop module BSD-100 11
3.1.1 Setting of detector loop addresses on the BSD-100 module. 12
3.1.2 Setting of reset number on the BSD-100 module. 12
3.2 Alarm output module BSB-100 12
3.2.1 Addressing of alarm output module BSB-100 13
3.2.2 Programming the number of alarm output modules BSB-100 13
3.3 Control output module BSJ- 100/BSJ-101 14
3.3.1 Programming of lamp test function on BSJ-100/101 15
3.3.2 Addressing of control output modules BSJ-100/101 16
3.3.3 Programming the number of control output modules BSJ-100/101 16
3.4 Data output module BSL-100 18
3.4.1 Addressing of communication channel 18
4. Start-up procedure 20
4.1 Control/connection procedure 20
4.2 Normal condition 21
5. Menu structure 22
5.1 Password
5.2 System-configuration (password protected) 24
5.2.1 Comm. channel 24
5.1.1.1 Panel address 25
5.1.1.2 Alarm info 25
5.2.2 Silence alarm (T1,T2) 25
5.1.2.1 Standard (Tl) 26
5.1.2.2 Additional (T2) 26
5.2.3 BU-units 26
5.2.4 DYFI-changes 27
5.1.4.1 Alarm 27
5.1.4.2 Prewaming 27
5.1.4.3 Filter 28
5.2.5 Battery voltage 28
5.2.6 Pocket pager 29
5.3 System-Data (password protected) 31
5.3.1 Change 31
P-BS10Q/ECE/PM5/170895 Autronica AS
5.3.1.1 Control outputs 32
5.3.1.2 Alarm outputs 32
5.3.1.3 Disabling group/Printer text 33
5.3.1.4 Zone connection/Saving 33
5.3.2 Add site data 33
5.3.3 Printout site specific data 34
5.3.3.1 Printout detector data 34
5.3.3.2 Printout printer text 34
6 Service (Password protected) 35

6.1 Service-report 35
6.1.1 DYFI-factors 36
6.1.1.1 Single-address 36
6.1.1.2 Loop 36
6.1.1.3 Total 36
6.1.2 Restart 37
6.1.3 Modifications 37
6.1.4 Loops 37
6.2 Service-Disable 37
6.2.1 Disablement of loop(s) 37
6.2.2 Disablement - int. buzzer 38
6.2.3 Disablement - int. printer 38
6.3 Service-Restore 38
6.3.1 Restore loop 38
6.3.2 Restor - int. buzzer 38
6.3.3 Restore - int. printer 39
6.4 Service-Test 39
6.4.1 Address in alarm 39
6.4.2 Test - Controls 40
6.4.2.1 Controls 40
6.4.2.2 BT-outputs 40
6.5 Service-Address control 41
6.5.1 From detector 41
6.5.2 From front panel 42
6.6 Service-Data-control 43
Appendix
Appendix A Country variations 44
Al Straps/Program functoin code 44
A2 Functions 46
Appendix B Printer 48
Bl Install the optional printer 48
B2 Replacing the paper roll in the printer 49
B3 Replacing the carbon ribbon cassette in the printer 50
Appendix C Multiple BS-100/Control panels with common repeater
units (BU-100/101/70) 51
Appendix D BS-100 master / Control panel with BS-60 slaves 55
Appendix E Pocket pager 59
Appendix F Fault messages 60
Appendix G BS-100 Hardware / Software compatibility 61
Appendix H Location of EPROM and RAM 62
I ';-
Test
1.1 Recommended test equipment

High-ohmic universal measuring instrument.
(Internal resistance about SMOhm).
I Test procedure ] 1.2 Test procedure

a) No power must be connected to the control panel.
b) Power fuses (Fl and F2) must be removed.
Fuses F3, F4, F5, F6 and F7 shall remain connected.
c) Check all cables for insulation resistance and continuity.
d) Check battery polarity.
e) Check the system's earth connection.
C DIP-switches
J 2 Setting of DIP-switches
on main board BSA-100
Setting of DIP-switches must be carried out without power

connected to the system.
Do not operate any type of DIP-switches with a pencil!
2.1 DIP-switch location

See fig. no. 2.1 for DIP-switch location on the main board, and fig. no. 2.2 for
the two versions of the DIP-switches.
DIP-switches: S202 S201 S501 S401
! ! ! T r1
\ \
X X S 501
/
/X 6o|
1 1 1 *LJIJ \ '
FRq^Tpp^ DQDDDDDl /
'
JJIu
'
\" V* S 401 /
E \ ' '\|
S.-100
1 \ \lDDODDDDDi
\S 202 \ S 201 'rr^F
IDBDODOODI ft DOGDDDOI
1 1
o BSA-100 ) 62J
i^
'
| j
nSffl
BOLDBI\irna VOIHTS 'C63|
CZ3" -
SB Uptid"
F1 ft F3
,390,
r~i0g0^ : i i J
KG OKI LUmwl^,.)JJ.! LklJ.U. ULJJJ.UUU1 L|
Fi. no. 2.7: Location of DIP -switches on main board BSA-100.
The DIP-switches on the main board may be supplied in one of two versions:
The "Sliding switches" or the 'Tilting switches'*. See fig. no 2.2a and 2.2b.
Sliding switch:
64 16 4 1
Bin. code
ON
Switch element no.:
Front view: Side view

, All switching elements
are shown ON (closed)
Fig, no. 2.2 a: Design of the "Sliding switch" version.
Tilting switch:
64 16 4 1
Bin. code
ON (Push)
ON
OFF
Switch element no.
Front view: Side view,

All switching elements cut through
are shown ON (closed) the switch.
Fig.no. 22 b: Design of the "Tilting switch" version.
2.2 DIP-switch S401

The switch function is:
* Setting of reset number for loop no. 00 (Location, see fig.no. 2.1)
Reset number = Number of addresses in the loop + 1
Switch element no 1
shall always be In
the Q1RF posllton.
EEBBRBEB OPEN
64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Switch
11
elemtent no. 2 counts "64"
3 "32"
n 4 "16"
11
11
5 "8"
6 4
11
7 "2"
" 8 "1"
T/ig switches give value in OFF position !
Fig. no. 2.3: Example of switch settings on DIP-switch S401.
In this example (ref. fig. no. 2.3) switch element no. 2 (counts 64) and element
no. 7 (counts 2) are set in the OFF (open) position.
The reset number will be: 64+2 = 66
2.3 DIP-switch S501

S5CW1I
The switch function is:
* Setting of reset number for loop 01. (Location see fig. no. 2.1).
Setting of the reset number on loop 01 is carried out the same way as described
for loop 00. See section 2.2 and fig. no. 2.3.
f:- - VJS201
\7'"'<\ <''' > &$ 2.4 DIP-switch S201 (Location, see fig. no. 2. 1)
The switch functions are:

* Setting the number of detector loops connected to the control panel.
(Maximum number of loops can be up to 16 using additional modules
BSD-100, see section 3.)
* BU-panel (display unit) connected/not connected
* Setting of communication speed on BU-panel.
* Setting communication protocol on channel 2B (ASAP/ESPA)
* Setting of communication speed between main processor and loop
processor.
OFT
ON
BByBBBBB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPEN (OFF)
Setting of communication protocol on
channel 2B on board BSL-100,
see section 3.4.1
1 I
L ON-ASAP-protocol
OFF= ESPA 4.4.4 protocol
Connection of BU-panel:
ON= None connected
- OFF= 1 or more connected
Communication speed, BU-panel:

ON= 1200 baud (standard)
OFF= 9600 baud
Communication speed,
detector loop(s):
ON= 1200 baud (standard)
OFF= 9600 baud
Hdumber of delector loops in use: (see table)

Number of loops in Switch element no.:
use: 1 2 3 4
1 loop (address 00) ON ON ON OFF
Standard
2 loops (address 01) ON ON OFF ON
3 loops (address 02) ON ON OFF OFF
4 loops (address 03) ON OFF ON ON
5 loops (address 04) ON OFF ON OFF
6 loops (address 05) ON OFF OFF ON
7 loops (address 06) ON OFF OFF OFF
8 loops (address 07) OFF ON ON ON
9 loops (address 08) OFF ON ON OFF
10 loops (address 09) OFF ON OFF ON
1 1 loops (address A) OFF ON OFF OFF
12 loops (address B) OFF OFF ON ON
13 loops (address C) OFF OFF ON OFF
14 loops (address D) OFF OFF OFF ON
15 loops (address E) OFF OFF OFF OFF
16 loops (address F) ON ON ON ON
Fig. no. 2.4: Setting of DIP-switch S201
c 2.5 DIP-switch S202

(Location, sed fig. no. 2.1)
The switch functions are:

* Setting of the monitoring mode of the alarm outputs
* Setting of the number of optional alarm output modules BSB-100.
* Setting of the number of optional control output modules BSJ-100/101.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF yBBBBBBB OPEN (OFF)
Switch elements no. 5,6,7 and 8:

These are for setting the number of BSJ-100/
101 modules fitted.
(See section 3.3.3)
If none fitted - all switches should be ON.
Switch elements no 2,3 and 4:

These are for setting the number of BSB-100
modules fitted.
(See section 3.2.2)
If none fitted - all switches should be ON.
element no. 1:
Alarm outputs monitored against
open and short circuit. (Standard)
ON= Alarm outputs monitored against
open circuit only.
Fig. 2.5: Setting of the various elements on DIP-switch 5202.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100D7F/ Fire Alarm Control Panel
2.6 Straps (jumpers)on the main board BSA-100
The straps W14, W15, W16 and W17 control the different functions used in the
various markets (function codes).
This will normally be set correctly at delivery.
Fi>. no. 2.6: Afam -100
Legal function code for different countries.

Menu program 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 3 ? 0 1 2 3 4 I5
Denmark P5-BSHJ&3D20 X X X
Finland P5-BS100-3F20 X X X
Italy P5-BS100-3I20 X X X X
Strapping W14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
field W15 1 1 1 10 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
BSA-100 W16 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Ref. Fig. 2.6 W17 1 0 10 10 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0

I = Installed strap.
0 = Open strap.
Functionspesification, see Appendix A.
2.6.1 Strap functions
Strap Wll: EPROM-selection

Installed^ 256 kB EPROM in socket Dill. (Menu program)
Cut(Open): Shall be open if W12 is installed.
Strap W12: EPROM-selection

Installed: 1 MB EPROM in socket Dill. (Menuprogram)
Cut (Open): Shall be open if Wll is installed.
Strap W13: External fault (Connection block L3.12)

Installed: No connection of external fault input.
Cut (Open): External fault input is used.
Strap W19: For future use.

Installed:
Cut (Open):
Strap W20: EPROM is used to store custom data.

Installed: EPROM is used to store custom data in Dl 10.
Cut (Open): Shall be open if W19 is installed.
Strap W401: Communication speed for loop module 00.

Installed: 1200 baud (standard).
Cut (Open): 9600 baud
Strap W402: Reset input on loop proc. loop 00.

Installed: Blocked loop output. If another loop processor is being used for loop
processor 00 (eg. BS-60 panel).
Cut (Open): The loop processor works normally.
Strap W501: Communication speed for loop module 01.

Installed: 1200 baud (standard).
Cut (Open): 9600 baud
Strap W502: Reset input on loop proc. loop 01.

Installed: Blocked loop output: If another loop processor is being used for loop
processor 01 (Eg. BS-60 panel).
Cut (Open): The loop processor works normally.
This list only applies to BSA-100 motherboard version 7212-042.0007 or

greater.
The baud rate must be the same for all fitted loops.
P-BS100/ECE/PM5/170895 10 Autronica AS
3 Expansion modules
Setting of DIP-switches must only be carried out when no power
is connected to the system.
3.1 Detector loop module BSD-100

On each detector loop module BSD-100 two detector loops, each with max. 99
addresses, can be connected.
Up to seven detector loop modules can be connected to the BS-100 panel.

The address of each detector loop has to be set on the rotary switches $402 and
S502, located on the BSD-100 module.
The reset number of each loop has to be set on the DIP-switches S401 and
S501 located on the BSD-100 module.
Fig. no. 3.1 shows the location of the switches on the module BSD-100.
Rotary switch
S502
DIP-switch
S501
\W403 \W503 Reset of

precesor
Fig. no. 3.1: Location of the switches on module BSD-100.
The switches S402 and S401 concern the first additional loop. S502 and S501
concern the second additional loop.
In the figure only one set of switches are enlarged. Both sets of switches are set
(configured) the same way. See next page.
3.1.1 Setting of detector loop addresses on the BSD-100 module.

Seefig.no. 3.1.
S402 and S502 are used for setting of the loop addresses. The loop numbers
from 2 to 9 are given by digits, and the number from 10 to 15 are given by the
letter "A" (number 10) to "F (number 15).
These two switches should be set by means of a small screwdriver.
Reset number 3.1.2 Setting of reset number on the BSD-100 module.

See fig. 3.1.
S401 and S501 are used for the setting of the reset number of the loops.
(Reset number = Number of addresses in the loop + 1).
Fig. 2.3 shows the function of the DIP-switch.

The method to do this is described in section 2.2. (DIP-switch S401/501).
c Beset of loop 3.13 Reset of loop processor

Strapping W403 and W503 reset the loop processors.
Installed strap gives continous blocking of the loop module.
Stap installed when BS-60 is used on this loop board address.
c BSB-100
3 3.2 Alarm output module BSB-100
Each alarm output module BSB-100 comprises four alarm outputs (AK-1 to
AK-4).
Up to four alarm output modules BSB-100 can be connected to the BS-100
panel.
Fig. no. 3.2 shows the location of DIP-switch S1 on the BSB-100 module.
DIP-switch SI (alarm output module address)
X15 X16
7 o
a
n
a
a n
z BSB-100
a
o o
a
s1
iF1
AK AK 2 AK 3 AK 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S
Fig. 3.2: Location of DIP-switch SI.
3.2.1 Addressing of alarm output module BSB-100.
Setting of DIP-switch SI
The module address is set by means of DIP-switch SI on the board BSB-100.

Fig.no. 3.3 shows the switch.
Setting of the switch elements:

SI
Setting of switc:h element no.:

Module
1 2
DDOPEN
Module 1
(AK 5 to 8)
ON ON
Module 2
OFF ON
(AK 9 to 12)
Module 3
ON OFF
(AK 13 to 16)
Module 4
OFF OFF
(AK 17 to 20)
Fig. no. 3.3: Switch settings on SI.
S202 3.2.2 Programming the total number of alarm output modules

element _882=100.
2, 3 and 4
(BSA-10Q) Setting of DIP-switch S202 (element 2,3 and 4) on the
BSA-100 board.
The number of alarm output modules BSB-100 connected to the BS-100 panel
is defined by means of switch element no. 2,3 and 4 on DIP-swicth S202 on the
main board BSA-100. See section 2.1 and 2.5.
Fig. no. 3.4 shows an enlarged view of the the switch elements 2,3 and 4 on
S202. The elements are used when selecting the number of alarm output
modules connected to the BS-100 panel.
BSB
1 2 3 4
1DQ
ON
S202
OFF
OPEN
Fig. no. 3.4: Switch element 2,3 and 4 on DIP-switch S202 (located on the
main board BSA-100)
In the figure above, the switch elements are set for three BSB-100 alarm output
modules connected.
The table below shows the switch settings for the number of alarm output
modules connected to the BS-100 control panel.
Switch S202 (BSA-100)
Number of alarm
Setting of switch element no.:
output modules 2 3 4
connected:
0 ON ON ON
1 ON ON OFF
2 ON OFF ON
3 ON OFF OFF
4 OFF ON ON
BSJ-100/ 3.3 Control output module BSJ-100/BSJ-101

BSJ-101
Each optional control output module BSJ-100/BSJ-101 comprises 16
programmable outputs.
A total of eight BSJ-100 and seven BSJ-101 modules can be connected to the
BS-100 panel.
Programmable outputs from 1 to 128 are handled by BSJ-100 modules. Outputs

from 129 to 240 are handled by BSJ-101 modules
Fig. no. 3.5 shows the location of the DJP-switch SI
DIP-switch SI
\ 171 119
n n
^\ . <) *:,*:
n n
frovJ I 0v? O? a D V si 8 D c
i pa T 1
tj n
-p., 7 a D
a D
'
mum D [i
D :
fy+t, X20 )Q1

BSJ-100 71 01
1 1 | | 8 9 16
<> (-- ! s <s>
F/. no. 3.5.Location ofDIP-switch SI on control output module BSJ-100/BSJ-

JOL
3.3.1 Programming of lamp test function on BSJ-100/101.
Setting of DIP-switch SI (element 1 and 2)
function on
(See fig. no. 3.5 for location of the switch).
BSJ-100/101
On the control output module BSJ-100/101 there is a test function (lamp test)
which enables groups of outputs to be switched on via a pust-button.
If module is used for controlling MIMIC panel LEDst it is not allowed to

control other functions from the same BSJ'-module.
The lamp test function is set by means of switch element 1 and 2 on DIP-switch
SI. The table below indicates the various functions and settings:
Switch SI (BSJ-100/101)
Setting of switch element no.:
Function
1 2
Lamp test not used OFF OFF
Lamp test on output 1

ON OFF
to 8

OFF ON
to 16

ON ON
to 16 (All)
The test function is activated via terminal 17 and 19 on the board BSJ-100/101.
33.2 Addressing of control output modules BSJ-100/101

control output Setting of DIP-switch SI (elements 3 to 8)
See fig. no. 3.5 for location of the switch on the BSJ-100/101 modules.
The address of the BSJ-100/101 module is set by means of elements no. 3 to 8
of DIP-switch SI.
The table below shows the switch settings for the number of control output
modules BSJ-100 and BSJ-101.
Switch SI (BSJ-100/101)
BSJ-module Switch element no.:

Outputs no:
address: 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 1-16
2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 17-32 g
3 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 33-48
W
4 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 49-64 CQ
<u
5 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65-80
1
6 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 81-96
7 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 97-112
8 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113-128
9 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 129-144
o
10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 145-160
11 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 161-176 53
CQ
12 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 177-192
13 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 193-208 1
14 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 209-224

15 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 225-240
Programming of
number of
control output 3.3.3 Programming the number of control output modules
moudles BSJ-100/101
BSJ-100/101 (Located on main board BSA-100. See section 2.1 and 2.5).
The number of control output modules BSJ-100/101 connected to the BS-100

panel is set by means of switch element no. 5,6, 7 and 8 on DIP-switch S202
on the BSA-100 board.
Fig. no. 3.6 shows an enlarged view of the four switch elements on S202 used
to set the number of control output modules BSJ-100/101 connected to the BS-
100 panel. __^
8
ON
S202
(BSA-100)
OFF
OPEN
Fig. 3.6 Switch element 5,6,7 and 8 on DIP-switch

S202 (located on the main board BSA-100).
In the figure 3.6 the switch elements shows the setting for three control output
modules.
The table below shows settings of the switch elements in relation to the number
of output modules connected to the BS-100 panel.
Modules DIP-switch element no.: Module

connected 5 6 7 8 type
1 ON ON ON OFF
2 ON ON OFF ON
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 ON OFF ON ON oi
5 ON OFF ON OFF
f
6 ON OFF OFF ON
53 C/3
7 ON OFF OFF OFF < PQ
8 OFF ON ON ON
9 OFF ON ON OFF
10 OFF ON OFF ON
ta
11 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 >
12 OFF OFF ON ON
1-
13 OFF OFF ON OFF =3 53
< CO
14 OFF OFF OFF ON
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF
3.4 Communication output module BSL-100

RS232C/20mA current line.
Each communicaton output module BSL-100 comprises one communication
line for use with external data equipment.
Up to four communication output modules BSL-100 can be connected to the

BS-panel.
Fig no. 3.7 shows the location of the DBP-switch SI and S2 on the module.
oo
^f ^r
D G D D
D G D D
10 D D D D
D G D 0
BSA-100 D G D D
X60 (channel
oo
D D D D
1B,2A,2B),or D D D D
X61 (channel 1A)-
BSL-100
11)
T +
DC OC CC Q
5 S
o o O O
Current loop RS-232

Fig. no. 3.7: Location of DIP-switch SI and S2 on optional data output
module
3.4.1 Addressing of communication channel.

Addressing of Configuration of data line for communication output module
communication BSL-100.
channel.
Configuration Setting of DIP-switch SI and S2.
of data One,
All switch elements on SI and elements no. 1 and 2 on switch S2 on BSL-100
are used to set the channel address (1A, IB, 2A and 2B).
Switch elements no. 3 to 7 on S2 are used to configure active/passive trans-

mitter/receiver on current loop (or RS232C).
The table on the next page gives the positioning of the elements both on SI
andS2.
Table below shows the positon of the switch elements and the channel address.
See fig. no. 3.7.
Switch S1/S2 (BSL-100)

switch elements
Communication mode
DIP- Element (communication channel
'/JJ8R& ^^P?E}^f'
^v- -'>,- ^ , ^ . , ; > ^ X \^t switch number: address):
IB 2A 2B 1A
SI 1 OFF OFF ON OFF
SI 2 OFF ON OFF OFF
SI 3 ON OFF OFF ON
SI 4 OFF OFF ON OFF
SI 5 OFF ON OFF OFF
SI 6 OFF OFF ON OFF
SI 7 OFF ON OFF OFF
SI 8 ON OFF OFF ON
S2 1 OFF OFF ON OFF
S2 2 OFF ON OFF OFF
Communication channel and protocol type:
1 A= ASSP, Autronica Standard Short Protocol. This channel is used for

loop communication (eg. BS-60)
1B= ASSP, Autronica Standard Short Protocol (for BU-units)
2A= ASAP, Autronica Standard ASCII Protocol (for cornm. with external
data equipment)
2B= ASAP, Autronica Standard ASCII Protocol or ESPA 4.4.4 (protocol for
communication with pocket pager system) See sec. 2,4.
r
A The table below shows the configuration of active/passive transmitter/receiver
Config, of by means of the switch elements no. 3 to no. 7 on switch S2.
active/passive
iraitsiniuer/rtJcefvef
.* .. - - * ._ *
Switch S2 (BSL-100)
by means ^^^ Comm.
of switch 20 mA current loop
^^^ Config.
elements on S2 RS-232C
V J c*
< S: < I
Switch element^^ < 5 fc
S2 3 ON OFF ON OFF -
S2 4 ON ON OFF OFF -
S2 5 ON ON ON ON OFF
S2 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
. S2 7 ON ON ON ON OFF
AT/AR = Active transmitter/ Active receiver Note! Channel IB is alway

AT/PR = Active transmitter/ Passive receiver config. as AT/AR. Channe
PT/AR = Passive transmitter/ Active receiver IA., 2A and 2B are usually
PT/PR = Passive transmitter /Passive receiver config. as AT/PR.
4. Start-up procedure
4.1 Control/connection procedure
Before any connection of power cables is made, check that the fuses Fl and F2
are removed. One same panels there may be additional fuses for dc. power
distribution. Ensure these are also removed.
a) Connect all cables, also those for battery and mains. Check the battery
polarity before connection, (if this not is carried out, see "Installation
handbook".
b) Check all connections according to "Installation handbook".
c) "Activate" loop no. 00 by setting the switch elements on DIP-switch

S201.
See section 2.4.
(Now only detector loop 00 is activated).
d) Set the switch element no. 1 on DIP-switch S401 in position "OFF'

(OPEN).
See section 2.2 fig. no. 3.2.
e) Set the reset number for loop 00 by setting the switch elements on DIP-
switch S401. Remember that:
Reset number Number of addresses in the loop + 1.
See section 2.2.
The detector loop no. 00 is now connected to the BS-100 panel and is
correctly configured if the comminication speed has been correctly set.
f) Replace the mains fuse(s) (Fl) and the battery fuse(s) (F2). Location of
the fuses on the main board BSA-100 is given on the main board cover.
Do not touch any buttons yet! The equipment needs time to record any
possible errors on loop no. 00. Leave the front door open.
If a fault condition is present, the amber(yellow) light "FAULT" lights,

the internal buzzer is activated and the nature of the fault is indicated
in the front panel display. The following actions must be taken:
1. Press the "SOUNDER SILENCE"-button.

2. Repair the fault condition(s).
3. Reset the system by pressing the "RESET" button.
4. Close the front door.
Only the green "MAINS" lamp shall light.
g) When the connection of loop no. 00 is accomplished, checked and

accepted, remove the fuses Fl and F2 again.
h) Repeat the procedure from c) to g), this time for loop no. 01.
This sequence is repeated for each loop connections, on at the

time, until all errors/faults are repaired and all detector loops
are working satisfactorily.
4.2 Normal condition.

condition
After the "RESET'-button is pressed, the following text will appear in the
display on the front panel.
RESET OK ~'^
NORMAL CONDmON
This text is shown in the display for approx. 6 sec.
Only the green "MAINS"- lamp should be illuminated in the normal condition.
5. Menu structure
The whole menu structure is shown here, but only "SYSTEM-CONFIGURATION",
"SYSTEM-DATA" and "SERVICE" is described in this handbook.
For information about the other functions, see "Operators handbook" for BS-100.
PROGRAM VERSION P1-BS100-3-20

P5-BS100-3E20 or greater.
SELECT MAIN MENU
Out/in- Disable Address

control - Zone
- Controls r- BT-outputs (AUX,DHM)
- Sounders "- Controls (1-240)
- Fire-brigade (BMA,BMFO,BMF)
_ Restore Address
- Zone NV,
- Controls 1- BT-outputs (AUXJDHM)
- Sounders - Controls (1-240)
- Fire-brigade (BMA,BMFO,BMF)
Show-status Alarm
Prewarning
Addr./loop-fault
System fault
Disablements
Alarm counter
Stored events (last 150)
/ 1 1-
/?$ , *- Test. Front panel (lamp test)
BMA,BMFO, BMF
- Fault
- Sounders
- Buzzer
System- Sensitivity Address -- Single address

- Beyond-limit U Loop
Printer
L
Polluted Display
Display
- Internal Program-version
Adjust-clock
Show-clock
2) - Configuration Comm.channel - Panel address

"- Alarm info
- Silence alarm r- Tl
(Alarm delay) *- T2
- BU-units (display units)
- DYFI-changes -r- Alarm
- Battery-voltage |- Prewarning
^ Pocket-pager L- Filter
Coot on next page: System-Data
Menu cont.
J .
|-Add
1print out Detector data
IPrinter texts
Feed paper
2)
KLoops (processor)
l-Clear
Disable """"~r 'Loop

I Internal buzzer
Internal printer
Restore r Loop
k-Internal buzzer
Internal printer
*Controls r~ Controls
*- BT-outputs
L-From front
Data control Tranfer comm.port -i Yes

I No
Select "RET" to go 1 step back in the menu structure.
Select "HH" to return to main menu.
1) Password protected on level 1. (Operator level)
2) Password protected on level 2. (Service level)
3) Can be password protected in different market and installations.
C Password 5.1 Password protected functions.

Some of the functions in the BS-100 menu are password protected on two levels.
Following functions are password protected:

Password level 1): "OPERATOR LEVEL".
* Disable - Controls
* System - Data
* Disable - Sounders
Password level 2): "SERVICE LEVEL"

* System - Configuration
* Service
c 5.2 System-configuration (password protected on service

level.)
Main menu
System- Sensitivity
Internal
2) Configuration Comm.-channel p Panel address
Data 'Alarm info
Silence alarm 1 Standard(Tl)
(Alarm-delay) '-Additional(T2)
fill-units
DYFI-changes r- Alarm
Battery voltage r" Prewarning
Pocket pager Filter
This function is "password protected"on service level. When this function is selected, the
PASSWORD:
The password must be "entered" by means of the four ^^ ^ ^ -keys. If the

password is not correctly typed, the system returns to the "SYSTEM"-menu.
When the password is "entered" correctly, the options on the

"CONFIGURATION" sequence are attainable. The following text will appear
in the display:
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
COMM.CHANNEL SILENT ALARM BU-UNITS
The V arrow at the right side of the lower line indicates that there is more text
to display. The remaining text will appear by pressing the V key.
DYFI-CHANGES BATTERY VOLTAGE
By pressing the V key once more the following text will appear in the display:
HXSKET-PAOER BET MMA
(Comm.-ehannefj
5.2.1 Communication channel
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "COMM.CHANNFi" are selected, the

CONFIGURATION ASAP CHANNEL:

PANEL-ADDRESS ALARM-INFO RET MM
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fke Alarm Control Panel
5.2.1.1 Panel address
When the BS-100 control panel is connected to a system with more BS-100
control panels, each control panel has to be addressed.
If "SYSTEM", "CONHGURATION", COMM.CHANNEL" and then

'TANEL ADDRESS" are selected, the following text will appear in the
display:
PANEL ADDRESS
SELECT ADDRESS; RET MM
Select address (A-Z) with the V1,an^ & êy ^^ press gij. (A is standard).
If address B is selected for the control panel, the following text will appear in
the display:
PANEL ADDRESS
ADDRESS B SELECTED AS PANEL ADDRESS
Press g, and the system returns to "CONFIGURATION ASAP CHANNEL"-

menu.
5.2.1.2 Alarm info
By means of the "ALARM INFO" the information to be transfered via ASAP-

comm. line at alarm/ prewaming is to be selected.
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "COMM.CHANNEL" and then

"ALARM INFO" are selected, the following text will appear in the display:
INFO. TRANSFERRED WHEN ALARM/PREWARNING

ADDRESS ZONE ADDRESS+ZONE RET MM
Select the information for transferring at Alarm/prewarning and press g. The

system will return to the "CONFIGURATION ASAP CHANNEL"-menu.
c Silent alarm
j 5.2.2 Silent alarm (Tl, T2)
By means of the function "SILENT ALARM" delays of the alarm outputs and
the BMA-outputs can be set. (This applies when the D/N input is active. See
list no. 3 described in section 2.2 in Installation handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fire
alarm control panel.)
Alarm delay Tl starts at alarm. The alarm outputs and the BMA-outputs will
not be activated.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button on the front panel is pressed before the
timeout of delay Tl, delay T2 will then start.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button not is operated before the timeout of

delay Tl, the alarm outputs and the BMA-output will then activate.
If the "RESET" button not is operated before timeout of the delay T2, the
alarm outputs and the BMA-output will then activate.
Manual call-points and/or 2 or more detectors in alarm will over-ride either Tl

or T2 delays.
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "SILENT ALARM" arc
selected, the following text will appear in the display:
STANDARD {Tt) ADDITIONAL (T2) BET Kill
5.2.2.1 Standard (Tl) delay period
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "SILENT ALARM" and then

"STANDARD (Tl)"are selected, the following text will appear hi the display:
SILENT ALARM (T1)

mm MIN. ss SEC, RET MM
mm - minutes
ss - seconds
The alarm delay Tl can be selected in the lOsec - 15 mm. range.

Default delay tune is 2 min.
See appendix A for more information.
Set in the values for Tl, press gj] and the following text will appear in the
display:
TJME SILENT ALARM (T1)

SELECTED TIME 02 MIN. 00 SEC. OK
Press gi] and the system returns to the "SILENT ALARM"-menu.
5.22.2 Additional (12) delay period
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "SILENT ALARM"and then

"ADDITIONAL (T2)" are selected, the following text will appear in the
display:
TIME SILENT ALARM (T2)

TIME: mm MIN. ss SEC- RET MM
mm - minutes
ss - seconds
The alarm delay T2 can be selected in the 1-30 min. range.

See appendix A for more information.
Default delay time is 10 min.
Set in the value for T2, press gj] and the following text will appear in the
display:
TIME SILENT ALARM (T2)

SELECTED TIME 10 MIN. 00 SEC, OK
Press gi], and the system returns to the "SILENT ALARM"-menu.
BU-units
5.2.3 BU-units (the number of display units BU-70/BU-100
connected)
When BU-units (display units) are connected to the system, the number of these
units must be specified hi the menu. This does not apply to units controlled by
control outputs (BU-66, BU-65).
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "BU-UNTTS" are selected, the
CONFIGURATION BU-UNITS
NO* OF UNITS; XX BET MM
Enter number of BU-units and press the gj] key.

The number of units may also be defined and programmed within the custom
data E-prom.
5.2.4 DYFI-changes
The analogue signals from the detectors are processed within the control panel
by the DYFI-functions. The "DYFI-CHANGES" function enables the operator
to change certain parameters.
Select "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "DYFI-CHANGES". The
DYFI CHANGES
ALARM PREWARNING FILTER RET MM
5.2.4.1 Alarm (change the alarm level)

If there is a need to change the alarm level for one or more detector address,
select "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "DYFI-CHANGES" and then
"ALARM". The following text will appear in the display:
DYR CHANGES ALARM

ADDRESS: OOOfi RET MM
If the address 0001 is selected and the gj] key is pressed, the following text will
ALARM LIM IT ADDRESS 0001 STATUS NORMAL

NORMAL HIGH LOW RET MM
In the upper line of the display the present status of the selected address is
shown. The changing of this status is made by moving the cursor, by means of
the arrow keys, to the status required and pressing the ,>JJ key.
NORMAL means that the address has normal (standard) alarm level. (ALI=5).
HIGH means that the detector requires more smoke to raise an alarm. However,
it is still well within accepted limits for detection. (ALI=7).
LOW means that the detector requires less smoke to raise an alarm. (ALI=3).
c Be aware !
The prewarning level will also follow the alarm level.
5.2.4.2 Prewarning (on or off)
The prewarning function may be turned off or on (disabled or restored) for

individual detector addresses.
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "DYFI-CHANGES" and then

"PREWARNING" are selected, the following text will appear in the display:
DYFI CHANGES PREWARNING

ADDRESS: OOOQ RET MM
If address 0001 is selected the following text will appear hi the display:
PREWARNING ADDRESS 0001 STATUS RESTORE

RESTORE DISABLE RET MM
RESTORE - the detector will give a prewaming indication when that level is
reached.
DISABLE - the detector will not give a prewaming indication.
Select function hi question and press the gi] key. Status will now be updated.
5.2.4.3 Filter (Changes of filter constant)
The DYFI-filter constant processes the analogue value of detectors and controls
the speed at which the alarm indication will be raised.
All detectors connected to the same loop have the same DYFI-filter constant.
The DYFI-filter constant can only be changed on a loop-by-loop basis.
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION", "DYFI-CHANGES" and then

"FILTER" are selected, the folio whig text will appear in the display:
DYFI CHANGES FILTER

LOOP NO: 00 RET MIR
Select the loop number by means of the arrow keys and press the [jj key. the
following text will appear hi the display:
FILTER CONSTANT LOOP 00 STATUS NORMAL

NORMAL LONG RET MM
NORMAL indicates that the control panel will allow an alarm indication to be
raised after a relatively short amount of processing.
LONG indicates that the control panel will only allow an alarm indication to be
raised after a longer processing period. This means that the devices must be in
an alarm condition for much longer giving a greater degree of resistance to
unwanted alarms.
5.2.5 Battery-voltage (setting of warning level of low battery

voltage).
When the battery voltage is lower than the preset level, the "FAULT"-
indication lamp on the front panel will light and the internal buzzer will
activate.
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "BATTERY-VOLTAGE" are

selected, the following text will appear hi the display:
CONFIGURATION BATTERY VOLTAGE LIMIT

LIMIT: 25.5 VOLTS RET MM
The warning limit of low battery voltage can be changed from 23,0 Volt to 26,9
Volt. Standard value is 25,5 Volt.
Reduce or increase the warning level value by means of the eys and then
press the Q key.
5.2.6 Pocket Pager (configuration)
Data from the Fire Alarm Control Panel can be transmitted to the Pocket-Pager-
system by use of the standard ESPA 4.4.4 protocol. Communication channel
2B has to be configured for the ESPA-protocol, (See section 2.4 :"DIP-switch
S201"), and the comm. channel 2B has to be set on the BSL-100.
(See section 3.4: "Optional data comm. module BSL-100")
If "SYSTEM", "CONFIGURATION" and then "POCKET-PAGER" are

seleced, the following text will appear in the display:
MESSAGE TRANSFERRED TO POCKET-PAGER

At AUFA AUPW AUFA/PW RET MM
AL - Fire alarm
AL/FA - Fire alarm / fault
AL/PW - Fire alarm / prewarning
AL/FA/PW - Fire alarm / fault / prewarning
Select the information which shall be transmitted to the Pocket-Pager system by

means of the arrow keys and press the g key.
The following text will then appear:
CONFIG, POCKET-PAGER ADDRESS FIELD

NUMBER Or CHARACTERS (1 - 0); 4
Different types of Pocket-Pager systems use a different number of digits for the
addressing of receivers. Select the required number between 1 and 5 and
press [41].
It is possible to transfer three different message types; ALARM, FAULT and

PREWARNING up to 5 different addresses.
Some Pocket-Pager systems operate with A and B addresses on the receivers.
The address A may be the individual receiver and the address B may be a group
of receivers.
The ALARM, FAULT and PREWARNING messagegs can be sent to both
individual and group of receivers.
Those addresses to which the selected messages (ALARM, FAULT and
PREWARNING) are to be sent, must be configured. In additional the system
dependent parameters such as BEEP, TYPE and PRIOR are to be configured
for every categoriy of messages selected to be sent. (Information about these
parameters are in the Pocket-Pager System handbooks).
Eg. If ALARM is selected to be transferred from the control panel to the

Pocket-Pager System, the following text will appear in the display:
CONPia POCKET-PAGER FIRE ALARM

ADDR.: ,0000 .0000 ,0000 .0000 .0000 v
Configure the address no. (individual/group) that are to receive the ALARM
message by means of the arrow-keys.
When all necessary addresses are selected, move the cursor to the very left
hand side, and the following text will appear in the display:
FIRE ALARM
CALL PARAM.:: *BEEP; 4 ^ JTWMBS ; 'A',
See appendix E for information about these parameters. (Parameters will vary
according to manufacturer.
When addresses and parameters for the messages ALARM, FAULT and /or
PREWRNING are config., press [jj, and the following text will appear in the
display:
CONFIG. POCKET-PAGER
YES NO
YES - custom designed text will be sent to the Pocket-Pager System.

NO - only address no. will be sent to the Pocket-Pager System.
Select YES/NO and press gj], and the system will return to the "CONFIG.
POCKET-PAGER"-menu with possibility to return to main menu.
5.3 System-Data (password protected on operators level)

Main menu
System Sensitivity
Internal
Configuration
Data Change
fc Add
Printout r- Detector data
L- Printer texts
All changes and additions to custom designed text, controls, alarm outputs,
groupings and printer texts can be implemented in this function. A print-out of
all custom text data/site data can also be made by using this function. The
function is password protected.
Note! Changing of addresses between programmed zones is not possible

through the kay-pad.
By selecting "SYSTEM" and then "DATA" after having input the password,
DATA
CHANGE ADD PRINTOUT RET MM
Select the function in required by means of the arrow keys and press the
key.
5.3.1 Change (site data)

The "CHANGE" function gives possibilities for changing the existing data. The
function has limitted capacity. Max. 30 addresses can be changed or added.
When selecting "SYSTEM", "DATA" and then"CHANGE" the following text
CHANGE SITE DATA

When the address in question is selected by means of the arrow key, press the
S key.
The customized designed text will appear in the display eg.:
SITE DATA ADDRESS 0001

0001 LABORATORY 1- FLOOR . ROOM 3.
By means of the two arrow keys ^ ^the cursor is moved to left or right. The
changes are carried out by moving the cursor to the letter or figure to be
changed and pressing the >Â arrow keys. Letters in alphabetic order, figures
and special signs scroll every time one of the two keys is pressed.
5.3.1.1 Control outputs - Changes
When the correct letters and figures are set in the display, move the cursor to
the very right hand position and press the right arrow key once more. Then the
next line in the display will appear:
OP 001 002 000 000 000 000 000 000
Each address can be programmed to control up to 16 control outputs. The

display picture above shows the first 8 control outputs related to this address.
The change(s) is carried out as described above by means of the arrow keys.
The change must be typed as a three digit number (the control output number).
By moving the cursor to the very right hand side position and pressing the right
arrow key once more, the last 8 control outputs related to this address are
shown in the display:
arm DATA ADDRESS 0001

OP 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 v A
Changes are carried out as described above.
5.3.1.2 Alarm output - Changes

Alarm (Evacuate) Signals.
If changes are to be made for the alarm outputs from the address in question,
move the cursor to the very right hand side of the display picture shown on the
bottom of the previous page and press the ^ key once more.

SO AL 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Each address can be programmed to control up to 20 alarm outputs (AK-

outputs). This display picture shows the first 10 (of 20) alarm outputs
controlled by this address. The programming can be changed the same way as
described hi sec. 5.3.1.1.-"Control output - Changes".
If the cursor is moved to the very right hand side of the display picture and the
[^ key is pressed once more, the last 10 (of 20) alarm outputs will be indicated
in the display. The text in the display will be just like the one shown in the
picture above. The program may be changed in the same manner as described
in sec. 5.3.1.1 "Control outputs- changes".
'Warning' (Alert) Signals.
The alarm outputs (AK-outputs) can be programmed to give a different signal
in areas/floors located adjacent to the area where a detector/address is in alarm
condition.
If the cursor in the previous display picture is moved to the very right hand side
of the display picture and the j^ key is pressed once more, the following text
SrTE DATA ADDRESS 0001

SO WA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
This display picture shows the first 10 (of 20) alarm outputs which can be
programmed as "adjacent area". The last 10 alarm outputs will appear in the
display as previously described.
Note!
All 20 alarm outputs (AK-outputs) can be selected to give an alarm signal or a
"warning" signal. However, the same alarm output no. (AK-output) cannot be
programmed to both options for the same detector. j
5.3.1.3 Disabling group/Printer text - Changes
If the cursor is moved to the very right hand side of the display picture shown
on the bottom of the previous page, and the ^ key is pressed once more, the
(The three "group disablements" are activated by connecting the inputs

(13.14,15,16) to 0V via an external switch.)
The same address can be programmed into all 3 groups. The groups are
indicated as GROUP 1, GROUP 2, and GROUP 3. If the indication reads
GROUP 000, it means that the address in question has not been programmed
into any group.
The number after PRINTER TEXT refers to the index no. of the text list stored
for this function.
Changes in the "set-up" are carried out by means of the arrow keys as described
previously.
If the cursor is moved to the very right hand side of this display picture and the
j^ key is pressed once more, the following text will appear in the display:
5.3.1.4 Zone connection / saving

ZONEOOQ SAVE-NEW-DATA? RET MM A
The zone allocation for an address will appear in the display. Changes of a zone
no. for an address is NOT ALLOWED via the menu. A new EPROM (S3) must
be fitted.
Note! If changes are carried out via the menu, this will give wrong information.
Select "SAVE-NEW-DATA" and press the gi] key.
All new data will now be stored in the battery-RAM and will remain in the
system even in the event of a power failure.
When the g key is pressed, the next address will automatically be presented in
the display. Changes to this address may now be carried out.
If no more changes are to be made, move the cursor to MM and press the Q
key. Then the operator will be back to the start of the main menu.
However, if there is a need for adding data, move the cursor to RET and press
the \^ key. The system returns to the "DATA "-menu.
5.3.2 Add site data (New addresses)
Select "SYSTEM", "DATA" and then "ADD",and the following text will
To make the adding of data as simple as possible, this sequence is based on
copying existing text from other addresses to the addresses in question.
Move the cursor to FROM ADDR and set the address number to be copied.
Then move the cursor to TO ADDR and set the address number to be added
If it is necessary to change the copied text, return to the "CHANGE" function

and proceed as described in section 5.3.1.
53.3 Printout site specific data

If "SYSTEM", "DATA" and then "PRINTOUT' are selected, the following
text will appear in the display:
PRINTOUT SrtE SPECIFIC DATA

DETECTOR-DATA PRINTER-TEXT RET MM
5.33.1 Printout detector data
If "DETECTOR-DATA" is selected the following text will appear in the

display:
PRINTOUT SITE DATA FROM

ADDR. 0000 TO ADDR. 0000 RET MM
By means of the arrow keys it is possible to select the address data to be

printed. Move the cursor to FROM ADDR and set the starting address, then
move the cursor to TO ADDR and select the last address. Then press the I*!)
key for printout function. When completed move the cursor to RET (to return
to previous function) or MM (to return to the main menu) and press the gj] key.
5.3.3.2 Printout printer-text
If "PRINTER-TEXT' is selected the following text will appear in the display:
PRINTOUT
FROM NO. 000 TO NR. 000 RET MM
By means of the arrow keys it is possible to select the printer-text to be printed.

Move the cursor to FROM NO. and set in the first no. Move the cursor to TO
NO. and select the last no. Then press the gj] key and the selected printer-text
will be printed out. Select RET to return to "PRINTOUT DATA"-menu or
MM to return to the main menu.
P-BS10WECE/PM5/170895 34 Autronica AS
p-'-; Bstvtee
L -1?V. ~'-..^'J
"lj 6 Service (Password protected on service
level)
Main menu
L) "ben/ice
-Restarts r- Main prc. (processor)

\- Loops (processor)
L Clear
Mnternal buzzer (Not permitted in UK-vers.)

Internal printer
Mnternal buzzer
1 Internal printer
'Controls 1 Controls
1 BT-outputs
control 1 From front
Data control
2) Service is password protected on service level.
When sele-cting the "SERVICE"-function and entering the password, the following
text will a ?pear in the display:
SERVICE:
REPORT DISABLE RESTORE TEST V
As indicated in the display by the V" arrow, more text will appear if the V^ ey is
pressed:
SERVICE:
ADDRESS-CONTROL DATA CONTROL MM A
f Report 1 6.1 Service-report

When selecting "SERVICE" and then "REPORT', the following text will appear
in the display:
SERVICE REPORT
DYFt-FACTORS RESTARTS V
6.1.1 DYFl-factors
By selecting "SERVICE", "REPORT' and then "DYFI-FACTORS", the
SERVICE REPORT DYFM'ACTORS

SINGLE-ADDRESS RET MM
6.1.1.1 Single-address:
By selecting "SINGLE-ADDRESS" the following text will appear in the

display:
SERVICE REPORT DYFI-FACTORS

In this display picture the operator can select any address connected to the
system. If address number 0001 is selected the folio whig text will appear in the
display:
DYFI-FACT. ADDR: 0001 NEXT? RET MM

ANA:056 MATS:05 PF:000 ALU5 FATS: 07:09
This function gives access to stored data for the address in question. The letter
given in the display means:
ANA: The current stored analogue value of the detector

(equal to ATS value)
MATS: The maximum measured value of the detector (ATS) during

the last 24 hours.
PF: The detector "Performance factor" during the last 24 hours.

This factor is an indication of the stability.
ALI: The alarm limit index of the detector. This index expresses if the
alarm limits is "NORMAL"(5), "HIGH"(7) or "LOW"(3).
FATS: Filtered ATS-value measured every 23rd hour. This value

indicates the status of the pollution factor.
(9:00 indicates polluted device needing service).
The upper line of the display picture contains the word "NEXT?". The cursor is
automatically moved to this word. If the gj] key is pressed, the information
concerning the next detector/address will be shown in the display.
6.1.2 Restarts
By selecting "SERVICE", "REPORT' and then "RESTARTS", the following
SERVICE REPORT RESTARTS

MAIN PRC: NNN LOOPS: nnn CLEAR RET MM
NNN - Numbers of restarts of the main processor since last reset of the
control panel.
nnn - Numbers of restarts of the loop processor since last reset of the
control panel.
Numbers of restarts will be reset by pressing theg key when the cursor is in
RESET position. Numbers of restarts of the main processor and the loop
processor should be 0. Select RET or MM and press gjj].
C Disable 6.2 Service-Disable

As long as parts of the system are disabled, the amber (yellow) lamp
"FUNCTION DISABLED" on the front of the panel will light.
If "SERVICE" and "DISABLE" are selected, the following text will appear hi
the display:
SERVICE DISABLEMENTS
LOOP INT.BUZZER 1NT.PRINTER RET MM
6.2.1 Disablement of loop(s)

When disabling a loop, the addresses connected to this will give no indications
of alarm, prewarning or fault
By selecting "SERVICE", "DISABLE" and then "LOOP", the following text
DISABLEMENT OF LOOP(S)
LOOP NO: OQ RET MM
The number of loops to be disabled is freely selectable by using the arrow keys.
Then the loop number is selected and set, press the Sf key and the next
display picture will be shown:
DISABLEMENT OF tOOP(S)
DISABLEMENT OF LOOP NO, 00 OK
This picture informs the operator that the disablement of the loop in question
has been carried out.
Press 4^, and another loop can be selected for disablement.
When all selected loops are disabled, select RET or MM.
c Note! All disabled loops must be restored after ending the service-
function.
Commissioning handbook; BS-10Q DYFI Fire Alann Control Panel
6.2.2 Disablement - Internal buzzer
Not permitted in U.K.-version.
6.2.3 Disablement - Internal printer
When selecting "SERVICE", "DISABLE" and then "INTERNAL PRINTER'

SERVICE DISABLEMENTS
The internal printer is now disabled, and must be manually restored.

Press the g key, and the system returns to the "SERVICE-DISABLEMENT'
menu, it is then possible to return to main menu.
f 6.3 Service-Restore
The amber (yellow) lamp "FUNCTION DISABLED" will switch off only
when all parts of the system have been restored.
When selecting "SERVICE" and "RESTORE" the following text will appear in
the display:
SERVICE RESTORE
LOOP INT.BUZZER SPRINTER RET MM
6.3.1 Restore-Loop
When selecting "SERVICE", "RESTORE" and then "LOOP", the following

RESTORE LOOP
LOOP: Ofi RET MM
Select the loop number and press gj] .
RESTORE LOOP
RESTORE COMPLETED
Press g, and the next loop can be restored.

When all loops are restored, select RET or MM.
6.3.2 Restore - int. buzzer

Not permitted in UK-version.
SERVICE RESTORE
SELECTED FUNCTION NOT fîTTED
P-BS10WECE/PM5/170895
Autronica AS
633 Restore - internal printer
By selecting "SERVICE", "RESTORE" and then "INT.PRINTER", the
SERVICE RESTORE
RESTORE COMPLETED
Press the g key, and the system will return to the "SERVICE RESTORE"-
menu, and it is possible to return to the main menu.
c 6.4 Service-Test
Before any testing of the system is carried out it is important that all halon
and/or extinguishing systems are made safe.
Other plant Junctions may also need isolating.
This function enables the operator to cany out various system test functions.
When selecting "SERVICE" and "TEST' the following text will appear in the
display:
SERVICE TEST
ADDRESS IN ALARM CONTROLS RET MM
6.4.1 Address in alarm

r Note!
When an address gives a simulated alarm the indicator on the detector
will tight, and all programmed control outputs andfuntions will
^ activate.
By selecting "SERVICE", "TEST' and then "ADDRESS-IN-ALARM" the

TEST ADDR ESS IN ALARM

Select the address in question by means of the glj key. The following text will
TEST ADDRESS IN ALARM

AUTOMATIC MANUAL
Here the operator must select between AUTOMATIC (automatic detector) or

MANUAL (manual call-point) by means of the arrow keys.
The fire alarm control panel handles the two types differently regarding the
filtering process.
Manual call-points give alarm with minimal delay.
When the selection is made, the following text will appear in the display:
TEST ADDRESS XXXX IN ALARM IN PROGRESS

WAIT
The selected address, XXXX, will now enter alarm condition.
Only one address at a time can be set to the alarm condition.
The "SOUNDER SILENCE" and "RESET" procedure must be operated if more

than one address is to be tested. Select "SERVICE" once more, and then repeat
the procedure described above.
6.4.2 Test - Controls (Programmed outputs)
By selecting "SERVICE", "TEST' and "CONTROLS" the following text will

TEST CONTROLS
COMIHOtS W-OUTPUTS RET MM
6.4.2.1 Test controls (1-240)
If the cursor is moved to "CONTROLS" by means of the arrow keys and the
gj] is pressed, the following text will appear hi the display:
TtST CONTROLS
CONTROL: 800 f*ET MM
Select the control-output number to be tested by means of the arrow keys.
If control-output 001 is selected and the gi] key is pressed, the following text
will appear hi the display:
TEST OF CONTROL 001 IN PROGRESS

WHEN COMPLETED PRESS gi
The test is active (control-output is active) as long as the text is shown hi the
display. If the gj] key is pressed, the next control-output can be selected.
If you select a control-output which not is available, following text will appear
in the display:
Press the gj] key and return.
6.4.2.2 Test BT-output(s) (AUX, DHM)
If the cursor is moved to "BT-OUTPUT" by means of the arrow keys and the
gj] key is pressed, the following text will appear in the display:
AUX- and DHM-outputs are active as long as the text is shown in the display.
The test will end by pressing the gj key.
Address-contr 6.5 Service-Address-control (Walk test)

When selecting "SERVICE" and "ADDRESS-CONTROL" the following text will
SERVICE ADDRESS-CONTROL
LOOP: 00 RET MM
In this display picture it is possible to select the loop number of which the detector
addresses are to be checked by using the arrow keys.
This function is the "old" spray bottle test. (Walk test)
This means that all addresses in the loop can be set into the alarm condition by
inserting test gas or test smoke into the detector chambers or may also be simulated
from the front panel.
By selecting loop 00 the following text will appear in the display:
SERVICE ADDRESS-CONTROL LOOP 00

FROM DETECTOR FROM FRONT RET MM
6.5.1 Address-control from detector

The address can be set into the alarm condition from either the panel front or from
the detector. When "FROM DETECTOR" is selected all detectors exposed to test
gas or smoke will give a real alarm signal and illuminate the device led.
When a loop is set in this mode, the alarm level (ALI) is changed so that the
detector will react much quicker than standard:
ALI = Measured ATS+2 ATS
After a detector has entered alarm condition, it is automatically reset after 20

seconds. The fire lamp will then extinguish.
The sounder outputs are activated in a special mode so they will only give a short
pulse signal every 8 seconds, until RESET this gives an audible check when the
device is in alarm.
When the test procedure is active the following functions do not operate:
* BMA-, BMP- and BMFO-outputs.

* No control outputs are influenced by this test.
* Programmable outputs (BSJ-units)
* No alarm information sent on serial outputs to
AutroMaster systems.
(Loop no. in test only transmitted)
* Test not logged in stored events.
While the test is running, the following text will appear in the display:
SERVICE ADDRESS-CONTROL LOOP 00 ACTIVE

WHEN COMPLETED PRESS 4J

SHOW RESULTS RET MM
If "SHOW RESULTS" is selected, the following text will appear in the display:
CONTROL RESULTS ADDR.CONTROL LOOP 00

The presentation can be on the printer or in the display. This selection is made
by using the arrow keys.
By selecting display the following text will appear in the display:
The example shows 10 of total 60 detectors tested on the loop.
eOinBCH.^îatS ADDR.CONTROL LOOP 00
However, if the presentation is to be on the printer, the alarms will be printed

out showing the order they were operated.
When a display presentation is selected the registered alarms are also presented
in the same order as they occurred.
As indicated in the display up to 10 addresses having been in alarm condition

are presented in the lower line. If more addresses are to be presented, press the
V key. Continue this sequence until the last address in alarm condition is
presented. Press the gj] key and the display will return to the start of the
"SERVICE" "ADDRESS-CONTROL"-function.
6.5.2 Address-control from front

When selecting "SERVICE", "ADDRESS-CONTROL" and selecting loop 00,

FROM DETECTOR FROM FRONT RET MM
If "FROM FRONT' is selected the following text will appear in the display:

CONTROL DETECTOR: 00 FINISHED
In this display picture it is possible to select the address number to be checked

by using the arrow keys. When the address number is selected, press the g
key, and the function is started.
The cursor will puls as long as the function is working. When the detector
enters the alarm condition, the red "FIRE"-lamp on the control panel front
lights steady. The indicator on the detector will light until the function is reset/
ended.
At an alarm condition on the selected address the following text will appear in
the display with customised text:
... customised text information.

CONTROL DETECTO&01 FINISHED
Without customised text:
ADDRESS NO; 0601

CONTROL DETECTOR: 0001 RNISHED
If "FINISHED" is selected, the following text will appear in the display:

SHOW RESULTS RET MM
The presentation of the results is described in the "FROM DETECTOR"

function.
c Data control 6.6 Service-Data control

This function enables the operator to test programmed alarm- and control
outputs for the selected address. Both the alarm- and control outputs are
tested simultaneously. This means that the alarm outputs must be disabled if
only the control outputs are to be tested. Vice-versa the control outputs must be
disabled if only the alarm outputs are to be tested.
When selecting "SERVICE" and then "DATA-CONTROL", the following text

SERVICE DATA-CONTROL
TRANSFER COMM.PORT? YES HO RET MM
Select YES if you want to transfer the address to be tested through the
communication port (ASAP). If the cursor is moved to YES or NO and the
Qkey is pressed, the following text will appear in the display:
SERVICE DATA-CONTROL
ADDRESS 0000 RET MM
Select address to be checked and press [J .

The selected address will transmit an alarm to the data output line. Possible
"AND"-function can be tested in this sequence. After having set the address
number 0001, it is possible to set more addresses..
SERVICE DATA-CONTROL ADDRESS 0001

NEXT ADDRESS: 0001 CLEAR
When the test sequence for these selected addresses is complete, move the
cursor to CLEAR and press the j^j key. The display picture will then change
back to the starting picture of this function. Now a new sequence, involving
other addresses can be carried out.
Appendix A Country variations

A.1 Straps/Program code.
Within the menu/system text EPROM's there is a code that must correspond to the
code set with the function code straps (jumpers) W14, W15, W16 and W17
located on the main board BSA-100.
The function code is used inside the system program to perform the required
functions for that particular country (or market, e.g. SOLAS or OFFSHORE).

Menu program 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Denmark P5-BS100-3D20 X X X
Finland P5-BS100-3F20 X X X
Italy P5-BS100-3I20 X X X X
Strapping
field
W14
W15
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0
r
1 1 , 0
0 0 [1 1
0
1
0 0
F 0
0
0
0 0
0 0
BSA-100 W16 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 o l 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
ref. fig. 2.6 W17 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 o \ 1> 3 1 0 1 0 1 0
I= Installed strap.
0= Open strap.
Function codes and belonging functions.
^^^Function code
Function no. ^\^ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Function number: 0 7 2 1 1 5 0 0 16 7 0 1 0 0 0 16
See description 12 3 4 3 11 22 12 4 22
15 14 8 6 15 23 15 10 24
18 15 9 13 18 21 25
19 17 10 15 20 23
20 23 16
21
23
Menu Program
J 5 100- XNXX
f "^ 1
1I Versions no.
language ^ = mui wcgiaii;
, Program no.
Control panel type
System program
E 1-BS LOO-XX2L
Version no.
*-*
system program
Functions:
Function no. Description of function

0 Standard function
1 LED no. 2, Lights up when alarm sounders are disabled.
2 LED no. 2, Lights up when address control is activated.
3 LED no. 3, Lights up when front door is open.
4 LED no. 3, Lights up when BMA is disabled.
5 Mains LED, Lights when the central panel has working voltage.
6 Mains LED, Lights when the central panel is in normal condition.
7 LED, "More Alarms" is pulsating when more alarms is active, and
switched off at the first registrated alarm in the scrolling function.
8 Internal buzzer gives signal when detectors are disabled. Silence
by pressing silence sounder button.
9 Internal buzzer gives signal when BMA and AK are disabled.
Can not be silenced by silence sounder button.
10 Internal buzzer gives signal after pressing silence sounder button in
alarm condition.
11 Internal buzzer gives signal every 4th minute when the front door
is closed and the central panel is normal condition.
12 Disabling of internal buzzer when the front door is open.
13 Disabling of BMA, BMFO and BMP when the front door is open.
14 Disabling of BMA, BMFO, BMP and output control when the
front door is open.
15 Output no. 10 (SP) is active when the front door is open.
16 System message is given 1 minute after interrupt of 220V AC.
17 System message is given 30 minutes after interrupt of 220V AC.
18 Silence sounders and reset buttons have to be operated for more than
2 seconds.
19 Only 4 digit of text on the first line, additional text on the second line
20 BMP is active in normal condition and "open" in fault condition.
Resets to active at silence sounders.
21 Disabling of detectors and alarm sounders can be password protected
on operator level in different countries.
22 Alarm delay for marin installations (SOLAS) .
See spesial description.
23 Automatic disabling of detectors in alarm condition after reset has
to be accepted within 10 seconds.
24 No automatic disabling of detector in alarm condition after reset.
25 Reset time is programmed to be a minimum, also after alarm
Appendix A.2 Functions
A.2.1 SOLAS
SOLAS program version can be selected for all languages.
Verification before automatic disablement, see section 3.2 and 4.2 in

"Operators handbook11- BS-100.
If one or more addresses are still in alarm condition after the RESET procedure,
an operator acknowledge is required to have these addresses disabled.
At the end of the "RESET" procedure the following text will appear in the
display:
ADDRESS(ES) STILL IN AURM

TO DISABLE PRESS | WITHIN 10 SECONDS
If the gj] is not acknowledged within the limit of 10 seconds, new alarms will
be given for these addresses.
By pressing the g key within the time limit, the address will automatically be
disabled. To find the addresses conserned, the menu function "SHOW STA-
TUS", "DISABLEMENTS" should be used.
Alarm delay (Tl, T2), see section 3.2 and 4.2 in "Operators Handbook".
If the silent alarm input is active the alarm outputs will be delayed by period Tl
at alarm from an automatic detector. In the standard version the additional alarm
delay T2 will be started when the "SOUNDER SILENCE" button is pressed.
For the SOLAS version the alarm delay T2 win not be activated by operate
"SOUNDER SILENCE" and the alarm output will be blocked.
This means that there will be no automatic alarm after ended alarm delay
Tl.
If "SOUNDER SILENCE" is not operated, there will be a automatic alarm
at the end of Tl.
If more than one alarm is present within time limit of alarm delay (Tl), the alarm
delay will proceed unchanged from the first alarm and to the end of the selected
alarm delay. If "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated within selected delay, the
AK/BMA -outputs will be blocked. If new alarms are registered after operating
the "SOUNDER SILENCE", a new delay period will start from the time the new
alarm are registered.
If the AK/BMA-outputs are required to be activated the silent alarm input must
be removed or a manual call-point operated.
A.2.2 - LPC (England)
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYF1 Fire Alarm Control Panel
Disabling of loop (under service-menu) activates the internal buzzer.
If one or more addresses are still in alarm condition after "RESET1 procedure,
an operators acknowledge i required to have these addresses disabled by
pressing theQ key on the front panel (as SOLAS).
Disablement of the internal buzzer is not allowed.
Disabling the sounders through the menu will illuminate the "SOUNDERS
DISABLED" lamp.
Disablement of the fire brigade output will iluminate the "FIRE BRIG.
DISABLED" lamp.
A.2.3 - Denmark
If one or more addresses are still in alarm condition after the "RESET"
procedure, an operators acknowledge is required to have these addreses
disabled by pressing the gjj key on the front panel (as SOLAS).
BMA, BMFO, BMP and output controls are disabled when the front door is
open.
System fault is given after 30 minutes interrupt of 220V AC.
A.2.4 - Sweden
Inverted BMP-output (active when there is voltage on the control panel).
Internal buzzer is disabled when front door is open.
Sounder silence and reset button must be pressed for more than 2 seconds to
activate the function.
Custom spesified address text is presented on line 2.
APPENDIX B- PRINTER
Install
C printer
Bl Installing the printer
The fire alarm control panel BS-100 DYFI comes complete with fixings for
installing the optional printer type BUP-10.
The printer is delivered with all necessary accessories.
BUP-10 is installed on the rear side of the display panel door.
DISPLAY
Circuit board
Contact for rip jon cable
to display
Contact for ri >on cacle
XGT-1/24-28
L-oniac Yor T! ubon cable

Contact
^ \ ._TEfr-fft
Fig.l
Before installing the printer, switch off the power J
Fig. 1
1. Fit the printer as shown with the paper roll at the bottom ensuring that the
paper is fed through the slot in the panel facia.
2. Connect the ribbon cable XGT-1/24-28 from the printer to the circuit
board.
Note: The ribbon cabk is colour labelled on one side. The colour labelling
has to point downwards when the cable is connected.
3. Connect the circuit board BUS-10 as shown, and connect the ribbon
cable.
Colour labelling as above.
4. Power up the system and check the operation of the printer by

running the "front test"- function.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFl Fire Alaim Control Panel
B2 Replacing the paper roll in the printer

If the printer is fitted, it is located on the inside of the control panel inner door.
A: Open the control panel front door.

B: Remove the empty roll by releasing the locking clip on the right-hand
side of the paper roll shaft, and pull the chart out to the other side
(See fig. 3).
C: Let the free end of the new paper roll point downwards. Bend it and
guide it into the printer paper slot in the lower end of the printer
(See fig. 3).
D: Bend the end of the paper in a arrow chape to simplify the import
into the printer paper slot.
E: Put the new paper roll in its correct place, insert the paper roll shaft
again and secure it by means of the locking clip.
Paper slot
Control
panel inner
door
Paper roll
Paper roll
shaft
Printer paper
Locking clip
(left hand)
Fig. 3: Side view of the optional printer located at the rear

side of the front door.
Ribbon
Adjusting container
wheel for
ribbon.
Slot for ribbon

Fig. 4: Location of the finger screw on the printer.
F: Feed the paper manually through the printer by turning the finger screw.
G: Close the control panel inner door.
B3 Replacing the carbon ribbon in the printer
Ribbon cable
contact
Release- Ribbon container

handle
Carbon Ribbon Cassette
Printer drive board
Paper roll shaft
Fig. 5
C Switch of all power on the control panel!

J
1. Remove the printer ribbon cable connections completely.
2. The ribbon container is removed by operating the release handle (fig 5).
3. Before a new ribbon is installed, tighten the ribbon by means of

the adjusting wheel (fig. 4).
4. Locate the ribbon cassette adjusting wheel side first, and then
the other side. Lock into position by pressing on the release-
handle.
5. Check that the ribbon is in the correct position in the ribbon slot.
6. Crank the ribbon around by means of the adjusting wheel to be sure that
it runs correctly.
7. Replace the printer and ribbon cables and set the power up.
8. Run the printer test function to be sure that everything is OK.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100D177 Fire Alarm Control Panel
Appendix C - Multiple BS-100/Control panels

with common repeater units (BU-100/101/70)
I*. L EA- Q^ Display-unit L Display-unit

BS-100 noiokoi (BU-umt) (BU-unit)
Fire alarm control
panel
\ interfacer
t Digital inputs
I". L>
BS-100
EA-:
\
Fire alarm control
panel
P1-EAC4/A1-22
* Program variant '. XX

(ex. 103) .promise s that the
program is comm unicating
lJ with BU-units.
BS-100
Fire alarm control
panel
There is no communication between the individual BS-100 control panel.

Each individual BS-100 control panel gives warning about its own condition and
relays this to the common BU-units
(BU-units, common name for repeater units BU-100, BU-101 and BU-70.)
- Custom designed texts within a special system program for comm. with BU-
units.
- Digital in-/outputs can be used as supplement function from EA-.
The table below shows which operator buttons, indiction lamps are fitted to the
various BU-units.
Indication lamps BU-100 BU-101 BU-70
HI Indicator lamp X X
Device(s) still in alarm cond. X X
Prewarning X X X
Fault X X X
Function disabled X X
Mains X X X
More alarms X X X
Operation buttons
More alarms X X X
Sounder silence X
Sounder silence (buzzer) X X
Reset X
C.1 Alarm /Prewarning/ Fault /More alarms

BU-units can be programmed to present fire alarm, prewarning and fault with
text on the display.
C.1.1 Fire alarm from a BS-100

Fire alarm message (panel address, loop, detector no. or custom text) will only
appear in the display of the BS-100 control panel which has registered the
incident and on the BU-units.
BU-100 will present alarm from all detectors, BU-70 and BU-101 can be
programmed into presentation zones.
Fire alarm message will only appear in the display of the BS-100 control panel
even if the door is open.
Internal buzzer and FIRE- indication lamps will activate on the BS-100 control
panel which registered the fire alarm and on the BU-units.
Only the BMA-output on the control panel which registered the fire alarm will
operate.
Only those control outputs on the BS-100 control panel which registered the fire
alarm will operate.
Only the sounders connected to the control panel which registered the fire alarm
will operate.
Alarm output on the EA- will be activated (output L57).
C.1.2 Prewarning
Prewarning message (panel address, loop, detector no. or custom text) will only
appear in the display on the BS-1000 control panel which registered the
prewarning and on the BU-units.
Internal buzzer and PREWARNING indication lamps will activate on the BS-
100 control panel which registered the prewarning and on the BU-units.
Only the BMFO-output on the control panel which registered the prewarning
will be activated.
Prewarning will be given on the BU-display depending of the programming.

Prewaming output on the EA- will be activated (output L58).
C.13 Fault
Detector-/System faults registered on a BS-100 control panel will only give
message to that control panel and on the BU-units. On the BS-100 control panel
the fault message will appear in the display. Internal buzzer and FAULT
indication lamp will also be activated.
If the door is open on the BS-100 control panel, there will be no fault message in
the display. The message will appear when the door is closed
On the BU-units the internal buzzer and the FAULT indication lamp will be
activated. If programmed, text will appear in the display.
Fault output (not comm.fault) on the EA- will be activated (output L59).
Only the BMA-output on the control panel which registered the fault will be
activated.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYF1 Fire Alarm Control Panel
If a communication failure between the BS-100 control panel and the EA occurs,
the fault message will be printed out on the printer on the BU-units. Comm. fault
output BS-/EA- will be activated (output L60).
C.1.4 More alarms

The "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp will light on the BS-100 control panel
which is registering more than one alarm. When there is two alarms on different
BS-100 control panels the "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp will not light.
The "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp on the BU-units will light if there is
more than one alarm registered in the system. Two alarms from two different
BS-100 control panels will activate the "MORE ALARMS" indication lamp on
the BU-units.
C.1.5 Device(s) still in alarm cond.

After "RESET" the "DEVICE(S) STILL IN ALARM COND." indication lamp
may light on the BS-100 control panel which still has addresses in alarm condit-
ion. If this lamp lights on one of the BS-100 control panels, it will also light on
the BU-units.
C.1.6 Function disabled

The "FUNCTION DISABLED" indication lamp will only light on the control
panel which is partly disabled. If this lamp is illuminated on one of the BS-100
control panels, it will aslo light on the BU-units.
C.1.7 Indication lamps HI, H2, H3

The indication lamps HI, H2 and H3 on the BS-100 control panel are controlled
separately.
The indication lamps HI, H2 and H3 on the BU-units are controlled from the
control outputs on the EA 2/3 (input L51, 52, 53).
C.2 Operation
C.2.1 Sounder silence
When "SOUNDER SILENCE" button on the BS-100 control panel which has
registered the alarm is operated, all alarm devices connected to this control panel
and the internal buzzer on the BU-units are switched off. If another BS-100
control panel is also in alarm condition, "SOUNDER SILENCE" must also be
operated at that control unit.
C.2.1.2 From EA- or BU-100

If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated from the EA 2/3 (separate input) or
BU-100, all alarm devices and internal buzzers on all BS-100 control panels will
be silenced.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFl Fire Alarm Control Panel
C.2.2 Reset
C^2.1 From fire alarm control panel
When operating the "RESET1 on a control panel in abnormal condition (all other
control panels are in normal condition), this will reset the entire system. If
another BS-100 control panel is in abnormal condition, operating of the "RE-
SET" will only reset the control panel which is operated.
To reset the entire system (BS-100 and BU-units) operate the last control panel
in abnormal condition.
C.2.2.2 From EA- or Btf-100

Operating of the "RESET" from EA 2/3 or BU-100 will reset the entire system.
C.2.3 More alarms

When operating the "MORE ALARMS" on the individual BS-100 control
panels, it is only possible to scroll alarms registered in that particular BS-100
control panel which has operated.
When operating the "MORE ALARMS" on BU-units, it is possible to scroll

alarms registered in the entire system.
C.3 Disable / restore

Disablements on a BS-100 control panel will activate "FUNCTION
DISABLED" only on this control panel and on the BU-unit.
Disablements will be stored in "STORED EVENTS" and only showed in the

menu "SHOW-STATUS DISABLEMENTS" on the control panel where the
disablement was carried out.
Disablements / restorations of address, zone, controls, sounders and Fire brigade

can only be carried out on the individual BS-100 control panel.
C.4 System
C.4.1 Sensitivity
Sensitivity control must be carried out at each individual BS-100 control panel.
C.4.2 Internal
The real-time clock in BS-100 control panels have to be set manually via menu.
The EA-clock will be set equal to the clock in control panel with address A.
I Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFI Fke Alarm Control Panel
Appendix D BS-100 master / Control unit

with BS-60 slaves
BS-60
CL
^^mm
Fire alarm control
panel
1 loop
KDL-26 BS-60
BS-100
Main fire alarm CL Comm. LL Fire alarm
line control panel
control panel
splitter 1 loop
BS-60
CL Fire alarm
control panel
1 loop
BS-60
a, Fire alarm
control panel
1 loop
When a condition (fire, fault, prewaraing) is registered on a control panel

(BS-100/BS-60), the indication lamps on the panel front will light, the outputs
will be activated etc. in a normal way
The custom texts presented in the display on both BS-100 and BS-60 has to be
manually programmed in both control panels.
There are no communication between the BS-60 control panels.
D. 1 Alarm / Prewarning / Fault / More alarms

D.I.I Fire alarm
Fire alarm from the BS-100 control panel is only registered on the BS-100 control
Fire alarm from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60 control
D.1.2 Prewarning
Prewaming from the BS-100 control panel is only registered on the BS-100
control panel. There will be no registering on the BS-60 control panel(s).
Prewarning from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60

control panel and on the BS-100 control panel.
D.13 Fault
(The BS-100 control panel will look at the BS-60 control panels as ordinary
loops).
Fault from the BS-100 control panel is registered on the BS-100 control panel.
There will be no display on BS-60 control panel(s).
Fault from a BS-60 control panel is registered on the relevant BS-60 control
D.1.4 More alarms

More alarms from the BS-100 control panel will only be registered on the BS-
100 control panel. There will be no display on the BS-60 control panel(s).
More alarms from a BS-60 control panel will also be registered as more alarms
on the BS-100 control panel. There will be no display on other BS-60 control
panels.
2 alarms from 2 different control panels will be registered as more alarms on the
BS-100 control panel.
D.2 Operating
D.2.1 Sounder silence
The "SOUNDER SILENCE" function will be dependent upon how it is
configured within each of the BS-60 control panels.
When operating the "SOUNDER SILENCE" on the BS-100 control panel, all
alarm devices will be switched off (also devices connected to the BS-60 control
panels).
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" function is set to "OFF", the "SOUNDER

SILENCE" can only be operated from the BS-100 control panel.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" function is set to "ON", the "SOUNDER

SILENCE" can be operated from both the BS-60 and BS-100 control panel.
If the "SOUNDER SILENCE" is operated from a BS-60, alarm devices

connected to the BS-60 control panel which is operated, will be switched off.
D.2.2 Reset
The "RESET" function will also be dependent upon how it is configured within
each of the BS-60 control panels.
When operating the "RESET" from the BS-100 the entire system will be reset.
If the "RESET" function is set to "OFF", the "RESET" can only be operated
from the BS-100 control panel.
If the "RESET" function is set to "ON", the "RESET" can be operated from both
the BS-100 and the BS-60 control panel.
When operating the "RESET" from the BS-60 control panel, only the BS-60
which is operated will be reset.
P-BS10Q/ECE/PM5/170895 56 Autronica AS
D.3 Disable / Restore

When disabling on a BS-60 control panel, the "FUNCTION DISABLED'
indication lamp will light only on this control panel.
This will be logged in "SHOW-STATUS DISABLEMENTS" and in

"STORED-EVENTS" only on the current control panel.
// is advisable to disable I restore BS-60 addresses from the BS-100.
D3.1 Address
The BS-100 can disable/restore all addresses in the system.
The BS-60 can only disable/restore addresses connected at the relevant BS-60
control panel.
D3.2 Zone
Only zones defined in the BS-100 control panel can be disabled/restored from
the BS-100 control panel. Zones defined in a BS-60 control panel can be
disabled/restored only at the relevant BS-60 control panel.
D.33 Controls
Controls connected to the BS-100 control panel can only be disabled/restored
Controls connected to the BS-60 control panel can only be disabled/restored at

the relevant BS-60 control panel.
D.3.4 Sounders
Sounders connected to the BS-100 control panel can only be disabled/restored
Sounders connected to a BS-60 control panel can only be disabled/restored at the

relevant BS-60 control panel.
D3.5 Fire brigade / fighters

BMA, BMP, BMFO outputs from the BS-100 control panel can only be
disabled/restored from the BS-100 control panel.
restored at the relevant BS-60 control panel.
D.4 System
D.4.1 Sensitivity '

All addresses in the system (including those connected to the BS-60 control
panel(s)) can be interrogated from the BS-100 control panel.
From the BS-60 control panel it it only possible to interrogate the addresses
connected to it.
D.4.2 Internal
In all control panels the internal clock has to be set manually.
The internal clocks of all control panels are independant and must be set
individually.
Commissioning handbook: BS-100 DYFl Fire Alarm Control Panel
Appendix F - Fault messages
Autronka
TABLE OF FAULT CODE / REASON
FAULT CODE TEXT REASON REMEDIES COMMENTS
(6.0) Loop disabled Short at both terminals Remove the fault cause "Reset"
(8.3) Communication fault Loop not polled last min. Is the comm. OK? "Reset"
(D.O) No answer from loop Switch fault/Line problem Correct switch value Power up
(D.I) Wrong answer from loop Address double coded or line Correct switch value Power up
orohlem
(D.2) Loop scanner error? Loop not connected
(E.O) No or short Detector in fault cond. Exchange unit "Reset"
answer pulse or missing. Reset no. Correct the reset no. Power up
(E.1) Double addressing Two det. with same addr. Correct detector number "Reset"
nr pnllirjp pfpl"||p.jr|n
(E.2) Address answer at Reset number and det- Correct reset number "Reset"
reset no. address with same value
(E.3) Address 100 answers, Address value not Correct the address or "Reset"
remove it. allowed remove it
(E.4) No answer at power up Detector that is not With power up only "Reset"
able to answer Followed by mes. (E.O)
OE.5) Not valid reset number Reset no. in area 101-128 Correct reset number "Reset"
(E.6) Reset no. too low Reset no. is set in Correct reset number "Reset"
the addr. area
(E.7) . Reset no. too high Reset no. is set outside Correct reset number "Reset"
the addr. area
(F.O) Loop is OK The loop has been faulty Reset the message "Reset"
but is now OK
(F.I) Loop open circuit The loop is fed from Find and correct the "Reset"
A' -B' terminals fault
(F.2) Loop open circuit The loop is fed from A-B Find and correct the "Reset"
and A'-B' terminals fault
(F.3) Loop open circuit The loop is fed from A-B Find and correct the "Reset"
terminals fault
(F.4) High current The idle current is Control the loop for "Reset"
consumption above 60 mA fault or faulty unit
(F.5) High loop voltage Voltage (B) over 16 V Remove the fault intr. unit "Reset"
1
(F.6) High loop voltage Voltage (B ) over 16 V Remove the fault intr. unit "Reset"
1
(F.7) High loop voltage Voltage (A ) over 3 V Some unit is feeding "Reset"
current into the loop
(F.8) High current The idle current is Control the loop for "Reset"
consumption above 100 mA fault or faulty unit
1
(X.X) New or unknown fault Fault type has not text Note the fault code! "Reset"
(7.0 System fault Fault message from Control the fault "Reset"
7.F) sub-panel sub-panel BS-60 message in BS-60 unit
(8.5, 8.6)
(9.0
9.F)
Appendix E - Pocket Pager

Pocket Pager can be directly connected to a communication module BSL-100
on the BS- panel.
Standard communication protocol is ESPA 4.4.4 and comm.channel 2B.
Teletracer / Contactor make use of the following codes:

Beep codes (0-9) Usual use of codes
Code 0: Silent call Test call

Codel:- - - - Meet me
Code 5: it
Code 2: Operator call
Code 3: Display message
Code 4: Important message
Code 6: - special applications Call with repetition
Code 7: Speak call
Type (0-3)
CodeO: Reserved
Codel: Reset call
Code 2: Speak call
Code 3: Standard call
Priority (0-3)
Code 0: Reserved
Codel: Alarm (highest priority)
Code 2: High
Code 3: Normal
To transfer custom text /address to the receiver at alarm, prewarning and fault
the Beep-code is set to selected "signal" for the different messages.
Type is set to "3" "Standard call".
Priority should be set to "1" "Alarm" for fire and prewarning and "2" "High" at
fault.
f Menu/ year, Technical X=2 X=3
f} 72 1 2- 142.000X
A. -3
" (BSA- 100)
X=4 X=5 X=6 X=7
1
Communication.
r c
Main program System texts montl Bulletin Modiflcation 3 proto New protocols Short description of changes and new functions: J.
BS-662,663B types HP-
^t
Pl-BS 100- 1-00 X ft
P1-BS100-1-10 P5-BS100-1-10 X X P
2) IJ ASSP Show-function, password routine, disable/restore, customer text.
Pl-BS100-2-00 P5-BS100-2bOO X X X
ASAP 1 channel
Alarm from manual call-points. Controls from customer data. ^
Pl-BS 100-2-012' P5-BS100-2bOO X X X
P5-BS100-2bOO X X X ASAP on 2-wired current loop.
Pl-BS 100-2-02
P5-BS100-2b03" X Adaption to different requirements.
Pl-BS 100-2-03 X X 1fidetector loops
Adaption to Swedish requirements. Message buffer filled up
Pl-BS100-2-053) P5-BS100-2b05" X X X AS.AP 2, channels after 20 changes
P5-BS100-2b05" X X X Changed initializing.
Pl-BS 100-2-06
Adaption to req. from Holland, England, Solas. X44 used as a
Pl-BS100-2-074> P5-BS100-2L07 X X X GAinput, Several function changes and corrections. IfideUooos.
Pl-BS 100-2- 10 P5-BS100-2M011 X X X Parts of the service menu implemented. Changed reset procedure.
Dvfi- settings remain after start UD.
PS-BSKXKZblO 11
X Special program for
Pl-BS 100-8- 10 X X
PS-BSKXKZblO" X KD-lOprotocol Special version for use in KD-10.
Pl-KDBS-9-10 X X
P5-BS100-2bll" X New functions, checking for polluted detectors, addresscontrol,
Pl-BS 100-2- 11 X X disable/restore printer Adaption to req. from Enplarid^PK,^ weden
P5-BS100-2bll" X X X Improvements regarding "locking" problems in version 2- 1 0/2- 1 1
P1-BS100-2-12
11 Corrections of service function "Address control"
Pl-BS 100-2- 13 PS-BSlOO^bll X X X
Pl-BS100-26>-205) P5-BS100-2b20" 9201 005/92 X X X Changes of batt. test at 10.00 AM. 25V limit red. with 1 %. No.of disablement
and changes of cust. text incr. Watch-dop counter. Solas for all laneuapes.
Corr. watch-dog front with several BU-units. Corr. disable/
P1-BS100-2-212' P5-BS100-2b20" 9203 11/92 X X X restore; routine to avoid warm start-
n Disable controls password protected. Solas: Man.call-points can
Pl-BS 100-2-22 P5-BS100-2b20 X X X be delaved in customer data. Onlv T2 (adjustment) Holland: Tl=lmin.
7 1J Corr. "locking" problems with "nervous door switch". New
P1-BS100-2-23 ' P5-BS100-2b20 9209 X X X
8) Corr. sounder silence/reset with BU- 100 and "locking" more
P1-BS100-2-24 P5-BS100-2b20 9210 045/92 X X X alarms without BU. Improved button functions.
P5-BS100-2b20 9307 023/93 X X X X X Open alarm route. Monitoring of sounder circuit changed.
Pl-BS 100-2-29
8) Special version to config. battery limit (only offshore)
Pl-BS 100-2-30 P5-BS100-2b30 9209 X X X X X
P5-BS100-3bOO 9308 023/93 X X X X X ESPA 4.4.4 Paging, zoning, config. battery limit.
P1-BS100-3-00 ASAP-BPE-53
P5-BS100-3blO X X X ASAP-BPE-53
P1-BS100-3-10 X X
Pl-BS 100-3- 11 P5-BS100-3B10 08/95 X X X X X ASAP-BPE-53 Detection of comrafault BSA/BSR. Monitoring of 24V DC to BSB-1 00. Earth
fadtmeratoringofAKHWtpuL ASAP ccnfr. of tire
Pl-BS 100-3-20 P5-BS100-3B20 9509 X X X X X ASAP-BS1UU-6U Standard and Onshore version
jfe
1) b=country code/language 6) From serial no.. 1458-

Menu-/syslem texts: b means country code 2) Only few delivered 7) From serial no. 1936-
X = Program to be used together with the BSA-version. 3) Version 2-04 not distributed 8) Only with Norwegian and English text
NB! When changing program it might be necessary 4) Only 1 copy delivered
5) When upgrading to 2-30 the
change the menu-/system program. See column 1 and 2. BSL111 must be upgraded.
PRGOVE-E/MBE, 170895
Appendix H - Location of EPROM and RAM
BSA-100
&* '*;:'.;#": |;r^>.-:vv-':'M'^***L :i

1*33 '"-" 'v: *.::;:;>>:;, m$ 1.1
lix I : iMi0 :
D-109
PROCESSOR | P1-BS100-X-XX
. "*:'"' t MAIN PROGRAM i:
D-106 D-110 :
BATTERY
HAM
3 S3-XXXX
i CUSTOM DATA I
i
0108
1| D-lll
f RAM 1 |
| PS-BS100-XXXX
1 if MANU PROGRAM
The X in the EPROM's type description indicates the version number and will be
changed for every new version.
Ensure that there is correct polarity when intalling the EPROM's (pin 1 in
position 1).
ELEKTRO-MASKINVs
Tvetenveien 30 b - Postboks 38 Bryn - 0611 Oslo - TIf. 22 64 83 20 - Telex 76777 - Telefax 22 64 39 82
Technical data A 512/16G5/07895565
181 76
CD
Electrical Values
Nominal voltage 12V
Nominal Capacity (20) 16 Ah
Max load 200 A

.151.6
Nominal current (J20) 0,8 A
Range of operating temperature: -30C - 50C
Charging methods: Floating 14,1V Connectors:Drilled flat Terminal lead for

at 20C Cyclic 14,4V at 20C M5 screw.
When using charge voltage above Material of container: Polypropylene

14,1V the charge current should Weight: 6.8 kg.
:>e limited to OÂ/Ah.
Application:
Stationary operation under constant charge.
Fig. 2 rhDws the minimum
recommended voltage on a
2 Volt (nominal) ce!!,
UV/cel! Discharge time and voltage run Um!. discharge voltage (standard values'* dependent on load,
e. g. a 10 Ah batiery being
discha'aed at 10 Amps.
The 1 > 1 current is
10Ar
' = 0.5 Amps
20 hoj-s
therefore
10 Amps
'20x1.,
0.5 Amps
The voftage run, recom-
mended end voltage and
discharge time can be read
Off from figure 2.
This example shows a volt-
age drop at the beginning
of discharge to 2.02 Volt'
cell, the end voltage is
1.5 Vott/celf and discharge
time 35 minutes.
O.B
0.6
0.4
20 40 1 4 6 6 10 20 30 40 1 4 6 8 10 15 20
seconds minutes hours *
Fig. 3 shows the percent-

age of available capacity,
relative to the amount of
% Cn(Jm. (capacity) Available percentage of capacity relative to discharge current discharge current.
10 Ah battery
100 \x (500 mA)
20 hou^s
2 0 x 1 = 10 Amps
90 Looking at the curve we
see a* 20 *I;,: there is
60 % available capacity
80 at 10 Amps.
The data is for new batte-
70 ries. Wnen a battery has
been cycled or has been
used tn float applications
60 for a short time further
development takes place
increasing the capacity of
50 the batte-y
40
30
20
10
10 20 70 100 140
All iKjnu ietrved. Specifioiiooi subject to change without notice.
r TERMINALS AS DISCONNECT PLUub RATING DATA;

r
INPUT VOLTAGE : 24 V DC i10 %
RATED CONSUPTION : 0.45W
RELAY SELF RESET CURRENT : 3mA AT 20 C
PICK-UP CURRENT : 12mA
MAX OUTPUT VOLTAGE : 250 V
CONTINOUS CURRENT : 6A
SWITCHING CURRENT : BA
SWITCHING CAPASITY AT RES. LOAD : 2000VA / 100W
SWITCHING CAPASITY/ SWITCHING CURRENT : 250mW/ 10mA
BOUNCE TIMES : < 3mS
SWITCHING DELAY : < 8ntS
SELF RESET DELAY : < 7mS
MAX SWITCHING FREttUENCY : 70Hi
CONTACT MATERIAL : HARD SILVER. GOLD FLASHED
MECHANICAL OPERATING LIFE : >107 SWITCHING OPERATIONS
-, 24V DC, 1A. RESISTIVE LOAD : > SxlO5 SWITCHING OPERATIONS
-, 220V AC, 3A r RESISTIVE LOAD : > 7)(10S SWITCHING OPERATIONS
INPUT-OUTPUT./ MOUNTING RAIL : 4KV AC^f ^<Veff ( 8mm I UPON REO.UEST

ELECTRICAL ISOLATION AT INPUT-OUTPUT : 250V- / 300V-, OR. C
STORAGE TEMPERATURE : -40*C...60C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE :
-MOUNTED ON TS WITHOUT CLEARANCE : -25C.^40C
-MOUNTED ON TS WITH CLEARANCE OF > 20mm : -2SeC...*50C
ORIGINAL RELAY : WEIDMULLER RS-30 ORDERING DATA 11002.2
LED
CONNECTING DIAGRAM
DERATING CURVE
DEMOUNTED ON RAIL
WITHOUT CLEARANCE
b=MOUNTED ON RAIL WITH

> 20mm CLEARANCE o*gn / zxmmmmm
mmmmmmm Autronica AS
smmmmmm
CURRENT e Checked Spec Con: smmmmmm P.OJox3010,
*PP' mmmfmmm
mmmmmxm N-7001 Trondhelm
!
mmnmatmm Norway
fluTHONICIf-
WZOJOWMMW DIMENSIONAL SKETCH Repl lor ReCK by
OUTPUT RELAY TYPE 7624-025.0001 Owg no v.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS BU-4982 Ul

A
r
AH right* rtrvd. Spci)icilioo subject to chnq wiltxxjl
TERMINALS AS DISCONNECT RATING DATA:

r
INPUT VOLTAGE : 24 V DC *10 %
RATED CONSUPTION : 0,6 W
RELAY SELF RESET CURRENT ; 5mA AT 20 BC
PICK-UP CURRENT : 12mA
MAX OUTPUT VOLTAGE : 250 V
CONTINOUS CURRENT : 4A
SWITCHING CURRENT : BA
SWITCHING CAPASITY AT RES. LOAD : 1400VA
SWITCHING CAPASI1Y/ SWITCHING CURRENT : 250mW/ 10mA
BOUNCE TIMES : < 4mS
SWITCHING DELAY : < 1)nS
SELF RESET DELAY : lOmS
CONTACT MATERIAL : HARD SILVER. GOLD FLASHED

MECHANICAL OPERATING LIFE : < 10^ SWITCHING OPERATIONS
INPUT-OUTPUT,/ MOUNTING RAIL : 4KV AC.tr CKV^ I flmm ) UPON REQUEST

ELECTRICAL ISOLATION AT INPUT-OUTPUT : 250V- / 300V-. GR. C
STORAGE TEMPERATURE : -tO*C...60C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE : -25C ....* WC
-MOUNTED ON TS WITHOUT CLEARANCE : -25*C._*tO*C
-MOUNTED ON TS WITH CLEARANCE OF > 20mm : -2SC_.50'C
ORIGINAL RaAY : WEIDMULLER RS-32 ORDERING DATA 940602
CONNECTING DIAGRAM
DERATING CURVE
'II
CONTINOUS
CURRENT!
*\l
ot Csgn / 0*, Sent
19.8.91 1:1 Autronlca AS
ChcK*d 5cC Cor.
P.O.Box 3010.
N-7001 Trondhein
Norway
H 10 20 30 40 SO 60 TO'C
DIMENSIONAL SKETCH Rpi tor R* by
OUTPUT RELAY TYPE 7624-025.0002 Owg no
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS BU-5083 lAl

V A
I All fights Specifications subject to change wilhoul notice
r f
99.5
96.5 13 72.5
.31 II
Bracket "DIN 46277

SOCKET FOR BULKHEAD MOUNTING Control ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
OR IN USE WITH BRACKET DIN 46277
contact MOUNTED ON SOCKET
Power supply
SOCKET: -PuTRDNiCH- ART. NO. 7461-008
RELAY:-fluniDNiCB- ART. NO. 7633-055

OPERATION DIAGRAM OUTPUT RELAY
SUPPLY VOLTAGE & . . . . W V A C 1S% CONTACT RATINGS 2 CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES
INSULATION VOLTAGE 2000 VAC MAX. SWITCHING VOLTAGE 2 SO VAC
CONSUMPTION 1W PERMANENT CURRENT LIMIT 5A CQS.4*H1AA CDS.t>0.6)
AMBIENT TEMP -20-C... . *50 e C MAX. SWITCHING POWER 12SO VA COS. * = 1
PROTECTION IPAQ IEC 1U/ DIN M>050 MECHANICAL LIFE
FUNCTION OFF DELAY WITHOUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 CONTACT MATERIAL AgNi
WEIGHT WITH SOCKET 160 g 1 Dale Scute i.-es<fcia;fcs.ii _ . . _-
ITIME i iiM ST k i Autromca AS
V. 1....10sec. 20.5.92 1:1
S!"S : P.O.Box 3010.
TIMER RANGES 2: 8... .80 sec Checked Spec Co Appr
3: 1 TOmin.

-
r N-7001
_
Trondheim
Norway
REPEATABILITY 1 1V.
DIM. SKETCH '
INDICATION LED IN THE FRONT FOR ENERGIZED RELAY Repl lor Hepl b>
TIME RELAY TYPE SELECTRON GZAH 20
Dwg no
OFF DELAY WITHOUT SUPPLY VOLTAGE
BU.-5782
A
All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change without notice.
163
OX
387 / .012.5
/
i^-Â
^^^^ ^_Â
w \y /
i "< 'J i< 1

SHOWN AS 033
CENTRAL UNIT 30
NOT MOUNTED
CENTRAL UNIT
MOUNTED
"> CM
*f CO
n
SHOWN AS Optional cable

COVER input both sides
NOT MOUNTED
33 30
i'
-,510x6,8 ,
e ^ !
01
N 445,5
440, D
308 FRONT COVER

UE-946
37 ^ 40^30^30^34^30,,30^40, 37 k
i I M1 \
ALL CABLE HOLES COVERED
I
I > s 1
WITH PLASTIC PLUGS
IN COVER UE-1140
\J_X J 00
033 017 019 017 033
co K)
oo
Cover for cable input UE-1140 1
,
rVV'^VVVVV'VVVVVVVVVVVV^ t
PROTECTING GRADE IP22 WITH CENTRAL UNIT AND FRONT COVER UE-946 MOUNTED
Date Osgn/Dwn Trac Scale DDDDDDD
21/06/93 RJ./KJ. 1:5 DBSoo Autronica AS
Checked Spec Ctrl. DBODHDD
Approved
DD N-7005 Trondheim
DBDDBDD
DODDDDD
CABINET for BS-100,B^-60.BX-^0 -flUTRDNICfl-
Next
Ref.
TYPE UEA-23/2 BULKHEAD/ T:\BRANN\BU\DWG\BU-6202 sheet
WALL MOUNTED Dwg no. Sh.no. Rev,
DIMENTIONAL DRAWING BU-6202

AU rlghtarf*<iervsd.
|htarf*< Specifications subject ta change without notlcer-
INSIDE UEA--23/2 CABINE r

BATTERY
n
BATTERY
12V 16Ah.
n n
BATTERY
12V 16Ah.
TO BE MOUNTED OUTSIDE
CABINET
10 RS-30 OLTTPUT RELAYS
BSJ-100 OUTPUT P.C.BOARD
BSL-100 DATA COMMUNICATION P.C.BOARD
5+3 FUSES+TERMINALS 24V DC
BSA-100 MAIN PROSESSOR P.C.BOARD
BATTERY 12V 15Ah
Antall Posnr Navn.type.dim. Mjateriale Anmerkning

Date Dagn/Dwn Troc Scale DDODDDD
18.05.95 RAJ 1:5 aSSSSaa Autronlca AS
Checked Spec Ctrl Approved DBODBQD
mmmmmaa N-7005 Tnondheim
BSgRgBa Norway
SAMSUNG/1139/1140 -flUTRDNIDR-
Rf. Next
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 GAM82\00231\DWG\002 sheet
ARRANGEMENT DRAWING Dug no, .Shno, Rev,.
CENTRAL UNIT M82-002319002 A

1
p AU rights reserved, SpeclFlcatlona subject to change without notice:-
INSIDE CABINET
MAIN PROSESSORBOARD BSA-100
0 O O
L41
X6C
u ______
||flX70
xea BSA-100 pj
If
5r<r
COMM, OUTPUT
BSL-100
1
,1
FRONT XB1
FANEL CHANNEL IA 5i
DETECTOR LOOPS j
8SD-108/BSL-110 H
BSS-100 X82 J
ALARM-OUTPUT MODUL ES *
BSB-108/BSL-llfl fl
Xg3 " En
OUTPUT-CONTROLL MC DULES SEj
BSJ-100/BSL-110 ou O
iH O*l
t OU JL
OU PI
I 0*4 I I
Uit,l Uit.2. 1 LM.1. j Llit.W.
_J -j v
O O O
L51
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale apaaoon

18.05.95 RAJ 1:5 BSSSSBB Autronlca AS
Checked Spec Ctrl Approved
Sag N-7005 Trondheim
R3BB3BB Norway
SAMSUNG/1139/1KO -flUTRDNICF*
Rcf. Next
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 G:\MB2\002319\DWG\003 sheet
RIBBON CABLE CONNECTION AT UE-922 Dwg no, Sh.no. Rev,
EXTENTION P.C.BOARDS M82-002319 003

3 1
All rtahtfrj-eeerved. Specifications subject to chango without notlcer
INSIDE CABINET o O O
7
IJ * BSA-100 X60
COMM, OUTPUT
1B,2A,28.
BSL-100
XBl
1
]J
CHANNEL 1A XBi
DETECTOR LOOPS
BSD-100/BSL-110
XG2
ALARM-OUTPUT MODULES
BSB-100/BSL-110
X62
XG3 051 ;l
OUTPUT-CONTROLL MODULES
BSJ-100/BSL-110 ou
J
% o 1 X83
ou
LiiM. 1 List,2. LishB. List.10. List.20. j
1
g*
041 1 1
J
0jg^ 3 0 0 0 0 30000000 30000000 30000000 30000000)
*-'* X X [] *^ ~ -^
o\ ^^^"^-^.o " ^~~ -- o
\
-L1 L3 L3
H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E1 9 101 171B192021222324
0 <<J> 0 C > e> 00(2 00000000
NC FIRE ALARM DELAYED

JL
E.R.MONITORING SYST.
EARTH A
MAINS 230VAC m w L. NC FIRE ALARM NOT DELAYEt
FUSES L3 1 18 DWG 007
1 222
ir
L 11
|
III
]
m K1.A1 DWG005
L7 n? ! A
Hi
SUPPLY FLAME DETECTOR

SHIP CABLE
K4 DWG 005
SUPPLY SUB DISPLAY PANEL DWG008 Data Dsgn/Dwn anDDonn
Trac Scale
18.05.95 RAJ 1:2.5 aSSSSan Autronlca AS
Checked Spec Ctrl Approved DBDDBDD
RAJ mmmoa N-7005 Trondheim
a'BHggS Norway
* SAMSUNG/1139/1140 -HUTRQNICR-
OUTSIDE Ref. Next
CABINET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 G:\MB2\002319\DWG\004 sheet
12VDC 12VDC BATTERY 16Ah INTERNAL MAINS CONNECTIONS Dwg no. .Sh/io. Rev,
24VDC
POWER DISTRIBUTION M82-002319p04
"1 i
All Hghtsreserved. Specifications subject to change without notices
I 0 0 I INSIDE CAuiNET
C OUTSIDE CABINET
T
[J F/
X60 BSAÎOO f X60 R.
COMM. OUTPUT f
lB.2ftt.2B. W 45 j; A2
B SL-100
K1 L2.7 DWG 004
X 61
C HANNEL 1A X61
D ETECTOR LOOPS
G SD-100/BSL-110
X 62 .14
A LARM-OUTPUT MODULES p- 11 .
BSB-100/BSL-110
XB2
X 63 12
OOOOOOOOOOO
0UTPUT-CONTROLL MODULES NC FAULT WARNING OUTPUT
BSJ-100/BSL 110
rr
X63
ENG.RM MONITORING
List.1 I List? List.3. List.10. List.20. I RS-30
K2
000 1LSLSLSLSI n
iM^MM i M555 m$m&\m&^
\ *v^
A1
o \ "-ô MAX LOAD 6 Amps

O
v. -^
A
NO FIRE ALARM DELAYED
\
\ ENG.RM COLOMNS
L10
25 26 27 2829 30 31 32 RS-32
0000000 A2 K8.11 DWG 007
K5.A1 DWG 007
MAX LOAE
11 A
24
V ACCOMM
DC BELLS
21
1
\J
Date Dsgn/Owi True Scale aaaaaaa

18.05.95 RAJ 1:2.5 aSSSSaa Autronica AS
Spec Ctrl. Approved
DD N-7005 Trondheim
DBDDBOD Mnnuni i
DPDDDDD Norway
SAMSUNG/1139/1140 flUTRQNICR-
Rflf. Next
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 C:\MB2\002319\DWG\005 sheet
CONNECTION DIAGRAM, BELL/SIREN Dwg no. Sh.no, Rev.
BELL/SIREN OUTPUTS M82-002319 005

4 I 3 I "1 1
All rlghtaîjerved Specifications subject to change without notteer
INSIDE CABINET c r
X60 BSA-100 X60
COMM. OUTPUT
1B,2A,2B.
BSL-100
X61
CHANNEL 1A XB1
DETECTOR LOOPS
BSD-100/BSL-110
X62
ALARM-OUTPUT MODULES
BSB-100/8SL-110
X62
OUTPUT-CONTRDLL MODULES
BSJ-100/BSL-110
DOUBLELOOP
LOOP NO. 01
DOUBLELOOP
LOOP NO. 00
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale nnnnnDD

18.05.95 RAJ 1:2.5 Autronica AS
OUTSIDE CABINET Checked Spec Ctrl. Approved
N-7005 Trondhelm
BSBBSBS Norway
SAMSUNG/1139/1140 -RUTRDNICR-
Ref. Next
SHIP CABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 G:\MS2\002319\OWG\OOS sheet
CONNECTION DIAGRAM, LOOP OO/ LOOP 01 Dwg no, Sh.no. Rev,
DETECTOR LOOPS 00 AND 01BSA-100 M82-002319 006

1
I All rlghta^reserved.
gntsê: Specifications subject to change without notlcer-
c L2.8 DWG 004

r t
fUl
NSIDE CABINET
m BSJ-100
CONTROL OUTPUT 1-16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0I0
TIMER ADJUSTED
RS-52 TO 2 SEC OFF
DELAY
34 31 32
NO
NOT DELAYED
ACCOMMODATION BELLS DOOR HOLDING MAGNETS EMERGENCY GENERAL STEADY EM ERG.
FIRE ALARM
MAX LOAD 10 Amps FOR ENG. RM MAX LOAD 10 Amps ALARM SIGNAL FROM GENERAL ALARM
NOT DELAYED COLOMN YARD SIGNAL GEN. SIGNAL FOR
NORMAL AT PUSHING "RESET' BUTTON. ENG. RM COLOM
NORMAL AT PUSHING
"SILINANCE SOUNDER" Date Trac Scale DDDDDDD
18.05.95 1:2.5 BSSSSBn Autronlca AS
BUTTON DODBDD
Checked Spec Ctrl. Approved
SGG N-7005 Trondhelm
Norway
OUTSIDE CABINET SAMSUNG/1139/mO -FlUTRDNICR-
Ref. Next
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BS-100 G:\MBZ\002319\DWG\007 sheet
CONNECTION OF CONTROL OUTPUT R E L A Y S Dwg na Sh.no., Rev,
OUTPUT BOARD BSJ-100 M82-002319007

~1 I
, 0 1 ^ f 4 ! 3 1 2 I 1 .
r
L u
c (
Deserved. Specifications subject to change Mlthc
INSIC)E CABINET OUTSIDE CABINET

n i6 6 n
J ;
SUB DISPLAY UNIT SUB DISPLAY UNIT
BU-70 BU-70
3
i 1|
L41 2
in X 12
1
JS ^
IS X
3 3
s I S
w S S.S 7
BSL- S g.x 5 5
Komm- ^ 9 " CLR- 1 6 6

modul. ^ ra~ x ^
H. x OV 7 7
*-
[/) <;
O 1 ai3 5 8
Sx
y 11 |mto- CLT
B ' 8
x
| ^y^JjiP î iîeu -j-ov ^^" 9 + 24VDC 9 + 24VDC
T"T7-. i n n\/ 10 ^n . /
iU UV iu uv
ACTIVE TRANSMITTER
c
ACTIVE RECEIVER
^
CHANNEL 1B i \ i i
a CURRENT LOOP
o
g
i
+ 24VDC FROM L7.5 DWG 004 9
Date/Sign.
ae
0V FROM L7.8 DWG 004 10 cC ^> ~ sHIP CABLE
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale DDDDDDD

18.05.95 RAJ 1=5 BSSSSna Autronlca AS
, " UBUUBUU
Checked /^t s? Spec Ctrl, Approved
yfA-^ RAJ & -W- SSSSSaa N-7005 Trondheim
Description
anaaann Nurwuy
( SAMSlfNG/1139/1140 flUTRDNICfr
X Ref. Next
t- FIRE A L A R M SYSTEM BS-100 G:\MB2\002319\DWQ\OOB aheet
o
g SERIAL DATA LINE TO SUB DJSPL A Y UNIT 0x9 no. Sh.no. Rev.
<
i M82-002319008 A
r FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
264 PANEL so
FRONT
135
PREWARNtNG
JLFA.ULI,
POWER
73.5
PANEL
235
PANEL CUT OUT
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale SSSSSSS A UT RON 1C A A/S

BOTTOM PLATE 15.09.1992 RJ LBH P.O.BOX 3010
N-7002 Trondhtlm
Checked Spec Cont Approved
aaaaoao
Autronlca
HMENSIONAL SKETCH 24D131/BU/4624
MSPLAY PANEL TYPE BU 70 Dwgno. Rev.
IULCKHEAD OR PARTLY FLUSH MOUNTING BU-4624 cl

Installation, commissioning and operator's handbook: Display unit BU-70
Installation, commissioning
and operator's handbook
Display unit
BU-70
BU70/04.05.06BE
Autronica AS,
N-7005 Trondheim, Norway.
Phone: +47 7 58 10 00, fax: +47 7 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro n.
Autronica Industrial Ltd., Watford, England.

Phone: 0923 33768, fax: 0923 225577, telex: 934633 autron g.
Autronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway.
Phone: +47 4 89 19 60, fax: +47 4 89 16 12, telex: 73763 autrs n.
Autronica Marine, Oslo, Norway.
Phone: +47 2 55 34 10, fax: +47 2 55 30 46, telex: 76274 amas n
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther Autronica AS
Contents:
1 Installation page 3
1.1 Mounting height " 3
1.2 Wall / bulkhead mounting " 4
1.3 Flush mounting " 5
1.4 Connections " 6
2 Commissioning " 8
2.1 Prc-commissioning check " 8
2.2 Setting of DIP-switch S1 on the BSR-70 circuit
board " 8
2.3 Self test " 8
2.4 Configuration of the fire alarm control panel " 11
2.5 Connection of power " 11
2.6 Communication test and BU-70 hardware test
(indicator test) " 11
2.7 Error messages " 12
3 Operating instructions " 13

3.1 Control panel, text display " 13
3.2 Prewarning " 14
3.3 Fire " 15
3.4 More alarms " 16
3.5 Fault " 1 7
3.6 The "SILENCE BUZZER" og "RESET" buttons at
the fire alarm control panel " 18
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther Autronica AS
This handbook covers installation, commissioning and operation of the

BU-70 display unit.
The expression "Fire alarm control panel" is a common term for the
unit giving information to the BU-70 display units (i.e., Autronica BS-
IOODYFI)
When other products are mentioned, references to relevant

documentation are made.
This handbook covers BU-70's with serial number higher than 340.
SPIRE
j> MORE ALARMS >l SILENCE
UPREWARNING
SFAULT
m POWER
~7
m
Width: 264, height: 130, depth: 73,5 (total)
Fig. no. 1 Display unit BU-70
INSTALLATION I 1 Installation
1.1 Mounting height
To obtain maximum readability of the display, recommended mounting height

is 175 cm to the upper edge of the BU-70 display unit.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksther Autronica AS
c MOUNTING
1.2 Wall/bulkhead mounting
The BU-70 display unit is hinged to the upper edge of the rear plate. By
unscrewing the screw in the middle lower pan of the front panel, the unit can
be swung up, and the rear plate will be accessible.
Locking screw
BSR-70
board
Terminal
Cable inlets, consealed cabling
Cable inlets, open cabling
1
Hole for locking screw
Rear plate
Fig. no. 2 The BU-70 unit in open position.
60
I I 1
I
39
n
loo"
243.5
259,5
Fig .no. 3 B U-70 rear plate
1.2.1 Mounting by open cabling
A: Mark and drill holes for the four fastening screws (and plugs if needed).
B: Partly fasten the two upper screws.
BU70/H05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirks*ther Autronica AS
C: Fix the BU-70 unit on the two upper screws. Level the unit. Fasten
the two tower screws. Tighten all four screws.
D: Feed the cables through the left hand side cable inlet at the bottom of
the rear plate. See fig. no. 2. Use the right hand side cable outlet when
more BU-70 units are to be connected.
1.2.2 Mounting by consealed cabling
A: Mark and drill holes for screws (and plugs if needed). Position the cable
hole in the rear plate over the connection box in the wall (if present).
See fig. no. 3.
B: Feed the cables through the cable inlets in the rear plate. See fig. no. 3.
When more BU-units are to be connected, use the same cable inlet for
these cables.
C: Fix the BU-70 display unit on the two upper screws. Level the unit.
Fasten the two lower screws. Tighten all four screws.
1.3 Flush mounting
13.1 Cut-out for mounting in a wall
Necessary free depth: 30 mm
229.5
Fig. no. 4 Cut-out dimensions
1.3.2 Mounting
A: Feed the cables through the inlets on the rear plate. When more BU-units
are to be connected, use the same inlet.
B: Set the BU-unit into the wall.
C: Mark and drill holes for screws (and plugs if needed).
D: Tighten all four screws.
BU70/H05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscthcr Autronica AS
CONNECTIONS! 1.4 Connections

1.4.1 Connection of one BU-70 display unit
Adjust the cable ends* dismantle the cables and connect the cables.
CLR-
Current
CLR+ <S>2
loop 20 mA
from fire S>3 IS)
alarm $4
To the
control CLT- <S>5 BSR-70
panel CLT+ board.
$7
From fire $8
alarm control
24V (S>9
panel or an
external 0V (S)
power.
.Terminal located on
the BU-70 rear plate.
Fig. no. 5 Connecting one BU-70 to the fire alarm control panel.
(See BS-JOO Installation handbook)
BU70/H05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksether Autronica AS
(MORE Bu-70fs J 1.4.2 Connecting multiple BU-70 display units.
Adjust the cable ends, dismantle the cables and connect the cables
Passive transmitter, passive receiver.

See BS-100 installation handbook.
BU-70 unit no. 1

Rear plate
Current loop
CLR- f i CLT +
0V CLT-
20 mA from *f
(%.
the fire f
CLT- o\ CLR+
alarm
0V CLR-
control 7
panel 9)
V
%
9 24V DC
<b 10 0V
L
BlJ-7(
r~
Rear plate
CLT +
CLT-
1
ff\<o
f9\ CLR+
CLR-
f9\
1C
$^ 109 24VDC
0V
]L
111
111
BU-70 unit no. n
Rear]plate
ta
v)to I
2
CLT +
CLT-
3
C 4
<^>*4>
i CLR+
The BU-units can be 6 0-R-
powered from the fire Q) 7
alarm control panel or C Q> 8
9 24V DC
locally (24V DC) 10 0V
i I
Fig. no. 6. Connecting multiple BU-70's to afire alarm control panel
BU70/Q4,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther Autronica AS
1.43 Earthing
Autronica does not have any special requirements for earthing the electronics
and the chassis in the BU-70 display unit.
2 Commissioning
2.1 Pre-commissioning check
A: Check that the power connector is disconnected. See fig. no. 5 for location.
B: Check for correct connection of the field cables according to par. 1.4
Connections.
2.2 Setting of switch SI on the BSR-70 circuit board.

Setting of switches must be carried out with the power connector disconnected.
Do not use pencil when operating the switch!
Particles from the pencil can come into the switch and cause problems difficult
to locate.
Location and setting of the SI switch is shown in fig. no. 7.
The switch controls the following functions:
- Addressing of the BU-70. The display units are addressed in increasing

order (0-47,48-62 not in use).
- Selection of baud rate, 1200 or 9600 baud.
All BU-70 units being connected to the same control panel must be set to the
same baud rate.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksrthcr Autronica AS
BSR-70
circuit board
side A
Switch SI
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OPEN OFF
Elements 3-8: Give address to the BU-70.
Unit no. (address) Element no.: (value)

3(32) 4(16) 5(8) 6(4) 7(2) 8(1)
1 (address 00) ON ON ON ON ON ON
2 (address 01) ON ON ON ON ON OFF
3 (address 02) ON ON ON ON OFF ON
4 (address 03) ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
5 (address 04) ON ON ON OFF ON ON
6 (address 05) ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
7 (address 06) ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
8 (address 07) ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
9 (address 08) ON ON OFF ON ON ON
10 (address 09) ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
*
*
48 (address 47) OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
TEST (address 63) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Element 2: Communication baud rate selection

ON = 1200 baud (standard), OFF = 9600 baud.
Element 1: Not in use, ON or OFF.
Fig. 7 Setting of switch SI

In the example, the address is 00 and the baud rate is 1200 baud)
2.3 Self test

A self test of the BU-70 can be performed before the unit is connected to the
current loop.
A: Check that the power connector is disconnected. See fig. no. 5.
B: Set switch SI on the BU-70 panel to address 63. See fig. no. 7.
C: Connect the power connector. See fig. no. 5. (Please observe that the power
connector is correctly connected).
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.KirksBther Autronica AS
The BU-70 will now perform a self test:
1: FIRE lamp (red)

flashes.
3: MORE ALARMS
lamp (red) gives steady
light.
2: PREW ARMING lamp

(amber) gives steady
light.
9SS. JHtMCE UZZEH
4: FAULT lamp
JtEAUUL.
(amber) flashes.
5: POWER lamp (green)

flashes. 6: Internal buzzer is
activated.
7: Text information is
displayed.
Fig .no. 8 Self test, front panel indications.
Following message is displayed:
S1200 a63 (C) 90 AUT_e88

X Cursor
After 1 minute following message is displayed:
S1200 363 (C) 90 AUTJJ83
D: Testing the operating buttons.

Press the "SILENCE BUZZER" button. The internal buzzer will now stop
sounding.
Push the "MORE ALARMS" button. A period/dot (".") appears above the
cursor.
The self test is terminated by disconnecting the power connector, and

correct address is set on the SI switch. See fig. no. 7.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirks*uier 10 Autronica AS
2.4 Configuration of the fire alarm control panel.

Refer to the documentation for the fire alarm control panel controlling the BU-
70 display unit.
2.5 Connection of power

A: Check that correct address is set on the BU-70 display unit. See fig. no. 7.
B: Check correct communication baud rate. See fig. no. 7.
C: Connect the current loop connector. See fig. no. 5.
D: Connect the power connector. See fig, no. 5. Be sure to connect correctly.
The BU-70 will now display the following message:
SSSS is factory set communication baud rate (1200 or 9600 baud). AA is the
BU-70 address (0-47). (C) 90 AUT is the program version. The message will
disappear after 5 sec.
If any error messages are displayed, see to par. 2.7 for further informations.
2.6 Communication test and BU-70 hardware test (indicator test)

When the BU-70 display units are connected to the fire alarm control panel,
and the display units and the control panel are configurated, the BU-70 is tested
from the fire alarm control panel. See relevant handbook for the fire alarm
control panel.
FIRE
TS1LNCE BUZZER
PREWARNMG
The test button is located under the logo.

When the test is initiated from the fire alarm
control panel, press the button and the lamps
will be lighting and characters will be rolling
over the display.
Fig. no. 9 Location of test button on the BU-70 front
BU70/H05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther 11 Autronica AS
Characters will be appearing in the display and the indicators will be lighting
as long as the test button located under the logo is pressed. When the button is
released, the text will be disappearing and the indicators will go out See fig.
no. 9. When the test is finished, the BU-70 is going back to the mode it was in
before the test started.
Error messages given during the test are described in par. 2.7.
2.7 Error messages

If a fault occurs on the communication between the BU-70 display unit and the
fire alarm control panel, the BU-70 will be displaying error message e83 after
one minute.
Error message 083 can be caused by:

- different communication baud rate between the fire alarm control panel and
the BU unit.
- wrong number of BU units configured on the fire alarm control panel.
- The current loop cables are not correct connected to the connector.
The current in the current loop should always be 20 mA (+/- 2 mA). If the
current is too low, this can be caused by to many BU units connected to the
current loop.
Other error messages given in the display, not disappearing when pressing the
"RESET* button on the fire alarm control panel (see par. 3.6) is caused by
other faults in the BU-70. In such case the BU-70 must be replaced.
BU70/04,05t06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther 12 Autronica AS
3 Operating instructions
c OPERATION
J 3.1 Front panel
The BU-70 front panel has an integrated alphanumeric display, lamps and
operating buttons.
Text display
FIRE (information window)
lamp (red) flashes at an
fire alarm condition.
MORE ALARMS
lamp (red) gives steady
light at more alarms.
By pressing the button at
the right hand side of the
lamp, the alarms are
presented in the display.
MORE ALARMS >! I IISILENCE BUZZER
PHEWABNING
PREW ARMING
lamp (amber) flashes when POWER
a prewaming condition is
present.
FAULT
lamp (amber) flashes when a
faulty situation is present.
POWER SILENCE BUZZER

lamp (green) lights when operating button stops the
24 V DC is connected. internal buzzer.
Fig.no. 10 The BU-70 front panel.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksether 13 Autronica AS
3.2 Prewarning
(PREWARNING 3.2.1 Front panel indications at "PREWARNING'
1: The amber 2: The text display 3: The internal buzzer

PREWARNING lamp indicates the addrcss(es) in is activated.
flashes. alarm.
MOftE ALARMS >LJ I ISILENCE BUZZER

^PREWARNING
FAULT
POWER
Fig. no. 11 Prewarning, BU-70 front panel indications,
Display message example:
PW1 ADDRESS NO: 034

INVESTIGATE LOCATION
When more prewarnings are given, the display shows the number of
prewarnings registered by the fire alarm control panel.
PW 1 ADDRESS NO: 034

3 PREWARNINGS REGISTERED
3.2.2 Actions to hg taken at "PREWARNTNfi"
A: Follow local fire instructions as in case of fire.

B: Press the "SILENCE BUZZER" button if the buzzer is not reset from the
fire alarm panel.
The prewarning indicator will give steady light after the "SILENCE
SOUNDERS" is pressed at the fire alarm control panel. The indicator will go
out when the "RESET" button is pressed from the fire alarm control panel. See
par. 3.6.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirkscther 14 Autronica AS
FIRE 3.3 Fire
33.1 Front panel indications at "FIRE'
1:F1RE
lamp (red) flashes.
UOREAUHMSHWl I ISIlfNCE BUZZER
2: PREWARNING FAULT
lamp (amber) flashes (at POWER
prewarning condition).
3: The text display will

be identifying the
detector(s) in alarm.
4: The internal buzzer

will be activated.
Fig. no. 12 Fire, BU-70 front panel indications.
Display message (upper line) example:
AL1 ADDRESS NO.: 0345
If the "MORE ALARMS" indicator is lighting, see par. 3.4.
3.3.2 Actions to he taken at "FIRE"
A: Follow local fire instructions.

B: Press the "SILENCE BUZZER" button, if this is not already reset from
the fire alarm control panel.
The fire lamp will give a steady light when the "SILENCE SOUNDERS"
button is pressed at the fire alarm control panel. When the "RESET" button is
pressed at the fire alarm control panel, the red fire lamp will be switched off,
See par. 3.6.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksjcthcr 15 Autronica AS
CMORE ALARMSJ 3.4 More alarms

3.4.1 Front panel indiratiniis nf "MORE ALARMS":
1: FIRE lamp (red)

flashes.
3: MORE ALARMS
lamp (red) gives
steady light.
MORE ALARMS >M I TSILENCE BUZZER
2: PREW ARMING lamp

FAULT
(amber) flashes.
POWER
4: The upper line in

the display will
indicate the location
on the first alarm
given. The bottom line
indicates the location
of the last alarm. 5: Internal buzzer
is activated.
Fig. no. 13 More alarms, BU-70 front panel indications
Display message example when more than two detectors or a manual call point
gives alarm condition:
AL1 ADDRESS NO.034

AL 3 ADDRESS NO.: 002
.1.4.2 Actions to he taken at "MORE ALARMS";
Note: The first BU-70 being operated at "MORE ALARMS" condition takes
command, the "MORE ALARMS" function will be blocked at the other display
units connected to the same fire alarm control panel.
The fire alarm control panel can always be operated independent of this
function.
1: Press "MORE ALARMS"

2: Press "SILENCE BUZZER" if this is not already silenced from the fire
alarm control panel.
The upper display line will always indicate the first alarm occured.
The lower display line will indicate the other alarms one after the other in
sequence when pressing the "MORE ALARMS" button.
(After 1 minute the lower line will indicate the last alarm occured).
"MORE ALARMS" indicator will give steady light when "SILENCE

SOUNDERS" is pressed at the fire alarm control panel and will turn off when
the "RESET" button is pressed at the fire alarm control panel. See par. 3.6.
BU70/H05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirks*ther 16 Autronica AS
c FAULT 3.5 Fault

3.5.1 Front panel indications at "FAULT" condition:
FIRE
MOREALARMSMI I SILENCE Bl
1: FAULT PBEWARNING
lamp (amber) flashes
POWER
2: Internal buzzer
will be activated.
Fig. no. 14 Fault, BU-70 front panel indications.
Information on what type of fault occured is not indicated in the display/This

information is only available by using the menu in the fire alarm control panel.
3.5.2 Actions to be taken at "FAULT" condition;
A: Press the "SILENCE BUZZER" button if the buzzer is not silenced from the
fire alarm control panel.
B: Contact authorized service personell.
The fault indicator will give steady light when the "SILENCE SOUNDERS"
button is operated from the fire alarm panel. The indicator will go out when the
"RESET" button is operated from the fire alarm control panel. See par. 3.6.
BU70/04,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksethcr 17 Autronica AS
3.6 The "SILENCE SOUNDER" and the "RESET" buttons at the

fire alarm control panel.
The "SILENCE SOUNDERS" button at the fire alarm control panel is used to
silence sounders and internal buzzers. The indicator at the BU-70 display unit
will give steady light.
After a message is handled, the "RESET" button at the fire alarm control panel
must be pressed. Following message appears at the BU-70 fire alarm control
panel:

WAIT...
The text will be present for approx. 60 sec. (The seconds are indicated by
counting up to 30 and counting back to 0, one dot per sec.)
If the system is in normal mode, following display message is given at the BU-
70 display:
Following message is displayed for 5 sec. before it disappears:
AUTRONICA FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

xx-xxx
xx-xxx is the Fire alarm control panel type the BU-70 display units are
connected to.
BU70/(M,05,06BE/PM4/210492/D.Kirksethcr 18 Autronica AS
Display unit BU-70
Display unit BU-70

Is a remote text presentation unit Contains a 2 x 40 characters text display
intended for connection to Autronica pinpointing detector(s) in alarm condition.
fire alarm control panel BS-100 DYFZ.
Internal buzzer operates at PREWARNING,
The communication between the dis- FIRE, MORE ALARMS and/or FAULT.
play unit and the fire alarm control
panel operates via an Autronica ASSP- Operating buttons for MORE ALARMS and
SILENCE BUZZER.
protocol (20 mA current loop).
The unit is often used in installations
where there is a need for distributed
information.
Informs the operator of the following

control panel conditions;
PREWATRNING, FIRE, MORE ALARMS,
FAULT and MAINS by means of indication
lights.
-a WHESSQE company Protecting environment, life and property

Display unit BU-70
FIRE
MORE ALARMS
PREWARNING
FAULT
POWER
Display unit BU-70

is a remote text presentation unit Contains a 2 x 40 characters text display
intended for connection to Autronica pinpointing detector(s) in alarm condition.
fire alarm control panel BS-100 DVFI. Internal buzzer operates at PREWARNING,
The communication between the dis- FIRE, MORE ALARMS and/or FAULT.
play unit and the fire alarm control
Operating buttons for MORE ALARMS and
panel operates via an Autronica ASSP- SILENCE BUZZER.
protocol (20 mA current loop).
The unit is often used in installations
where there is a need for distributed
information.
Features
Informs the operator of the following
control panel conditions;
PREWARNING, FIRE, MORE ALARMS,
FAULT and MAINS by means of indication
lights.
Q
1*5
<N
u
y
p
t-.
_j2:
-a WHESSOE ^pany Protecting environment, life and property
Teknical data: BU-70
Mechanical data:
Dimensions: H=135 mm, W=264 mm, D=76 mm

Weight: US kg
Mounting: On wall / bulkhead
Materials: Aluminium front with zintec plate connection house
Grade of protection: IP 22
Environment: Temperature: +5l'C to +40"C.
Relative humidity: Max. 90 %RH (non condensing)
Electrical data:
Power supply: 22 - 32 V DC from fire alarm control panel, or separate source.

Current consumption: Normal: 35 mA.
Alarm: 285 mA.
Connections: Communication:
4 wire 20 mA current line with galvanic separation.
Power connection:: 2 terminals for 24 V DC.
Number of BU-units
connected to BS-100: Max. 16 units.
Number of BU-units in
a current loop: Max. 10 units directly connected to control panel BS-100.
(without any current'line amplifier)
Recommended
current loop cable: 0,5 mm 2 4-core. Screended cable must be grounded in the fire alarm
control panel.
Max. cable length
(tour-retou r)be tween
fire alarm control panel
and the last BU-unit in
the current loop: 2000 m.
Approvals:
Approvals: The display is not a subject for approvals.
Your local dealer:

Autronica Offshore AS
Stavanger, Norway.
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60
Fax:+47 51 89 16 12

Oslo, Norway Watford, England.
Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, Phone: 0923 23 37 68
Fax: +47 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n Fax: 0923 22 55 77
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim Norway, Phone:+47 73 58 10 00, Fax: +47 73 91 93 00.
Teknical data: BU-70
Mechanical data:
Dimensions: H=135 mm, W=264 mm, D=76 mm
Weight: 1,25kg
Mounting: On wall / bulkhead
Materials: Aluminium front with zintec plate connection house
Grade of protection: IP 22
Environment: Temperature: +5C to +40C
Relative humidity: Max. 90 %RH (non condensing)
Electrical data:
Power supply: 22 - 32 V DC from fire alarm control panel, or separate source.

Current consumption: Normal: 35 mA.
Connections:
Alarm: 285 mA.
Communication:
4 wire 20 mA current line with galvanic separation.
o
Power connection- 2 terminals for 24 V DC.
Number of BU-units
connected to BS-100: Max. 16 units.
Number of BU-units in
a current loop: Max. 10 units directly connected to control panel BS-100.
(without any current line amplifier)
Recommended
current loop cable: 0,5 mm2 4-core. Screended cable must be grounded in the fire alarm
control panel.
Max. cable length
(tour-retour)between
fire alarm control panel
and the last BU-unit in
the current loop: 2000m.
Approvals:
Approvals: The display is not a subject for approvals.
/ Your local dealer: Autronica Offshore AS

Stavanger, Norway.
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60
Fax:+47 51 89 16 12

Oslo, Norway Watford, England.
Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, Phone: 0923 23 37 68 8c
Fax: +47 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n Fax: 0923 22 55 77
8
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim Norway, Phone:+47 73 58 10 00, Fax: +47 73 91 93 00.
Optisk rokdetektor
Optical smoke detector BH-31A
Analog, adresserbar / Analogue, addressable

Anvendelse: Application:
Punkt rokdetektor for deteksjon av rek som i Smoke detector for detection of combustion gases
hovedsak bestar av synlige (store) partikler. mainly consisting of visible (large) particles.
Detektoren pavirkes ikke av elektrisk utstraling The detector is not influenced of electrical radiance
fra mobiltelefon o.l. from mobile telephones etc. The standard version and
Standardutgaven og S-utgaven har innebygget S-version comprise a built-in alarm indicator (LED).
alarmindikator (LED). Principle:
Prinsipp: Measurement of reflected infra red light in a measuring
Maling av reflektert Lnfrar0dt lys i malekammer. chamber.
Versjoner: Versions:
BH-31A Standardutgave BH-3A Standard version
BH-31A /S Utgave med ekstra h0y f01somhet* BH-31A/S Version with extra high sensitivity."
BH-31A/ E\ EE \ib-utgave for bruk i sone 1 eller BH-31A/Ex EExib-version for use in zone I or
sone 2.* zone 2.*
BH-31A/S Ex EExib-utgave for sone 1 eller BH-31A/S/Ex EExib-version for use in zone 1 or
sone 2 med ekstra h0y folsomhet* sone 2 with extra high sensitivity.*
* Se eget datablad. * See separate data sheet.
X
CQ
(J
I
-a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and property ...
Tekniske data/Technical data: BH-31A
Bcstar av /Consists of. ' Dimensjoner og tilkobling /

Dimension* and connection:
Sokkcl /Socket (Base) BWA-40A/1
Detcktorhode /Detector head BHH-31A
Vekt I Weight 280 g
Matcriale /Materials Selvslukkcnde poly-

carbonat./
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Farvc / Colour Lys gra / Light grey
Folsomhct / Sensitivity Ace. to EN-54 part 7/9
Spenning / Voltage I4VDC 2 V
Stremforbruk ,'
Current consumption
a) hvilestrem / stand by 0,3 mA
b) signalstrem /signal 35mA
c) ekstem alarmindikator
ext. alarm indicator Max. 6 mA
Miljekrav /
Environmental reauirem. EN-54 part 7,
Bcskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP44D
Arbeidstempcratur /
Working temperature - 20C to + 70C
Fuktighct (ikke kond.) Max. 90 % R.H.

Humidity (non condensing)
Vedlikchold .' Stovrensing av kammer nar

I

Maintenance hoy folsomhet indikcres. /
Dust cleaning of chamber
when too high sensitivity is
indicated. DL Detektorhovedstoyfe Main detector loop.
Service / Service Utskiftes ved fell / X Kabehnnfering.ipenmomasjc/
Replace if faulty.. Cable inlets at open cabling.
Shsserfor kabel. innfelt montasje /
Sots for cable inlets flush mounting.
' Punki som ikke skal tilkobles / 5
Godkjenninger / Approvals: Terminal, not to be connected. i
Uigangfbreksternalarmindikering/
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals" -Appro/M-E. Output for external alarm indicator. *B
Pileoviscrdcn reining alarmindikaloren erhest synlig./
A
The arrow shows direction of optimal visibility of alarm
J indicator.
PtlLlaoriiodeterfcslollilsokkelenvedbaionctlfatning.
Vri mot urviseren for a lesne.
The detector bead is fastened to the socket by means of bayonet
lock. Tmaoti-clock wise to release.
local dealer:
Phone: 22 55 34 10, fax: 22 55 30 46.

Phone: 51 89 19 60, fax: 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: 22 55 34 10, T0nsberg: 33 38 37 97,
Gjevik: 61 17 30 30, Kristiansand 38 02 77 70,
Autronica Industrial Ltd. Watford, England.
Stavanger: 51 89 38 30, Bergen: 5? 28 30 91,
Harstad: 77 06 65 22-
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: 73 58 10 00, Fax: 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro ni
i
Optisk rokdetektor
Optical smoke detector BH-31A

Punkt rokdetektor for detuksjon av rok som i Smoke detector for detection of combustion gases
hovedsak bestir av synlige (store) partikler. mainly consisting of visible (large) particles.
Dctcktoren p^virkes ikke av elektrisk utstraling The detector is not influenced of electrical radiance
fra mobiltelefon o.l. from mobile telephones etc. The standard version and
Standardutgaven og S-utgaven har innebygget S-version comprise a built-in alarm indicator (LED).
alarmindikator (LED). Principle:
Prinsipp: Measurement of reflected infra redlight in a measuring
Maling av reflektert infrar0dt lys i malekammer, chamber.
Versjoner Versions:
BH-31A Standardutgave BH-3A Standard version
BH-31A/S L'tgave med ekstra hoy f01somhet* BH-31A/S Version with extra high sensitivity*
BH-31A/E\ EExib-utgave for bruk i sone 1 filer BH-31A/E* EExtb-version for use in zone 1 or
sone 2* zone 2*
BH-SlA/S/Ev EExib-utgave for aone 1 eller BH-31A/S/E* EExib-version for use in zone 1 or
stme 2 med ekstra hoy f01somhet.* sone 2 with extra high sensitivity.*

i :
IB : i
!!!!!
\vncssoRa.mpany Protecting en\ ironment. life and property ... -RlJTRDNICR-

Tekniske data/Technical data: BH-31A
Bestir av /Consists of. Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
Dimensions and connection:
Sokkel /Socket (Base) BWA-40A/1
Detektorhode /Detector head BHH-31A
Vekt /Weight 280 g
Materiale /Materials Selvslukkende poly-

carbonat./
Self extinguishing 145
polycarbonate
Farve / Colour Lys gra / Light grey
F01somhet / Sensitivity Ace. to EN-54 part 7/9
Spanning / Voltage 14V DC 2 V
Stramforbruk /
Current consumption
a) hvilestram / stand by 0,3mA
b) signalstr0m /signal 35 mA
c) ekstern alarmindikator/
Milj0krav /
Environmental requirem. EN-54 part 7,
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP44D I
Arbeidstemperatur /
Fuktighet (ikke kond.)/ Max. 90 % R.H.

Vedlikehold / St0vrensing av kammer nar

Maintenance h0y f01somhet indikeres. /
Dust cleaning of chamber
indicated. DL Detektorhovedslefyfe Main detector loop.
Service / Service Utskiftes ved feil / X Kabelinnforing. apenmontasje/
Replace if faulty.. Cable inlets ai open cabling.
Y Shsser for kabel, innfelt montasje /
Shis for cable inlets flush mounting.
NC Punkt som ikke skal tilkobles /
Godkjenninger / Approvals: Terminal, not to be connected.
L'tgang for ekstern alarmindikering /
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals" -Appro/M-E. Output for external alarm indicator.
CO
LED Pilen viser den retning alarmindikatoren er best synlig./
The arrow shows direction of optimal visibility of alarm I
indicator.
Detektc-rhLxiererfestettilsokkelenvedbajonettfatmng.
Vn mo: mviseren for a 10sne.
The de:ec:cT head is fastened to the socket by means of bayonet
lock. Turn in::-dcckwise to release.
/ Y o u r local dealer:
Phone: 22 55 34 10, fax: 22 55 30 46.

Phone: 51 S^ 19 60, fax: 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: 22 55 34 10, Tensberg: 33 38 37 97,
Gj0vik: 61 17 30 30, Kristiansand: 38 02 77 70,
Stavanger: 51 89 38 30, Bergen: 55 28 30 91,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Harstad: 77 06 65 22.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Nonvay. Phone: 73 58 10 00, Fax: 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro n
,r r
^VW
SEEN FROM BELOW OPEN

CONNECTIONS
+teder
+core
SIDE VIEW
0122 Vekt/veipht : 0,29kg
i
Kapslingjprotection: IP 32
Materialeflnaterial: Selvslukkende polycarbonat
TT?
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
Apnes ed dreining mot urv/seren
To open: Tvist c.c. w.
2211.82
Rfkdetektor BH-30 Dim og tffkobl.

Smoke detector BH-30 Dim. and conn.
BH-31jjnd BH-31/EX <BH-J)21 &,
Tekniske data/Technical data: BJ-31
Bestar av /Consists of. Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
Sokkel /Socket (Base) : BWA-40A/1 Dimensions and connection:
Detektorhode /Detector head : BJH-31
Vekt/Weight : 290 g
Materiale /Materials : Selvslukkende poly-

carbonat./
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Farve / Colour : Lys gra / Light grey
Radioaktiv kilde /
Radioactive source : Am241, 0,
(33kBq)
F01somhet / Sensitivity : Ace. to EN-54 part 7/9
Spanning / Voltage : 14VDC + 2 V
Stramforbruk /
Current consumption
b) signalstrem /signal 35mA
Milj0krav /
Environmental requirem, EN-54 part 7
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP44D DL- DL
Arbeidstemperatur / NC


DL Detektorhovedslcyfe Main detector loop.
Maintenance h0y f01somhet indikeres. / X Kabelinnfering. ipen montasje / -o
Dust cleaning of chamber .. w..
Cable inlers at open cabling.
Sfisser for kabel. innfelt montasje /
s
indicated. 6
Slo :* for cable inlets flush mounting,
Service / Service Utskiftes ved fell / NC Pu-Jci >om ikke skal tilkobles /
Replace if faulty. T"ri~.nai. not to be connected.
L'tgang for ekstern alarmindikering /
Output tor external alarm indicator.
LED Pilen viser den retning alarmindikatoren er best synlig.
Godkjenninger / Approvals: 7~if JTOIV shows direction of optimal visibility of alarm
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals" Appro/M-E De:eccocs: er festet til sokkelen ved bajonettfatning.
FG-godkjenning nr.: D-266 89. . :>^ren for a 10sne.
; ^ kejd is fastened to the socket by means of
oc ^. ^::.~dock*vise to release.
Your local dealer:

Phone: - 4~ 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 4f.

Phone: -47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 lo 12.'
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, Tonsberg: ^47 33 38 37 97,
Gjevik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30,
Bergen: +47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: +47 77 06 65 22,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Kristiansand: +47 38 02 77 70.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 73 5810 00, Fax: + 47 73 9193 00, telex: 55 334 autro n |
lonerokdetektor
Ion chamber smoke detector BT-31
Analog, adresserbar I Analogue, addressable

Punkt rokdetektor for deteksjon a v forbrennings- Smoke detector for detection of combustion gases
gasser som i hovedsak avgir sma partikler. ma inly transmitting small particles. The standard
Standardutgavenharinnebyggetalarmindikator version comprises a built-in alarm indicator (LED).
(LED).
Prinsipp: Principle:
lonisasjonskammer med lavintensiv radioaktiv lonization chamber having a low level radioactive
kilde. source.
Versjoner. Versions:
BJ-31 Standardutgave BJ-31 Standard version
Bj-31 / Ex EExib-utgaveforbrukisoneleller BJ-311 Ex EExib-version for use in zone 1 or
sone 2.* zone 2*
* Se eget datablad * See separate data sheet.
k.
-a WHESSOECompany Protecting environment, life and property . . .

Varmedetektor
Heat detector BE-30
Anvendelse: Ajrplicaton:
Punkt varmedetektor for bruk i torre rom. De- Heat detector intended for use in dry areas. The
^ tektoren gir alarm ved oppnSdd alarm-tempe-
ratur, 56"C.
detector gives alarm when reaching a fixed alarm
limit, 56 C.
Benyttes ofte i omrader der rakdetektorer ikkc Often used in areas ivhere smoke detectors are not to
er egnet pga faren for falske alarmer. Standard- be used due to the false alarm problem. The standard
utgaven bar innebygget alarmindikator (LED). version comprises a built-in alarm indicator (LED).
Tempera turmiling ved hjelp av termistorfoler. Temperature measurement by means of a thermistor.
BE-30 Standaidutgave BE-30 Standard version
BE-30/Ex EExib-utgaveforbruk i sone 1 eller BE-30-Ex EExib-version for use in zone 1 or
sonei* zone 2*

mmmmmmm

-a WHESSOEcompany Protecting environment, life and property . . .
fle JrTs-::' '".-ad is fastened to the socket by means of bay-one:
.-<. Tir"* j:.--^/ocAwwe to release.
tutrerica Marine, Oslo, Norway. g

'hone - 4" 22 55 34 10, fax: + 47 22 55 3-0 46. 8 .'
:
$' .-
'tn ..
tiitronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway g
'hone: - 4~ 51 89 19 60, fax: + 47 51 S9 16 12. f
3
oitronica Industrial Ltd. Watford England. g C
h
hone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77. A
} <a
J '-^ : : - . -
e: + 47 73 58 10 00, Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00.

1\ I
J
^ <
Tekniske data/Technical data: BE-30
Bestar av /Consists of: Dimensjoner og tilkobling /

Detektorhode /Detector head : BEH-30
Vekt /Weight : 280 g

carbonat./
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
F01somhet / Sensitivity : Klasse 1 /Grade 1

iflg. lace, to
EN-54 part 5
Spanning / Voltage : 14 VDC 2 V
Stremforbruk /
Current consumption
a) hvilestram / stand by 0,1 mA
b) signalstram /signal 35mA
c) ekstern alarmindikator /
Miljekrav /
Environm.requirem. EN-54 part 5

Beskyttelsesgrad /
I
Arbeidstemperatur /
Working temperature - 20C to + 40C DL
DL-
Fuktighet (ikke kond.) Max. 90 % R.H.
Humidity (non condensing]
I
Vedlikehold / : St0vfjerning / Dust cleaning.
Maintenance
Service / Service : Utskifting ved feil /

Replace if faulty. DL Detektorhovedsl0yfe / Main detector loop.
X Kabelinnf0ring,apenmontasje/
Cable inlets at open cabling.
Y Slisserforkabel, innfeltmontasje/
Slots for cable inlets flush mounting.
Godkjenninger / Approvals:
NC Punkt som ikke skal tilkobles /
Terminal, not to be connected.
See Autronica document "Type Approvals" Appro/M-E 5T Utgang for ekstern alarmindikering
FG-godkjenning nr.: D-147 85. Output for external alarm indicator.
LED Pilen viserdenretning alarmindikatoren erbest
synlig.
The arrow shows direction of optimal visibility
of alarm indicator.
Detektorhodet er festet ti 1 sokkelen ved bajonettfatning.
Vri mot urviseren for a losne.
a
T3
The detector head i$ fastened to the socket by means of bayonet
lock. Turn anti-clockwise to release.
Your local dealer:

Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: + 47 22 55 30 46.

Phone: + 47 51 89 19 60, fax: + 47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: 22 55 34 10, T0nsberg: 33 38 37 97,
Gj0vik: 61 17 30 30, Kristiansand: 38 02 77 70,
Stavanger: 51 89 38 30, Bergen: 5528 30 91,
Harstad: 77 06 65 22.
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00.

Tekniske daia/Technical data: BJ-31
Bestar av /Consists of. Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
Detektorhode /Detector head : BJH-31
Vek\ I Weight : 290 g

carbonat./
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Radioaktiv kilde /
Radioactive source : Am241,0,9uCi
(33kBq)
F01somhet / Sensitivity : Ace. to EN-54 part 7/9
Spenning / Voltage : 14VDC 2 V
Stramforbruk /
Current consumption
b) signalstrom /signal 35mA
Milj0krav / 1
Environmental requirem. EN-54 part 7 I
IbO
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP44D DL- DL
Arbeidstemperatur /

Vedlikehold / St0vrensing av kammer nar DL Detektorhovedsl0yfe / Main detector loop. -e,Q

Maintenance h0y f01somhet indikeres. / X Kabelinnforing, apen montasje /
Dust cleaning of chamber Cable inlets at open cabling.
when too high sensitivity is Y Slisser for kabel, innfelt montasje /
indicated. Slots for cable inlets flush mounting.
Service / Service Utskiftes ved fell / NC Punkt som ikke skal tilkobles /
Replace if faulty. Terminal, not to be connected.
5T Utgang for ekstern alarmindikering /
Output for external alarm indicator.
LED Pilen viser den reining alarmindikatoren er best synlig./
Godkjenninger / Approvals: The arrow shows direction of optimal visibility of alarm
indicator.
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals" Appro/M-E Detektorhodet er festet til sokkelen ved bajonettfatning.
FG-godkjenning nr.: D-266 / 89. Vri mot urviseren for a 10sne.
The detector head is fastened to the socket by means ofbajonet
lock. Turn anti-clockwise to release.
Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.

Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, Tonsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gjevik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30,
Bergen: +47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: +47 77 06 65 22,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 73 5810 00, Fax: + 47 73 9193 00, telex: 55 334 autro n j
f
bpeCiliCalions $ub|?ci to change wiitioul nuhce
BELOW
r r Socket seen open
Sokkel sett open
r
CONNKJIQHS -core
-leder
Output cable
' Ut
-core
-leder
Input cable
Inn
core
+ leder'.
,r</,^ -
Weight/Vekt : 0,29kg
Protection / Kapsling: IP 32
Material / Ma teriale : Self extinguishing polycarbonate
Selvslukkende polycarbonat
To open: Twist c.c.w.

Apnes /drelning mot urviseren
\
,\ ] '" 2211.82
Do.n / Own
j&
Trc Sc*l
-^-HuTRDNICff+p
3
}
Checked Spec Com ^ Approved /? ^f
\* *J E3 ^ NOD WAY
I? v5 BJ-30 smoke detector, dim. / connection

Hep) lor flepl by
s
* * rokdetetektor, dim. / tilkobling Owg no
^^ 2 BJ-31 and BJ-31/EX
<v

*
y II
* .. *^

&
Uj
OS Q
I
V
-^-^ Uj
L^JS
*"1
*. S
.* c
..
Connections for socket type BWA-40A/1
The figures show one of more ways to insert cables into the socket There are 8 weakenings available for
cable inlet At flush mounting the wires are entering the socket via slots in the sockets circumference.
Note! Ensure that all terminal screws are firmly tightened.
The socket must be mounted to a plane surface. The internal alarm indicator of the detector should be
easily spotted from the entrance door. Arrow marked LED shows the direction from where the alarm
indicator is visible.
Standard spacing between fitting holes is 60 mm.(Use screw DIN 96-3.5XL-ST) - Optional spacing
between fitting holes is 35 - 50 mm.(Use screw DIN 96 4.5XL-ST)
The total resistance of the detector loop must not exceed 30ft, that is 15ft in each conductor.
f LED
Fig. 1 For addressable detectors.
Used with panels series BS- only.
Terminal marked 6 must not be connected for

addressable detectors.
Addressing of the detectors is independent of the
next socket, separat description follows the detector
detector heads.
Optional, external alarm indicator
Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Connection of short circuit Isolator.

Connection of socket containing BKH-
30 or BKA-30 is shown in fig. 2.
Important!
For socket containing both BKA-30
and detector head, the contact spring
on terminal 6 has to be bent up and
towards the terminal screw by means
of a pair of pliers in order to avoid
contact to detector head. See fig. 3.
Detector head mounted in the same
socket will be the last address before
the short circuit isolator.
Socket containing BKA-30 should be
labelled with E-2051 (BKA-30 inside).
For non - addressable detectors.

Used with control panels^ssfles BV- and BX- only
End load is toe-rr!6unted between terminal 4 and

teiminaUxirflhe last socket on the detector loop.
BWA40A1/CAX/PM4/GKA/100294
DETAIL D DETAIL A
DETAIL E
DETAIL C DETAIL B
122
115
142
B.5 . 8.5
DETAIL A,B,C,D
19
WEAKNING PROFILES
7 5
DETAIL E
36
08.5
60
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale AUTRONICA A/S

15-02-90 a o a a a
N-7005 Trondheim
Checked Spec Cont Approv
pproved
aaaaoa
Autronica
File ref.
D14/BW/BWA-40
DIMENTIONAL DRAWING OF DETECTOR BASE
Rev.
BWA-40A/1 Dwg no.
BW-119
v_ Koding av detektorer med adressebrytere
sJHHBHHfiS
Coding of detectors with address switches IBS'Sll

S35S555
-RlJTRaNICR-
Detektorene er utstyrt med 7 adressebrytere merket med digitale verdier: 1, 2, 4,
8,o 16, 32, 64. Korrekt adresse fas ved a summere verdiene for de brytere som star
i APEN stilling. Apen stilling vil vaere nar bryterne er skjovet / vippet mot merket
verdi.
The detectors are equipped with 7 address switches marked with digital values: 1, 2,
4, 8, 76, 32, 64. Correct address is obtained by adding the values for the switches
in OPEN position. The switch is in open position when slided / tilted towards marked
value
Sett ovenfra / Top view Settf ra siden / side view
Skyvebrytere
V_, Sliding switches
Hflyynny: Dt
64 32 16 8 4 2 1 2
On
1
p off
nnyynny:
On
Off
Vippebrytere
Tilting switches b V.4
2 1
64 32 16 8 4 2 1
i.ukkcl Apen
Closed Open
(On) (Off)
BBBBBBB BBBBBBH BBBBBBB

Adr. Adr. Adr.
kode kode kodc
Addr. Addr. Addr.
v .ode 1 code code
x_^- 64 32 16 8 4 2 64 32 16 8 4 2 \ 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
01
t ttttI \\ 34
IIt t \ \
tk
67
\ t t t I\ \
02
t tt t t1 35
1\ t t t \ \ 68
\ t t |I\ \
03
I
I
t tt t t\ \ 36
I
I
it
\ t t 1\ \ 69
I
I
\ !t t 1\ 1
I I I
I I
I I I
^ 33 66 99
Fullstendig kodeliste folger pa baksiden

Complete code list on the back of this sheet
Adr.
kode
Addr.
code
&4 3 2
\
[5 ![ \ f\ Bl31
i6 4 2 1
Adr.
kode
Addr.
code
BBB BBB B
64 32 16 8 4 2 i
Adr.
kode
Addr.
rode
FIB!5t} BB B
64 32 1 6 8 4 2 1
01 Ak
4 1h i \
| I f 34
t f t t tJ t 67 ^ t 'f 'k i .
1' f
02 Ak
4^k ^ k i k
4 it 35
" Jt t i tJ
68 i t 't ' IF t
03 Ak
4k 4h t
4 iif 36
tit t irf t 69 ^ t 't *^[ v -
i
04
4 4kh i
I t t 37 " f t t vt f 70 i t t Î v ir t
05 4 4k i 1
t Ix 38
.1.1.1. t ^ 4 t 71 i t 't t k w 1F
i
06 \ ^k
^
h
t
ft 39
t i t vt-i 72 ^ t 't i r t t t
Ak Ak i
ii t t t v -t tt ^t \ A ,t ^ r t i
^tt
07 \
40 73 . ,
08 i k
\k 41
tit v i 74 i A k t" ^ F ^ 1 ' t
k
ti t i t -l5 ^ A t ir 11 ' i
1^ \1u
09 i k A 42 75
10 A k
1k
k d ft 43 v- 5
t t t irir t i 76 i tk t ir ^F
11
'
k
'k - '
44
tit t 77 i A t ir W i ,
i
12
1
k
1k 1h ir 45
t t inr t i 78 i A t ir v i F t
13 Ak ik
4h ' IF
i
46
1 I F i r T t 79 i t T r ^F 1 F
i
14
' k ik k
1 f 1 r t 47
.I. ' -t i
IF IF J 80 ^ ^ 1 > t t t
15 i k ik b
^ F ^ 48
t i ttt 81 T u
1h
k t |
J
16 i
r r i r \k t
i A F ^
t t 49 t ttti 82 ^ t ^ t ^ F t
17 i
h kk i r k t
4 A 50 A ,
^ ^Jt 83 i t t j A i ri
18 i
h k ir t
i A
F
k f
^
51 A
t t ii 84 i f A
t IF t
19 A
h k ir \ f i
A A 52 t t Jt t 85 ' r * k
\f V
11
i
20 A
hk k i r \k ^ r t
A A r^
t 53 t 11 i 1 86 ^ ' t '' IF V
21 A
k Ak
A ir A ir M A ,
Ti v t 87 ^r n A
IF v i
22 i ^ r A
\ 1F ^ '^
t 55 t i
t J IF 88 i' t 1r t t
23
24
Ak
A
f r-
Ak
A
^ r
1t
k ^ F ir i
t t t
56
57
f.'
t '
i.S
-.111
8!)
90
< ' t
^ ' t
^
r
r
"
|
t i
w t
^
25 A
t1
A r
t i ^L 58
t i.lr ^t 91 ^ ' t
^
r < i ir i
26 A ^t f 1
A r
t 'r t 59
t A ^ r I 92 i ' t ' 1r V
A
27 A
r 1A t f ,F i r 60 t r
M t 93 i' t ^
r v i t
k ^k 1
28 A A r ir- > ' 61 t i'T 94
1
'' t ^
r Vit
2!) A k A k
^
r TF 4 i r 62 " ir w ^t 95 r A ' 1 r v 1 i
30 1f 1r- 1r I F 1 63 IF ir I 96 ^ f ] F t f t t t
^
31
1f t lr 1 F' F i r 64 ^
^ t t t tjh 97 ^ f t 1i
' ^F t '
32
1h ^ r I
h
A
f t t t 65 ir t " It t t f 98
1
r ^F t - rk t V t
33 1h ^ r ik iL
t t v 66
" f t t fV t 99 ^ r \r A A
tVi
Autronica AS
N 7005 Trondhcim, Norway. Telephone +47 7 58 10 00, telefax: +47 7 91 93 00.
Oslo: +47 2 55 34 10, T0nsberg: +47 33 83 797, Gj0vik: +47 61 73 030,
Stavanger: +47453 1525, Bergen: +475283091,Harstad: +478266522.
St. Hansgt. 8, N-4013 Stavanger, Norway. Telephone: +47 4 89 19 60, telefax: +47 4 89 16 12.
Autronica Marine
Drammcnsveicn 126B, N 0277 Oslo, Norway. Telephone: +47 2 55 3410, telefax: +47 2 55 30 46
nu iKue KULNves uveiuutes or we euei pu CEnei IIKJLC uutyvês UL vu t t,y:iaynKe. nett in Kunsuiaujunsrciuiu irjer roiuonues.
^
o r 9,8 J>\
H
n
09C
7,85 ^ 2 8.1
aleronsesatte mil gjetden
TT
CDS CO
0.5x45
n
S)C
rsG
H
S
1
yT
4r*m***m^ '
1
Hi
S
. in
O
"S S3
J!05/ |
R1
*
;
(C -
01
M
0)
b
u, >si
R0.5
-V^L
W _-
24,5
a
CO
o 25,5
1
^--_ 0)
1
T r
3
0)
ce
CO
o
o
3
1 Merkeplate PC Lexan 940A
<N
O> Antpr, Pos,
nhet np, Novn,type,dlnv Standard Moteplate
O
oi OverfLbeK Kljnfii DDDDDDD A , , A/%

RAL7035 aaDanaa Autronica AS
-*- DBBBBDD nA n
)oto KonstryTegnet Tracet
Q)
08.03.91 B.F./K.J. 2,5:1 n5nn5nn ^"^^^ Trondheim
Kontpott r-jL/} Stand.kontpoU Codkjentxpx' r ^ ^ 0000000 Norway
^T -Spr -flUTRDNICfl-
'V. A , " i i A r /i t -i Erstatning
y f on Ertattet ovi
Adresse merkeplate for r0kmeldere
0)
Teganr. Rev.
Detectors adressmg plug _. , _- _ 1 A 1
< i BJ-309IAI
All rights reserved Specificotions subject to change without notice.
24
A 0001
Detector No..From 0001-1599
CENTRAL PANEL address A-G.
X=Blank
If panel address exceeds G, use labels with

blank field (x) to fill in letter for
corresponding address.
I
ORDERING CODE:
E-1940-A/0
SHEET No. 0-15

WHARE 0=Address 0001-0099
1= Address 0101-0199
etc.
PANEL address A-G (X)
ARTICLE No.
EXAMPLE:
ORDERING code for panel B series 1101-1199
is: E-1940-B/11
Date Dsgn/Dwn Troc Scale

16.10.91 B.F./K.J. 1:1 annoDDn Autronica AS
a* BSSSSoa P.O.Box 3010,
Checked Spec Ctrl. Approv
DD N-7002 Trondheim
o
naoaaan Norway
J9-
u
to
ADDRESS LABELS FOR DETECTORS flUTRQNIDR-
Rcf. Next
G;Bronn\01 \E-1940TE sheet
Dwg na Shno. Rev. -
E-1940 A|TE
Underlagsboks
Conduit box BWP-40B
L
Ved installasjon i utsatte omrader som maskinrom, On installations in rough areas like engine rooms,
verksteder, lagerrom o.l. gj0res tilkoblingene til de- work shops, store houses etc., the detector terminals
tektorene dryppsikre ved hjelp av underlagsboks are made drip-proof by using conduit box BWP-40B.
type BWP-40B. Underlagsboksen bar pakknippel- The conduit box has packtight cable entries.
innf0ringer. BWP-40B leveres standard mednippel Standard glands are of type skintop M20x 7.5.
type skintop M10 x 1.5.
Kun for detektorer som benytter sokkel To befitted with detectors types using socket
BWA-40A/1. BWA-40A/L
Utferelse: Versions:
BWP-40B : Standard BWP-40B :' Standard
::::::::::::;::::::::::
::::::::
iiiiiiii x
::: ::::: CQ
::: ::i:: U
- a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and property... -RUTRONICR-

Tekniske data/Technical data: BWP-40B
Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
Beskyttelsesgrad/ Dimensions and connection.
Degree of protection : IP44(IEC529)
Side view
Dimensjoner / Dimensions : 0126 x H46,8
Farge / Colour Lys gra / Light Grey
Materiale /Material Selvslukkende

polycarbonat/
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Beskyttelsesgrad/
Degree of protection IP 44 with detectors
mounted.
Vedlikehold I Maintenance: Ingen / None
Service /Service: Detektorer skiftes ved fell /

Replace if faulty.
Godkjenning /
Approval See Autronica document
"Type Approvals "Appro/M-E.
fX"| A 1
Nuts
! ^^f^ ^^f^ I
I
BWA-40A/1
Detector head
/'Your local dealer:

Phone: 22 55 34 10, fax: 22 55 30 46.

Phone: 51 89 19 60, fax: 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: 22 55 34 10, Tonsberg: 33 83 797,
Gjevik: 6117 30 30, Kristiansand: 38 02 77 70,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Harstad:77066522.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: 73 5810 00, Fax: 73 9193 00, telex: 55 334 autro n
r-
ved Spedficottoru subject lo change oilhout notice.-
r
ii t
rL(ri
f
)
~l r
r
1i J ii
T
Ei i3 -J
H~
1 -C i ij i JL J
Plastpose
Nippelmutter M20x1.5 Messing. 6531-006.0920
Nippel Skintop M20x1.5 Polyamid. 6571-011.1920
Montelklemme MFB 3x2.S 7340-011
Klebeskilt BWP-40B E-461/6 Vinyl
Sokkel nr.408116 grd BW-065 PC
Gjengebeskytter IL-4-203 Polyethylen. 633 3-016.0209
Ant.pr Pot.
enht nr. Novn.type.dim. Stqndord UoUrioU
bh. Kl. mOI
Autronlca AS
Doto Kontlr./Tcgnet Trocet MAItttokk
0309.92 JS. 1:1 N-7085 Trondhelm
Kontrolt Stand kontroll Co Norway
T:\BRAHH\BW\DWCSBW-1TS
ErstotnlnQ (or Erstottct av
BWP-40B
Tegn. nr. Rtv,
Sammensfilling
BW-175
.
~ r
CONDUIT BOX BWP-40A OR
CONDUIT BOX BWP-40B
DETECTOR ADRESSE LABEI
DETECTOR BASE BWA-40A/1
DETECTOR TYPE
BJ-31
BH-31
BE-30
BD-30
BK-30
AND OTHER
DETECTORHEAD TYPE
BJH-31
BHH-31
BEH-30
BDH-30
BKH-30
AND OTHER
anaaaaa
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale aaaaaao AUTRONICA A/S
15-02-90
an
2 jaa N-7005 Trondhelm
cc Checked Spec Cont Approved alaalao
aaaaaaa Norway
co Autronica
File ref.
24D14/BU/ASSY
ADDRESSEABLE DETECTORS AS IP 44
to Rev,
CM ASSAMBLEY DRAWING Dwg no.
CD
DETECTOR, BASE, CONDUIT BOX BU-4140 B
SIDE VIEW 150
110
BWP-40A GLANDS = PG 16
BWP - 40 B GLANDS = M 20
SEEN FROM BELOW

Weight : 0.55 kg
Protection : IP 44
DQDQQQO
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale aoooaao AUTRON1CA A/S
apMMOO
15-02-90 olaalao
alaaloo
N-7005 Trondhelm
Checked Spec Cont aiaalao
Norway
aaaaaaa
Autronica
File ret.
24 D14/BH//BH-31BWP
DIMENTIONAL DRAWING OF OPTIC SMOKE
Dwgno. Rev.
in
DETECTOR TYPE BH-31 WITH
CM
CD
CONDUIT BOX TYPE BWP-40A OR BWP-40B BH-048 B
SIDE VIEW 150
110
BWP-40A GLANDS = PG 16
BWP - 40 B GLANDS = M 20
SEEN FROM BELOW

Weight : 0.55kg
Protection : IP 44
OQDDDDO
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale OOOODOO AUTRONICA A/S
ammmmoa
15-02-90 a|aa|aa
Sl^Hoo N-7005 Trondheim
Checked Spec Cont Approve^ a a aIa o Mnnwau
aaaaaao WOiWay
Autronica
File ret.
24D14/BJ//BJ-31BWP
DIMENTIONAL DRAWING OF IONE SMOKE
Rev.
CJ
DETECTOR TYPE BJ-31 WITH Dwg no.
CD
CONDUIT BOX TYPE BWP-40A OR BWP-40B BJ-304 B
SIDE VIEW
150
110
BWP-40A GLANDS = PG 16 L
BWP-40B GLANDS * M20 _]
05,5
SEEN FROM BELOW
Weight : 0.55 kg
Protection: IP 44
OCDOODQ
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale ooaooon AUTRONICA A/S
15-02-90 aalaa
ooao
N-7005 Trondheim
Checked Spec Cont Approved o o a a a
aaaaaaa Norway
Autronica
File ref.
DIMENTIONAL DRAWING OF HfeAT DETECTOR 24D14/BE/BE-30BWP
TYPE BE-30 WITH
Dwg no. Rev.
CONDUIT BOX TYPE BWP-40A OR BWP-40B
CM
CO
BE-085 B
_
Adresse /tilpasningsenhet
Address I interface unit BN-33A
BRANNALARM
FIRE ALARM
TJIpasningsenhet
Interface unit
Adresse-/tilpasningsenhet som gj0r det mulig a Address/interface unit for connection of com'entiotial
koble konvensjonelle r0k- og flammedetektorer smoke and flame detectors based on the current
baser! pa stramokingsprinsipp til et analogt, increase principle to an analogue, addressable fire
adresserbart brannalarmsystem. alarm system.
Prinsipp: Prinsiple:
Alle detcktorer kobles til en overva1 ket bis!0yfe og All detectors are connected to a monitored sub-loop
far den samme adressen som kodes pa adresse-/ and attain the same address as coded on the address/
tilpasningsenheten. interface unit.
BN-33A/24 Standardutgave for 24V bisloyfe. BN-33A/24 Standard version for 24V sub-loop.
BN-33A/18 Standardutgave for 18V bis!0yfe. BN-33A/W Standard version for 18V sub-loop.
BN-33A/14 Standardutgave for 14V bisloyfe. BN-33A/14 Standard version for 14V sub-loop.
BN-33A/24Z Spesialutgave i plastkapsling for BN-33A/24Z Special plastic housing version
tilkobling av detektorer i eksplo- for connection of detectors in
sjonsfarlige omrader, sone 1 eller hazardous areas zone I and zone 2*
sone 2*
See separate data sheet.
* Se eget datablad.
mmmm
i

-a WHESSOEcompany Protecting environment, life and property ... -RUTRQNICH-
Tekniske data/Technical data: BN-33A
Dimensjoner/ Dimensions : 157 x 122 x 70 mm
Dimensions and connection:
(HxBxD/HxWxD)
Veto /Weight : HOOg
Materiale / Materials : Silumin
Str0mforbruk hoveds!0yfe /
Current consumption main loop
a) hvilestr0m / stand by 0, 1 mA
b) signalstr0m /signal 35 mA (normal)
>45 mA (alarm) 157
143 i
Arbeidsspenning /
ffi
Working voltage 22 - 28 V DC
Str0mforbruk / Faatehull 6
Current consumption /Mounting hole 0
- _
Normal /normal 15 mA
Alarm / alarm Max. 75 mA
Spenning bis!0yfe /
Voltage sub-loop BN-33A/24: 24V DC
BN-33A/18: 18V DC
BN-33A/14: 14V DC
Melderlast bis!0yfe/
Detector load sub-loop Max. 6 mA
Alarmstr0m bis!0yfe /
Alarm current sub-loop Min. 25 mA
Belastning T-uttak /
Load T-output Max. 75 mA
Milj0 / environment IEC 144
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP 55
Arbeidstemperatur /
Working temperature -30C to + 70C
Fuktighet (Ikke kond.) /

Humidity (non condensing) Max. 90% R.H.
Kabelinnf0ring / Cable inlets 5 x PG-16
Vedlikehold /
Maintenance : Ingen /None
Tilkobling / Connections:
Service / Service : Utskifting ved feil/ BS-sl0yfe (1 + 2, 3 - 4) 24V DC (++.-)
Replace if faulty. Bisl0yfe 5 (-) og 6 (+). Bisl0yfe retur 7 og 8.
Styreutgang, T.
Godkjenning / Approvals: BS-hop(l + 2, 3 -4) 24V DC (++.--)
Sub-loop 5 (-) and 6 (+). Sub-loop return 7 and 8.
See Autronica document "Type Approvals" Appro/M-E Control output, T.
Your local dealer:

Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, T0nsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gjavik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30, Autronica Industrial Ltd. Watford, England.
Bergen: +47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: +47 77 06 65 22, Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Kristiansand: +47 38 02 7770 _j
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim,Norway. Phone:+47 73 58 10 00, Fax: +47 73 91 93 00,telex: 55 334 autro n
r r
HULIGHET FOR EKSTEftN LAMPS ELLER RELE WW5 SISL9fFERETUR. KOBLE TIL 7 OS BflKKE ENDEHOTSTAND)
OPTIONAL INDICATOR OR RELAY CONTROL IF SUBLOOP IS RETURNED. CONNECT TO 7 AND 8 tNO END LOAD
BISLtYFE
SUBLOOP
r-4 PCS GLANDS PG-16
Endemotstand
End load 123,5
L- 1 PC GLAND PG-16
PCB
'V
FESTEHUU *7
FASTENING HOLF 47
LENGTH OF SCREW MIN. 20am
PG16
*fc
<flb
f-i
$=: SUPPLY
HOVEDSLfYFE/MAIN LOOP A-(3) MAIN LOOP/HOVEDSL0YFE
Oerraat BN-20 tr sist* enhtt pJ BV/BX-tnktlslmyfe.

Kobtts tndelfdd BVY-20 mttom 2M og H-l
2.1. 87
If BN-20 is'ltst unit on BV/BX- itngi* loop.
Comet tnd to*i BVY-20 to 2tt md 4f-t.
.5.
flepl lor
Tilkoblinger/dimensjoner BN-33 og BN-20
Connections/ dimensions BN-33 and BN-20 Owg no
V A
IR - flammedetektor
IR - flame detector S610
Flammedetektor type S610 reagerer pa den Flame detector type S610 responds to the
infrarede delen av en flammes utstraling. infra red part of a flames radiation.
Detektoren er kun egnet til a detektere bran- The detector is only suitable to detect fires
ner med apen, fluktuerende flamme. having apparent, flickering flames.
Det er mulig a velge 4 forskjellige folsom- It is possible to choose from 4 different

heter ved hjelp av brytersetting i detekto- sensitivity levels by means of a sensitivity
ren. switch in the detector.
::
.
MM! ::::: sir. =:a SB;

..
-a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and property -RirrRDNicn-

Tekniske data/Technical data: S610
Komplett enhet bestar av /
Complete unit consisting of:
Underlagsboks / Mounting box ZS6
Sokkel / Socket (Base) ZAS6
Detektor / Detector S610
Dimensjoner / Dimensions 0= 136mm, H= 105mm
Vekt / Weight 950 g.
Kabelinnf0ring / Cable inlet PG-11
Beskyttelsesgrad / Protecting grade IP 43
Arbeidsspenning / Working voltage Maks. 24 V DC / Max. 24 V DC
Stramforbruk / Current consumption Normal : 0,15 mA
Alarm : 25 mA
Ekstern indikator / External indicator 6V/30mA
Omgivelsestemp. / Ambient temperature - 20C to + 70C
Tilkobling / connections:
F0RSTE DETECTOR / SISTE DETECTOR /
THE FIRST DETECTOR THE LAST DETECTOR
BN
( j
("TERMINALS INFLAME"! [""TERMINALS IN FLAME~~|
I TERMINALS IN BN-UNIT i DETECTOR S6 10 DETECTOR S6 10
-v ~ti-> -> 1 l/\ 1U
1 2 3 4 + + 5 6 1 i>=^Z) C5==<2) 0 " ' 0=^2
4
B+ t
'J PD
A|[ !1 1!
I
B+ A-
4
A 1 5 1 1 Bi
3 A
1
6 i1 1i
5 !
<_>
Q _
L- 1 1 1
|
1
' i SL ' SL >/'

^_ [_
o
24V DC SUPPLY
24V D C FORSYNINGER KAN V^RE FRA BRANNALARMSENTRALEN ELLER FRA 00

MLoui
g ENSE PARAT FORSYNING /

THE 24V DC SUPPLY TO BN-UNIT CAN BE SUPPLIED FROM THE FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM CENTRAL UNIT OR ANOTHER 24V DC SUPPLY.
8
BN = Tilpasningsenhet. For BS-system: BN-33/24. For BV-/BX-system : BN-20/24 /

= Interface unit. For BS-system: BN-33/24. For BV-/BX-system: BN-20/24.
ML = Hovedsl0yfe / Main loop.
SL = Bisl0yfe / Sub loop.
R = 2 Kohm ma plasseres som den siste komponent pa bis!0yfen, tvers over denne.
Dersom Cerberus flammedetektor er siste (eller eneste) I
3
detektor pa bis!0yfen, skal motstand R tilkobles punktene merket IB og 5. "o
En eller flere (maks. 30) flammedetektorer kan kobles til en bis!0yfe (adresse) ji
I
= 2 Kohm must be situated at the end of the sub loop, across this.
If Cerberus flame detector is the end detector on the sub loop, the resistor R shall
be connected between terminals marked IB and 5.
One or more (max. 30) flame detectors may be connected to a sub loop (address).
Your local dealer:

Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, T0nsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gjovik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30, Autronica Industrial Ltd. Watford, England.
VjCristiansand: +47 38 02 7770 ^
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim,Norway. Phone:+47 73 58 10 00, Fax: +47 73 91 93 00,telex: 55 334 autro n
r DETECTOR HEAD
5861-019
t SOCKET
J001
el 22
CONDUIT BOX
5861-019-0002
AT AREAS. COMPLEAT IR-FLAME Di
WITH CONDUIT BOX.
r
PG13.5
e90 PCI 3.5

et 25
el 35
m
[COVER FOR DETECTOR
[ WITOUT CONDUIT BOX.
IN USE ONLY WHEN
CONDUIT BOX IS I
rfv I ^ K t V I * NOT USED.
REMOVE BLACK
COVER OR CUT
LOCKS IN IT.
MATERIAL/COLOUR
DETECTOR HEAD: PLASTIC/WHITE
SOCKET: STEEL PLATE/SILVER COLOUR
CONDUIT BOX: ALIMINIUM/WHITE
DUMMY DETECTOR HEAD FOR SERVICE
USE OR AS COVER FOR THE DETECTOR SOCKET DURING
INSTAUTION PERIOD. TO BE REMOVED WHEN DETECTOR
HEAD IS INSTALED IN THE SOCKET. .
."'ani-n te<
I
Dimensionot sketch
N-7001 I
Nor..,
IR-FLAME CJETECIOH
Typt CERBERUS S610
BG-041
T
Rammenmetoer mrt Socket ZUS 6 Detecteur de flammes avec socle ZUS6 Flame detector with base ZUS 6
Fur hohe Anforderungen Pour exigences poussees High performance
Zwei Empftndlichfceitsstufen Deux degres de sensibillte Two sensitivity stages
Zwei Integratfonsstufen Deux niveaux ^'integration Two integration stages
Uberwachte Flache mil Blende Surface survetllee limitable par ecran Monitored area adjustable with
begrenzbar screen
Anwendung Application Application

Aufgrund seines Detektionsprinzipes Grace a son principe de detection, le The design principle of the S 610 flame
kann der Flammenmelder S610 einen detecteur de flammes S610 est en me- detector ensures that it can reliably de-
Fiammenbrand auch dann noch zuver- sure de reconnaftre de facon liable un tect the presence of flame even in rooms
Iftssig erkennen, wenn hohe Raume zu incendie a flammes vives memo dans with high ceilings and in premises where
uberwachen sind Oder infolge arbeitsbe- des locaux eleves ou si la fumee dega- due to the formation of smoke work pro-
dingter Rauchentwicklung Rauchmelder gee par des travaux exclut totalement ou cesses, smoke detectors alone are un-
allein nicht Oder nur beschrankt verwen- partiellement I'utilisation de detecteurs suitable, or only of limited effectiveness.
det werden konnen. Oer hochempfindli- de fumee. Ce detecteur tres sensible The highly sensitive detector reacts
che Melder reagiert schnell auf alle reagit rapidement lorsque des materiaux rapidly to all flaming fires in which car-
Flammenbrande mit kohlenstoffhaltigen contenant du carbone brulent en for- bonaceous materials are burnt, such as
Materialen wie z. B. Holz, Kunststoff, Al- mant des flammes, comme p. ex. le bois, wood, plastic, alcohol, petroleum pro-
kphol, Mineralolprodukte usw., indem les matieres plastiques, I'alcool et les ducts etc. A pyro-electric sensor evalu-
ein pyroelektrischer Sensor eine spezifi- produits petrotiers. Un capteur pyro- ates a specific wavelength of the hot car-
sche Weilenlange des heissen Kohlen- electrique exploite a cet effet une lon- bon dioxide emitted by flames.
dioxids der Fiamme auswertet. gueur d'onde specifique de I'anhydride
carbonique chaud de la flamme.
Ausfuhrung Execution Design
Der Melder besteht aus einem optischen Le detecteur se compose d'une partie The detector consists of an optical sec-
und einem elektronischen Teil. Ein py- optique et d'une partie electronique. Un tion and an electronic section. The opti-
roelektrischer Sensor und ein Infrarotfil- capteur pyro-electrique et un filtre d'in- cal section is made up of a pyroelectncal
ter bilden die sogenannte Optik. Mit frarouge constituent I'optique. Un ecran sensor and an infra-red filter. For special
einer aufsteckbaren Blende kann das permet d 'adapter I'angle de vue du de- applications, the surveillance angle of
Sichtfeld des Melders besonderen Uber- tecteur a des taches de surveillance par- the detector can be adapted by means of
wachungsaufgaben angepasst werden. ticulieres. a screen.
runktionsweise Mode de fonctionnement Operating Principle
Die auf den Sensor auftreffende Flam- Le rayonnement des flammes QUI atteint Flame radiation striking the sensor gen-
menstrahlung erzeugt ein etektnsches le capteur pyro-electrique produit un si- erates an electrical signal which is
Signal, welches von der Melderelektro- gnal electrique exploits par I electroni- evaluated by the detector electronics. If
lusgewertet wird. Wird ein definier- que du detecteur. Une fois une vateurde a defined threshold is exceeded for a
Schwellenwert wahrend einer be- seuil define depassee pendant un cer- specific period the detector signals an
aummten Zeit uberschntten, liefert der tain temps, le detecteur transmet un si- alarm to the control unit. In alarm condi-
Melder ein Alarmsignal an die Brand- gnal d'alarme a la centrale de detection- tion the detector response indicator
meldezentrate. Der Ansprechindikator incendie. A I 'etat d alarme s allume I 'in- lights up.
leuchtet auf. dicateur d action. The detector does not react to constant
Durch konstante Oder kurzfristig modu- Le detecteur ne peut etre trompe m par or transient modulated radiation within
lierte Storstrahlung im Bereich des des rayonnements parasites constants the flame spectrum, nor to deceptive
Flammenspektrums wird der Melder ou a modulation de courte duree dans la phenomena, the emission spectra of
ebensowenig getauscht wie durch Stor- plage du spectre des flammes, ni par which vary from that of flames.
grbssen. deren Emissionsspektren vom des grandeurs perturbatnces dont les
Flammenspektrum abweichen. spectres d 'emission devient de celui des
flammes.
Montage Montage Installation

Die Melder mussen derart montiert wer- Les detecteurs doivent etre monies de Detectors must be installed so that there
den. dass zwischen ihnen und der po- maniere a assurer autant que possible la is clear line of sight between them and
tentiellen Flammenstrahlung mbglichst portee de vue en direction du rayonne- potential sources of flame radiation.
Sichtverbindung besteht. Gruppenweise ment de flammes possibles. Rassem- Grouped in zones, they are connected to
zusammengefasst werden sie uber eine bles par groupes. Us sont relies a la cen- the control unit by twin wire. It is also
7 Mdrahtleitung mit der Zentrale ver- trale par une ligne a deux conducteurs. possible to connect a separate response
den. Der Anschluss eines separaten Un indicateur d'action separe peut etre indicator to the detector base.
isprechindikators ist am Socket aus- connecte au socle du detecteur. Available for different modes of installa-
fuhrbar.
Sont disponibles pour divers modes de tion:
verschiedene Montagearten sind er- montage: - various bases and accessories (see ca-
haltiich: ~ des socles et accessoires (seton feuille talogue sheet x447)
- entsprechende Socket und Zubehorteile de catalogue x447) - the mounting bracket MV1 (part no.
(vgl. Katalogblatt x447) - le dispositjf de montage MV1 (No. x447); this accessory is used to fix the
- die Montagevorrichtung MV1 (Art. art. 395 045); cet accessoire permet I 'in- detector at an angle of 45.
Nr. 395045); dieses Zubehor fixiert den clinaison de 45" du detecteur.
Melder mit einem Neigungswinkel von
45.
Abmessungen/D/mens/ons/Dimensions Spezifikationen/Spec/f/caf/ons/Specifications
Tension a mttManon 20 V-
Operehng voltage
nuncstroni
Counnt He rapos
Quiescent current
125 AnspreetHmnfindlichkM / integration je 2stufig urnectuUtbar
Sensitiiiae dt reaction /integration cnacune commnaole (2 oegns)
Response sensitivity /integration both two-stage (switcnable)
i Sichtwinket (rotatnnssynnmetriseh)
Angle do vu (rotatntomerH symetntjue) <140
,. .,1, Surverilance angle (circular surveiMance area)
Zulaastqe Umgetounqstemperatuf
u
V
1
! / i
Temperature amtuarrte admissible
PermtssMe ambient temperature
Luftfeuchtigkeil
Humtone Oe I air <95%
77 Humaity
Schutzan nacri (EC (Deckenmontage)
Mode 09 protection salon CEI IP 43 (monugt mt putona)
Protection category (IEC) (ceiling mounted)
Faroe
Contour Utnc
Colour
SS1O 2X7 K227b TectimacheAndeojngensowieUefef

KjtrtocyCatmtogue RegJSec, 1 mogtehkeiten vorbehaKen
ErsetzVRemotece/Superseoes x227a
01U
Infrarot - Flammenmelder
Technische Beschreibung
Detecteur de f lammes
a infrarouge
Description technique
Infra - red flame detector

Technical description
Dokument-Nr Document no MH1x 1.11.24.4b

Ausgabe/Edition 786
Ersetzt. Rempiace Superseaes MHix 1 11 24 4a
HanCbuch Manuel Manual MH1

Register, Reg;stre Section 1
HHlx 1.11.24,4b 1(2)
7.86
Katalogblatt
1. Grundsatzliches
2. Funktionsbeschreibung
3. Symbole und Bezeichnungen
4. Spezifikationen
5. Diagramme 4
5.1 Spektrale Empfindlichkeit 4
5.2 Richtungsempfindlichkeit 4
5.3 Einfluss der Distanz 4
5.4 Frequenzgang 4
5.5 Einfluss der Betriebsspannung 4
5.6 Einfluss der Umgebungstemperatur 4
6. Begrenzung der Ueberuachungsflache
Anhang (Bild 1...10) 1...6
Feuille de catalogue
Remarques de principe
Description du fonctionnement
Symboles et designations
Specifications
5. Diagrammes 10
5.1 Sensibilite spectrale 10
5.2 Sensibilite directionnelle 10
5.3 Influence de la distance 10
5.4 Reponse en frequence 10
5.5 Influence de la tension d'exploitation 10
5.6 Influence de la temperature ambiante 10
6. Limitation de la surface surveillee 11
Appendice (Fig. 1...10) 1...6
Ttcftmscrt* Anderungtn sow* t*ttrm6glichk*itn voroehiiitn Copyright by CERBERUS Lid.. CH-6708 Mtnnedorf
Sous r*urv at moOilieation* ttchniou> t at diponibiint
MHlx 1.11.24.4b II
7.66
Catalogue sheet
1. Basic principle 13
2. Operation 13
3. Symbols and definitions 14
4. Specifications 15
5. Diagrams 16
5.1 Spectral sensitivity 16
5.2 Influence of direction 16
5.3 Influence of distance 16
5.4 Frequency characteristic 16
5.5 Influence of operating voltage 16
5.6 Influence of ambient temperature 16
6. Limiting the area monitored 17
Appendix (Fig. 1...10) 1...6
TaOtniactt* Andamngan sow* LtotarmOgUcfifcattan vortwftaltan Cepyngnt by CERBERUS Ltd., CH-8708 Mannadorf
Sous raaaivt da modifications tachnlquaa at daa diaponibilita*
MHlx 1.11.24.4b 13
11.82
\
1. BASIC PRINCIPLE (Fig. 1 and 2)
Open flames send out electromagnetic radiation in the infrared wave-band modulated
by a typical flicker-frequency. The flame detector evaluates these characteristics
in order to be able to detect fire in its incipient stage while not being influ-
enced by deceptive phenomena such as flickering lamps and the reflection of light
on water.
Flame radiation strikes a pyroelectric converter which produces electrical signals.
2. OPERATION (Fig. 3)
2.1 Pyroelectric converter

The pyroelectric converter consists of a sensor and an optical filter and is only
responsive to infrared radiation wavelengths between 4.1 and 4.7 Aim.
2.2 Selective amplifier

The selective amplifier only accepts flicker frequencies between 3 Hz and 20 Hz.
Lower and higher frequencies such as the variation of ambient light, or artificial
light on a mains frequency are suppressed.
2.3 Rectifier
The amplified signal is passed to the threshold stage via the rectifier.
2.4 Threshold stage

The threshold stage actuates the timer circuit after the threshold value has been
exceeded.
2.5 Timer circuit

If the threshold value is exceeded within a certain time (selectable in two
stages), a bistable circuit is actuated.
2.6 Bistable circuit

The bistable circuit, which is non-conductive in its quiescent state, becomes con-
ductive via the timer circuit. The bistable circuit is self-holding and remains
conductive until the detector lead is briefly interrupted by resetting the alarm
in the control unit.
2.7 Sensitivity switch

By means of this switch we can change both response sensitivity and response delay
(two switch settings each).
Tchnisch Andirungen sow* Ufrmogtienktu*n vortochtntn Copyright by CERBERUS Ltd.. CH4708 Manneaort
Sous r*sarv tit modifications tvcnniou** ( 0s Oitoonibilit**
RHlx 1.11.24.4a 14
5.80
2.8 Response indicator (built into detector)

Once an alarm signal has been actuated, the response indicator lights up and con-
tinues to flash so that the detector which responded can be easily located.
2.9 Repeater response indicator

A second response indicator can be connected and mounted where required, cf. 2.8.
3.
Operating voltage Detector voltage at terminals 1 and 4
-max Maximum permissible operating Detector voltage at terminals 1 and 4

voltage
UH Hold-off voltage Minimum detector voltage in self-hold
condition
Alarm current Detector current in alarm condition
(mA)
max Maximum permissible alarm Detector current in alarm condition
current
IQ Quiescent current Detector current in quiescent con-
dition
Hold-off current Minimum detector current in self-hold
condition
Quiescent current Sensor current in quiescent condition
PA Alarm current Sensor current in alarm condition
EX,A Radiation intensity Change in radiation intensity for
alarm actuation (measured at the de-
tector) in microwatts per square
centimetre (AtW/cm2)
Radiant intensity Change in radiant intensity for alarm
actuation in watts per steradian
(W/sr), (Fire intensity)
Wavelength Spectral wavelength of flame radiation
in micrometers (/urn)
Tchniclt Andrung*n soww Copyright by CERBERUS Ltd, CH-8708 Mtniwdorl

Cm i. r*rv* rln mmlifiutinn* (rhnintii nt Hmu rtinnnihilrt*
MHlx 1.11.24.4a 15
5.80
Frequency Flicker frequency of flame radiation

in hertz (Hz)
a Angle Angle of incidence of radiation ()
d Distance Distance flame to detector in metres
(m)
Srel Sensitivity Sensitivity expressed as a percentage
of the maximum sensitivity (S)
Illumination Illumination of the surrounding area
in lux (Ix)
tfamb Ambient temperature Ambient temperature at the detector

in C
RL Line resistance Maximum permissible resistance of

detector lead
SENS . Sensitivity Sensitivity switch setting
4. SPECIFICATIONS
Max. permissible operating voltage 24 V

Alarm current to be limited at < 100 mA
Operating voltage 20. V
Quiescent current < 130 MA
Hold-off voltage 0.5...6 V
Hold-off current 30...100 AtA
Permissible ambient temperature -20C...+70C
Response indicator 6 V / 30 mA
Repeater response indicator lamp 1
Max. permissible line resistance RL 250*2
Protection category (IEC) IP 43 (Ceiling
mounted)
The detector is ready for operation approx. 60 s after the operating voltage is
applied.
Copyright by CERBERUS Ltd.. CH-6708 Minntdorf

MHlx 1.11.24.45 16
11.32
Sensitivity switch
Switch setting SENS 1 2 3 4
Typical response sensitivity at 700 K 50 50 10 10

and 8 Hz 0W/cm2) &vA
Response delay (s) ta 205 52 205 52
5. DIAGRAMS
Spectral sensitivity
In order to be able to distinguish between flames and other sources of radiation,
only the spectral range that is typical of flames from 4.1/n to 4.7/<m is util-
ized. This range not only includes gas radiation (C02) produced during combustion,
but also thermal radiation resulting from soot particles.
Fig. 4 shows the relative spectral sensitivity in relation to the wavelength of
the effective radiation.
5.2 Influence of direction (Fig. 5)

Detector geometry is such that maximum sensitivity is achieved when radiation
strikes the detector along its vertical axis (Srel = 1.0 = 100SJ). Sensitivity de-
creases as the angle of incidence a increases (See diagram). The surveillance angle
can be limited as required by fitting a screen to the detector (See section 6).
Influence of distance (Fig. 6)

"ig. 6 shows the relationship between the distance flame - detector and the radiant
.ntensity (size of fire) required to actuate an alarm according to the equation
5.4 Frequency characteristic (Fig. 7)

Fig. 7 shows the relationship between sensitivity and the flame flicker-frequency
for the various sensitivity switch (SENS) settings.
5.5 Influence of operating voltage (Fig. 8)

The diagram shows the relative change in sensitivity within the operating voltage
range.
^_^ Influence of ambient temperature (Fig. 9)

ig. 9 shows that within the permissible temperature range the variation in sensi-
vity is negligible.
T*ehnich An0run9n sowi* UftmOglieftkittn wxtwhctten
MHlx 1.11.24.4 17
5.80
LIMITING THE AREA MONITORED (Fig. 10)
The area monitored by the detector can be limited by attaching a screen. The four
examples below show the relationship between screen aperture and the area monitor-
ed.
Anhang/Appendice/Appendix
IIHlx. 1.11.24.4 6
5.80
P-IHH &H
'/Tip. 10 - Uebervachte Flache in Abhangigkeit des Blendenaussctmittes
- Surface surveilKe en fonction de 1'ouverture dans le diaphragrae
- Area monitored in relation to screen aperture
Copyrigni by CERBERUS Ud. CH470S MtnnMorf
MM r**fM o* mooiticaMont (ctimatiM ot aitooniMrtM
0u aod Mtian uOi*a 10 cnanot winaui notice/Suooiy cuDicct to umiittiMy
Anhang/Appendice/Appenc;,
MHlx 1.11.24.4*
U.B<
Srel
i
1.3-
1 1. \ ~~
****
S^r^l
**
16 1, 3 20 22 2 26
__ zul. Spannungsbereich ^
Bild/Fio. 8 - Eepfindlichkeit Sni in AbhSngigkeit der Betriebaapannung Ufi

- Seneibiliti Srel en fonetion de la tenaion d1exploitation UB
Relative senaitivity Sn in relation to operating voltage U
s
rel
1.4
11 .
Sre! = f fiâmb)
* ^MMMq
^^m .
V^M
i^Hi
"
"
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 45 50 60 70
7>amb(F]
0 14 20 40 60 80 100 1U 120 UO 158
Bi Id/Fig. 9 - Capfindlichkeit S rr j in Abhanqiokeit der Umqeounaatenperatur ^nnp

- Sensibility Sre^ en fonetion de la temperature aabiante
" Relative senaitivity Sre| in relation to ambient temperature
Cooynght Oy CERBERUS LM.. CH47M MVMWW

SUt f*f* B
OoU *) OMV< tuotKt 10 ehangt mmotK noiw*/Suooiy uOiet 10 MMMIMV
CERBERUS MHlx 1.11.24.4 4
5.80
200 -
500-
1000 -1 60
f
10 20 50 100 [Hz]
Bild/Fio. 7 - Cnpfindlichkeit E Ar,i in Abhanqigkeit der Flackerfrequenz f
- Sensibility E'-Arei en fonction de la frequence de vacillement f
- Sensitivity E Arci in relation to flicker-frequency f
Copyngnl oy CERBERUS Ufl.. CH4708 Mtrawoorf

Mt ot motfihcauons McnfHotMft *i en oisoonibdns
o dMifln ttioici to dung* wthout notitt'Suooiy uottct lo MOMy
Anhang/Appendi ce/Appendix
MHlx 1.11.24.4a 3
5.80
90
50
40
30 20 10 0' 10 20 30
Bild/Fio. 5 - Relative Enpfindlichkeit Snl in AbhSngigkeit des Auftreffwinkels a der riaamnstrahlung
( s 0 S Helderachse)
- Sensibilittf Srel relative en fonction de 1'angle d'iapact a du reyomeaent des flames
(a = 0 axe du dtftecteur)
Detector sensitivity Sî in relation to the angle of incidence a of flame radiation
(a * 0 detector axis)
"Arel
SENS 1u.2 SENS 3u.4
100
50
40
30
20
10
5
U
3
1
10x dre(
BiId/Fid. 6 - Relative Strahlstfirke I -Arc| in Abhingigkeit des Distanzverhaltnisses d re j
der"
Intensity relative I'-A-.i *J rayon en fonction de la distance d re j "flaane - dtftecteur"
- Radiant intensity J -Argi in relation to the relative distance "flame - detector" d re j
DMLitnfoohcnhtMiarMiuntn Copynom By CERBEMUS Ltd.. CH47M Mmwoof
0t MM Ot*i9fi lubftct to cntno* wimoifi nettct/Suoeiy w*ta to twootMy

HHlx 1.11.24.4a 2
5.80
5,5 I/jm]
Bild/FiQ. 4 - Melderempfindlichkeit Srei in Abhiingigkeit der Wellenlange X der Flaonenstrahlung

Sensibility Srei du ditecteur en fonction de la longueur d'ondes X du rayormement dea
flannes
- Detector sensitivity Srei in relation to the wavelength X of flame radiation
. CH47M MMHMOH
MHlx 1.11.24.4a
11.52
Bild/FiQ. 1 - Keine Strahlung auf den Senaor

- Aucun rayomement n*attaint le capteur
No radiation reaches the sensor
'PA
4>
M
^^^H MM
U u
4,
Bild/FiQ. 2 - Strahlung trifft auf den Sensor
Le rayomemant atteint le capteur
- Radiation reaches the senaor
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
6
j
t
2.91
JhU,
t
Meider j Socket Zentrole

Detecteur i4- Socle U Centrole
Detector | Base | Control Unit
Bild/FiQ. 3 - Blockschema des Helders
- Schema bloc du dtftecteur
- Block diagram
Ttcnmaw Anommotn HUM Lnlrmo8ticiiMMn vorMMltm Ceoynom by CERBERUS Ud- CM-S7M Mtwwaorl
Sou*raMnwo* moodicMiofw wcflmouo OM owaomMiiM
Oau M omin uei*a 10 cnang* wtnoui noiic*/Suopiy woi*et to mwtabiMy
Manuell melder
Manual call-point BF-35
,
Adresserbar / Addressable
Manuell melder for bruk i t0rre rom. Manual call-point for use in dry areas.
Gir alarm nar glasset knuses. Tilbakestilles nar Gives alarm when the glass is broken. Reset when a
nytt glass blir satt inn. Kan alarmtestes ved hjelp new glass is mounted. Can be tested by means of a
av en spesialn0kkel. special test-key.
BF-35 Standardutgave. BF-35 Standard version.
BF-35/Ex EEx ib-utgave for bruk i sone 1 eller BF-35/Ex EEx ib-version for use in zone 1 or
sone 2* zone 2*
* Se eget datablad. * Se separate data sheet.
-a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and property...

Tekniske daia/Technical data: BF-35
Dimensjoner / Dimensions: Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
( H x B x D ) / (HxWxD) 87 x 87 x 39 mm Dimensions and connection:
Vekt I Weight 108 g Apenmontasje
20 Open mounting
Materiale /Materials R0d termoplast / -H
Red thermo plastic
Spenning / Voltage 14V DC 2 V
Stramforbruk / Fig. 1
Current consumption
Hvilestr0m / Stand by 0,1 mA
Signalstram / Signal
Normal/ Normal 35mA
Alarm / Alarm >45mA
Milj0krav / Fig. 3
Environmental requirem. Iflg. BS-5839 /
Ace. to BS-5839. Cable knock-outs
010mm
Milj0 / Environment For bruk i t0rre rom /
For use in dry areas. Underlagsboks
Beskyttelsesgrad / Mounting box BFW-1
Skjultmontasje
Degree of protection IP 44D Flush mounting
Arbeidstemperatur /
Fuktighet (ikke kond.)/

Humidity (non condensing) Max. 95 % R.H.
/"Vedlikehold / : Bytt ut knust glass / Standard veggboks

Maintenance Standard box
Replace broken glass.
Service / Service : Utskiftes ved fell / T3

Replace if faulty. 1)
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals"-Appro/M-E
Fig. 1 Melder / Call -point

Fig. 2 Tilpasn. / adr. enhet type BNB-35 /
Interface / address unit type BNB-35.
Fig. 3 Underlagsboks type BFW-1 Mounting box type BFW-1.
Fig. 4 Veggboks / Box for flush mounting.
DL Detektorsleyfe Main detector loop.
Phone: +47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.

Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, Tonsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gj0vik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30,
Bergen: +47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: +47 77 06 65 22,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Kristiansand: +47 38 02 77 70 . i
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334
Manuell melder
Manual call-point BF-31
Adresserbar / Addressable
Manuell melder med tett kabelinnf0ring. Manual call-point with water tight cable inlets.
Gir alarm nar glasset knuses. Tilbakcstilles nar Gives alarm when the glass is broken. Reset when a
nytt glass blir satt inn. Kan alarmtestes ved hjelp new glass / mounted. Can be tested by means of a
av en spesialnokkel. special test-keif,
BF-31 Standardutgave. BF-31 Standard version.
-a WHtiSSOE company Protecting environment, life and property ... -RUTRDNICR-

Tekniske data/Technical data: BF-31
Dimensjoner / Dimensions: Dimensjoner og tilkobling /
(HxBxD)/(H 123 x 160x87 mm Dimensions and connection:
Vekt/Weight 1000 g 160
Materiale /Materials R0dfarget korrosjons-
beskyttet silumin /
Red corrosion proof
silumin.
Spanning / Voltage 14VDC12V 123
Stromforbruk /
Current consumption
a) hvilestram / stand by 0,1 mA
b) signalstram /signal 35 mA (normal)
> 45 mA (at alarm)
Milj0krav / INLET = PG 16
Environment requir. Iflg. BS-5839 /
Ace. to BS-5839
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Arbeidstemperatur /
\* - ~ 87

Kabelinnf0ring/CaWe inlets : 2xPG-16
r
Vedlikehold / : Normalt ingen /
Maintenance Normally none. SLOT FOR TEST KEY
Service /Service : Utskiftes ved feil /

Replace at faulty condition.
\.
See Autronica booklet "Type Approvals " - Appro/M-E
DL Detektorsl0yfe / Detector loop.
/^Your local dealer:

Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.

Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, T0nsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gjovik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30,
Bergen: +47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: +47 77 06 65 22,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro n
M.C.P. BF-31 FRONT VIEW
KNUS GLASSET
TRYKKHE HESS HERE
BREAK GLASS
FJirnraiicit
SIDE VIEW
SLOT FOR TEST KEY

GLANDS. PG 16
M.C.P. BASE DiMENTIONS INSIDE VIEW

160
8.5 143 8.5
PCB - BNK-31
2 HOLS 06
O
TERMINAL BLOCK

A-
DETECTOR LOOP A. B+ DETECTOR LOOP
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale ODOOO AUTRONICA A/S

15-02-90 OMMOO
G|OD|OQ
Sl^loo N-7005 Trondheim
Checked Spec Cont Approved
CO Daaauoa
r* Autronica
File ref.
D14/BF/BF31
CM
DIMENTION DRAWING OF MANUAL CALLPOINT
Rev.
< TYPE BF-31 Dwg no.
BF-137
erved. Specifications subject to chance without notice'
SIDE VIEW WITH MOUNTING FRONT PANEL FRONT PANEL OPEN MOUNTING
y
BOX BI-V\ -1 f FRONT .VEIW SIDE VIEW I MOUNTING BOX
WITHOUT MOUNTING BOX BFW-1
~i r ~^
i
LJ
TERMINALS
UJ
DO
O
Ct
O
u.
Ld
PRESS HERE 2xFASTEN/
0. HOLES FOR
10
FRONT PANEL
1 | fl UTRDNICR-
40 60 20 60.3
60 87
DETECTOR
CUT-OU1
LOOP OUT
Scale
11
nn N-7095 Trondheim
BF-35, MANUAL PUSH BUTTON Ne>t

Dimensions arc connections T \BPAW EFNDWGvEF-173 sheet
RF- 173!'
Technical Documentation
Fire Detectors
used in hazardous areas
Analogue Addressable system type BS-100

with zener barrier unit type BZ-32
Conventional system type BX-40

with zener barrier type BZ-20S
P-DET/Ex/RCE
Autronica AS
N-7005 Trondheim.
Phone: 447 73 58 10 00, fax: 447 73 91 93 00, telex: 55.334 autro n
_
Autronica Industrial Ltd., Watford, England ill iy| li!
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77. SJHSJSH
Autronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway ilii III
Phone: 447 51 89 19 60, fax: 447 51 89 16 12, telex: 73 763 autrs n 111 110111! 1111 ill
Autronica Marine, Oslo, Norway ^jp!m * j-j * &*
Phone: 447 22 55 34 10, fax: 447 22 55 30 46, telex: 76 274 amas n -HLJTRDNICH-
Technical Documentation: Fire Detectors used in hazardous areas
Table of contents:
Abbreviation, related to fire equipment in ex-area
1 General part 4
1.1 Danger of explosion 4
The triangle of explosion 5
1.2 Ex-classifications 6
1.3 Labelling electrical equipment 9
1.4 Limiting temperatures 10
1.5 Installing fire alarm equipment hi hazardous area 11
1.6 Installation of Autronica fire alarm systems in hazardous areas 11
1.7 Rules regarding potential equalization, PE, to fire detectors
hi hazardous areas 13
1.8 Potential equalizations: PE on ships 14
1.9 Installation data - 15
Limitations w.r.t capacitance in cable and detectors/call-points
connected to zener barrier type Z667/Ex
(part of zener barrier BZ-20/S and BZ-32)
2 Analogue addressable system type BS-100 16

2.1 Zener barrier unit type BZ-32 16
2.2 BZ-32, connection diagram, drawing BZ-049 (BZ-047) 17
2.3 BZ-32, functional description, drawing BZ-044 18
3 Conventional system type BX-40 24

3.1 Zener barrier unit type BZ-20/S 24
3.2 BZ-20/S, connection diagram, drawing BZ-076 (BZ-078) 25
3.3 Arranging Ex-loop 25
3.4 BZ-20/S, functional description, drawing BZ-053 25
P-DET/EX/RCE/PMS/GKa/l 10995 Autronica AS

Abbreviation, related to fire alarm equipment in Ex area.
Abbreviation: Explanation.
ANSI : American National Standard Institute.
BASEEFA: British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment

in Flammable Atmospheres.
CENELEC: European Commitee for Electrotechnical Standardization.
DNV: (Del Norske Verital) Norwegian Approval Institute.
EEx: Explosion protection to European standards.
EN: Norms edited by CENELEC.
FM: Factory Mutual (USA).
IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

(Prototype for EN-norms).
ESBN: International Standard Book Number.
NEC: National Electrical Code (USA).
NEK: (Norsk Elektroteknisk Komite)

Norwegian Electrotechnical Commitee.
NEMKO: (Norsk Elektrisk Materiellkontroll)

Norwegian Electrical Material Control.
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (USA).
PA/PE: Equipotential terminal.
PTB: West German Approval Organization

(Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt).
VDE: West German Approval Organization

(Verband Deutcher Elektrotechniker).
P-DET/EX/RCE/PM5/GKa/l 10995 Autronica AS

[General part ] \ General part
v.^.:!...^.'...' * J
1.1 Danger of explosion.
An explosion is a very rapid combustion, depending on the access of oxygen.
More oxygen accelerate the combustion. Some compounds, such as powder
and dynamite, has oxygen "baked" into the substance.
This description is concerning hazardous gases, and different ways of prevent-

ing these from exploding.
The emphasis is to prevent electrical energy from getting access to the hazard-
ous area in an amount big enough to trigger a fire and consequently an
explosion.
Three ingredients are necessary to perform an explosion. These three ingredi-

ents are:
Explosive gas, oxygen (air) and igniting energy.
If one of these ingredients is missing, completely or partly, an explosion can

not take place.
The curve below shows how these ingredients affect the hazard of explosion.
Specially observe that for gas/air mixtures a value exist where minimum
igniting energy is necessary for an explosion to take place. Both more and less
concentrate mixtures will need more igniting energy to get the gas exploding.
To strong, and too weak concentrations are not exploding.
Igniting
energy
Igniting energy
necessary for
explosion.
Minimum
igniting energy
To weak Too strong
mixture mixture
0 .% gas.. 100
100 ..% Air. 0

The triangle of explosion.
oxygen gas
igniting energy
oxygen/ \ gas
oxygen gas / \ oxygen as
igniting energy igniting energy igniting energy
The equilateral, big triangle, may be considered to represent a case with

optimum gas/oxygen relation, i.e. minimum ignition energy is required to
trigger an explosion. If the ignition energy is high enough, an explosion will
take place.
The small triangle to the left has the same values of oxygen and igniting
energy as in the equilateral, big triangle, but the content of gas is too small to
perform an explosion.
I.e. the gas/air mixture is too weak for an explosion to take place.
The remaining two small triangles should be self-explaining, showing the

cases with too low igniting energy and too little oxygen respectively.
P-DET/EX/RCE/PMS/GKa/l 10995 Autronica AS

c '** 1.2 Ex-classifications

The risk of explosion is different for different gas types and areas where the gas
is expected to be present. Therefore classifications of gases into Groups and
areas into Zones are necessary.
Group classification is concerning the type of gas which is (or is expected to

be) present in the hazardous area. Two criteria are of value when the gas is to
be classified.
a) The gas grade of explosion hazard, and

b) The ignition energy necessary to make the gas explode.
Zone classification is, as the name indicates, based upon the zones surrounding
the gas source.
Classifications are indicated by type description. The example below shows the
type:
Exib/IIC, which is, by the way, the claims Autronica set to the products used in
hazardous areas.
Ex - means that the equipment is intended for use in hazardous area.

(EEx is European standard)
i - means that the equipment is intrinsically safe.
b - means that the equipment must be used in zone 1 or 2.

(a - is zone 0,1 and 2)
II - means that the equipment is intended for group n, which covers

nearly all purposes. (Group I is Mining Industry, mainly).
C - means that the equipment is build to withstand the most extreme

claims with respect to safety. (Ignition energy less than 20 |i -
joule and surface temperature less than 85C).
The drawing below shows the distribution of zones around gas sources. The
right illustration shows a simple concentric arrangement, while the left one
illustrates a tank under loading or unloading. The expansion of zones 1 and 2
along the base is due to the fact that the gas has a higher density than the air.
In most of the industry buildings where danger of explosion exist, the main part
of the hazardous area is characterised as Zone 2.
Note that USA and Canada have different zone classification, such that their
"Division 1" covers Zone 0 and Zone 1. "Division 2" covers Zone 2.

The table below shows the different forms of protection against gas explosion,
in abbreviations and explanations. The latter is presented in the plain languages
most used by Autronica personnel, handling fire alarm problems.
Plain language explanation in:
Abbreviation Norwegian English German
Exd Eksplosj onssikker Flame proof Druckfeste Kapsehmg

utf0relse
Exe Tennsikker utf0relse Increased safety Erhohte sicherheit
Exm Innst0pt utf0relse Moulded Vergusskapselung
Exn Utstyr for sone 2 Equipment for
Zone 2.
Exs Spesialutf0relse Special construction Sonderschutz
Exi Egensikker utf0relse Intrinsically safe Eigensichere
Exia Sone 0, 1 og 2 Zone 0, 1 and 2 Betribsmittel
Exib Sone 1 og 2 Zone 1 and 2
Exp Overtrykkskapsling Pressurized enclosure Uberdruckkapselung
Exo Oljefylt Oil immersed Olkapselung
Exq Sandfylt Sand filled Sandkapselung
Note that all Ex-determinations, except Exi, Exia, and Exib are concerning
apparatuses.
Intrinsic safety.
(Concerns circuits, which may include several apparatuses).
Intrinsically safe equipment has limited supply of electrical energy, so that any
spark created has too low energy to ignite the gas.
Also no part of the equipment surface shall be able to reach a temperature
greater than the igniting temperature of the gas. (Which is, or may be expected
to be present.) In order to be able to perform this energy limitation, energy
barriers are necessary to limit the supply of electrical energy to the hazardous
area. Such energy barriers are built up by means of zener diodes, and therefore
they are given the name Zenerbarriers.
Exi-equipments are arranged in two main groups, Group I and Group II.
The latter, which is the one being concerned in this description is again divided
in three parts, namely: Group UA, Group IIB, and Group IIC. (Group I is
concerning Mining Industry, mainly).
Equipment may, of course, be used for less hazardous area than what it is built
for.

The table below shows the relation between temperature grades, equipment
surface temperature, and gas ignition temperature.
Temperature grades Tl T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
Max. surface temperature C 450 300 200 135 100 85
Gas min. ignition temperature C 450 300 200 135 100 85
Note that maximum surface temperature must not, at any occasion (even with
fault) exceed the igniting temperature of the actual gas.
The table below shows the relationship between different gas groups and
allowed igniting energy.
Gas-group IIA IIB IIC

Igniting Energy in (j. Joule 200 60 20
NOTE that values given for igniting energy are limits, and therefore safety
factors must be introduced. Values may be selected from the CENELEC norm
EN-50020.
In order to calculate igniting energy, the following two equations are actual:
Energy stored in a capacitor (capacitance) is: Ec = 2. C U2
Energy stored in a coil (inductance) is: EL = l/2 L I2
Where: Ec and EL are energies in Joules.

C is capacitance in Farads.
U is voltage in Volts.
L is inductance in Henry.
I is current in Ampere.
Note that wires represents both capacitance and inductance, and this phenom-
ena must be taken into consideration for long wire installations at the hazardous
side of zenerbaniers.

1.3 Labelling electrical equipment

Electrical equipment intended for use in hazardous area, shall be properly
labelled in accordance with claims brought forward by national or international
authorities.
The label shall, according to, e.g. EN-50020, contain the symbol Ex, the form
of protection (see table page 7, Abbreviation) e.g. "i", gas group (see table
page 8) e.g. "IIB", and eventually the class of temperature e.g. "T3". This is
true if the maximum ambient temperature is diverging from + 40C.
The label also shall show the name or logo of test- and approving institution
and test approval statement.
For small electrical equipment, with limited space, reduced labelling may be
accepted.
The label shall then include:
The symbol Ex, name of Test institution (test approval), and Manufacturer.
Description: Labelling code:
Approval sign for apparatus certified by

an institution within the European Common
maiKci, Ju,v_. IEA j i-j}A Cfl U 11O 1sL.
Sign indicating that the equipment is produced

according to The European Norm (EN)
EEx means: "Explosion protection to
European standards"
ia: withstands 2 faults with safety factor = 1

or 1 fault with safety factor = 1 ,5
ib: withstands 1 fault with safety factor = 1 ,5

or 1 fault with safety factor = 1
and no unprotected conductor
Group- IT A IIB or TTC (see page 8)
Temneratnrp rlass- T1 T? T3 T4 T*> nr T6

(see page 8)
This example is made according to the

CENELEC norm.

1.4 Limiting temperatures

The table shows limiting temperatures for electrical equipment which may be
mounted in hazardous area, according to reguladons made by EEC, VDE and
NEC.
The temperature limits are valid for parts of the equipment, and for every
possible condition.
Classification Classification Classification

according to: according to: according to:
IEC/CENELEC VDE 170/0171/2.61 NEC(USA/Canada)
Igniting
temperature Temp. Temp, Igniting Max. Max. Temp. Gas
for gases class limit group temp. temp. identi- igniting
C C C C fication temp.
Contin- Short
ously term
450 Tl 450 Gl Tl 450

300 T2 300 360 400 T2 300
T2A 280
G2 270 T2B 260
240 T2C 230
T2D 215
200 T3 200 T3 200
180 T3A 180
G3 T3B 165
160 T3C 160
135 T4 135 T4 135
G4 125 T4A 120
110
100 T5 100 G5 90 T5 100
85 T6 85 80 T6 85
P-DET/EX/RCE/PM5/GKa/l 10995 10 Autronica AS

alarm equipment 1.5 Installation fire alarm equipment in hazardous area*

in hazardous area This description can not, of course, include every possible installation of
electrical equipment in hazardous area.
Therefore, the most common rules are mentioned below:
In power distribution systems with earthed zero terminal, the earth wire and the
zero terminal shall be kept insulated inside hazardous area. A common earth-
and zero wire (PEN-wire) is not allowed.
Comment:
Common earth- and zero-wire (PEN-wire) may be utilized for that part of the
distribution network outside the hazardous area.
Distribution systems with insulated zero wire must have an earth fault operating
switch breaking the circuit at a current of 500 mA, or have facility which by
audible or visible signal gives warning of earth fault in the system.
When an earth fault is given, the fault must be repaired immediately.
Earth wire must physically be situated hi the same tube as the feeding wires.
(Separate earth wires are not accepted.)
Comment:
The claims do not exclude use of separate earth wire as equipotential connec-
tion hi addition to common safety earth wire. Such equipotential connection
ought to be used for special exposed system parts, e.g. construction elements of
electrically conducting material, pipes etc. in order to avoid potential difference
and consequently danger of electrostatic charges.
In addition to the comments above, it must be mentioned that the term

equipotential connection is differently abbreviated in different documents, such
that PA-, PE-, a.o.
In this document the term PE- is preferred.
Installation of 1.6 Installation of Autronica fire alarm systems in

Autronica
fire alarm fn hazardous areas.
hazardous area Several approval authorities have more or less equal norms to be the recom-
mending and normgiving authorities respectively. But we must recommend you
to obtain the laws and regulations concerning your country, because slightly
different rules exists in different countries.

In this description the part regarding installation will be confined to our zener
barrier unit type BZ-32, mainly. This unit is built up by means of AC-zener
barrier as main component The advantage of using this ac-bamer is explained
by the two sketches, and the associated description below:
Zener barrier type Z667/Ex

Rl R2
> 1 i < I J4 >1 1 J 13 Resistor Fuse
Zl
) 1
Rl
| 7BI ZD2 IZ03
1 '
F1 1 u
L. A
n Positive
A barrier
Z" Z^ 7K
,4 \1'' 2
"S L^- PE 0
u ,, 1
PE 1
74
ZD7 r zt)8 ZD9 ]_
2 S
ZnA ^ ZD4 ~ 2 ^
NegMive
Resistor ^r,^, FUS
* 1
?1
bmer 23 , . ZD6 i i p?
R2 Zener diodes F2
R3 R4 F2
^ 1 i,
0
Fig.l Fig. 2
Diagram fig.l shows the connection of two zener barriers, one positive and one
negative, confining one zener barrier unit. This unit has been used for our fire
alarm detector lines (loops).
With no fault the arrangement is perfect, without any trouble. The PE- terminal
will then, electrically viewed, be situated midway between minus (-) and plus
(+), at the same potential as the earth terminal in the panel, approximately. The
PE-terminal and the panel's earth terminal must be connected together (outside
the hazardous area), and therefore an earth indication will be given by the
panel, if the PE-terminal is connected to minus (or plus). When the detector line
is disconnected by shorting the plus- and minus-wires (as in the BS-systems)
trouble will be introduced because then the zener barrier Zl and Z2 will
connect the PE-terminal to minus.
Considering the same situation with ac-barriers (see fig. 2), it is easily shown
that the zener diodes ZD7, ZD8 and ZD9 will prevent the PE-terminal from
being connected to minus.
Data for zener barrier type Z667/Ex
Nominal Type Max. end to end Working voltage Max. voltage Fuse
Charact- no. resistance at 10pA leakage rating
eristics mA
18V 120ft Z667/Ex 135.4ft 14.5V 16.5V 50

18V 120ft 135.4ft 14.5V 16.5V 50

1.7 Rules regarding potential equalization, PE, to fire

- . detectors in hazardous areas.
to fire detectors In
To avoid sparks between an intrinsically safe circuit and the surroundings the
use of a Potential Equalization is required. Normally this is done by a PE-
conductor grounded at the zener barrier.
We differ between insulated detectors (plastic housing) and detectors in
conducting metal housing.
Detectors in plastic housing are non-conducting.
We also differ between conducting and non-conducting surface for mounting.
For insulated detectors the following applies:

The PE-conductor shall only pass through.
Some detectors and junction boxes have separate, insulated terminals for the
PE-conductor. Some detectors have no special terminal for the purpose, and the
connections for continuity must be provided by the installer.
This applies when mounted on both conducting and non-conducting surface.
For detectors in conducting metal housings the following applies:

When mounted on non-conducting surface . e.g. concrete the PE-conductor
shall be connected to the inside of the housing.
Special terminal screws are provided.
When mounted on conducting surface, the PE-conductor shall be connected
to the inside of the housing.
The outside earth terminal screw shall be connected to the surface.
A special case is when mounted in all welded steel ships. According to
classification societies (e.g. Del Norske Veritas) the hull itself can be
regarded as a PE-conductor. and PE-cabclling can be omitted.
Detectors in conducting metal housings must have good connection to the hull.
If a screened cable is used, the screen can not be used as a PE-conductor.
The screen shall continously pass through all detectors and shall be
grounded at the zener barrier only.
Earthing of the zenerbarriere:

Onboard ships:
The earth terminal of the zener barrier unit shall be connected to earth
(ships hull) by a cable not less than 4mm2'
The cable resistance must not exceed 1 Q.
Onshore:
As there are different regulations for different countries you should check the
local regulations.
An extract from BS5345 pt. 4 is printed here as an example:
"....to preserve the integrity of an intrinsically safe system (e.g. a diode safety
barrier earth, a transformer screen earth, a barrier relay frame earth) such
connections should be made to a high integrity earth in such a way as to ensure
that the impedance from the point of connection to the main power system earth
point is less than 1 12 This may be achieved by connection to a switch room or
simular earth bar or by the use of separate earth rods. The conductor used for
the connection should be equivalent to a copper conductor of 4 mm2 minimum
cross-sectional area.
"The conductor used for the earth connection should be insulated to prevent
invasion of the earth by fault currents which might flow in metallic parts with
which the conductor should otherwise come into contact (e.g. control panel
frames etc.). It should also be given mechanical protection in places where the
risk of damage is high."

1.8 Potential equalizations: PE on ships.
Zenerbamer D
fk ei\
O O /7\ _ (?3
0 Q
PE
V v V V
I 0
Conducting wall etc.
A: Insulated sensor on non conducting wall:

PE-conductor only passing through.
B: Insulated sensor on conducting wall:

PE-conductor only passing through.
C: Metal sensor on conducting wall:

PE-conductor connected to inside of box. Outside earth screw
connected to wall.
D: Metal sensor on non conducting wall:

PE-conductor connected to box.
For an intrinsically safe circuit the main demands are:
1: Voltage, current and energy has to be below certain values (depending on

gas types), so that any sparks due to shortening or breaking the circuit do
not ignite the gas mixture.
This may be achieved by the use of a Zener barrier and restrictions for
inductively and capacity.
2: To avoid sparks between the IS circuit and the surrounding the use of a
Potential Equalization is necessary.
Normally this is done by a PE-conductor, grounded at the zener barrier.

When disconnected it shall withstand 500 V to ground. In welded steel
ships however, according to "Det Norske Veritas", the hull itself may be
used as potential equalization conductor.
3: The temperature of any component in an IS-circuit shall be below a given

value, depending on the gas group.
P-DET/EX/RCE/PM5/GKa/ll 0995 14 Autronica AS

1.9 INSTALLATION DATA
Limitations w.r.t capacitance in cable and detectors/call-points connected to zener

barrier type Z667/Ex (part of zener barrier units BZ-20/S and BZ-32).
For an intrinsically safe circuit connected to a zener barrier, there is a limitation as to how large a capacitance
(C^) the circuit can hold. C^ will vary depending on which gas group is present in the area where there is a
danger from explosion.
For zener barrier Z667/Ex, the values are:

for gas group IIC : C^ = 0.440 pF
for gas group IIB : C^ = 1.32 joF
for gas group IIA : C = 3.52 |iF
The following parameters apply:

The total capacitance in the cable and detectors/call-points shall not exceed Cm>x.
Max. number of units connected to each zenerbarrier in BZ-20 and BZ-32 is 10. The total capacitance in
each branch must not exceed Caax .
Cable: Capacitance in cable varies with type, but if the value is unknown, use a value of 200 pF per
metre as maximum.
Detectors: Equivalent capacitance (C./C ) is for different detectors/call-points, as set during testing/certifica-
tion by NEMKO.
GrouD IIA Group IIB Group IIC
BD-26/Ex: C. = 36 nF
BD-27/Ex: Q = 36 nF 10 L 10 10
BE-30/Ex: C. = 80 nF 10 10 5
BE-34/Ex: C = 80 nF
BH-31A/Ex: C = 30 nF 10 10 10
BH-31A/S/Ex: C = 30nF
BJ-20B/Ex: C SO,2nF 10 6 2
BJ-31/Ex: C^<0,2MF
BF-35/Ex: C^lOnF
BF-32M/Ex C^lOnF 10 10 10
BF-52/Ex: C^ < 10 nF
BF-53/Ex: C^lOnF
eq
BF-33/Ex: C^ < 0,4 ^F 8 3 1

BF-34/Ex: C^<0,4pF
BN-35/Ex: C^lOnF 10 10 10
BN-32M/Ex: CCQ <10nF
The number of detectors / call-points is calculated with a cable of 200 m (200 m x 200 pF).
Notes: 1 |uF = 1.000 nF = 1.000.000 pF
E.g. for gas group IIC (Cmm = 0.440 |iF) for a single zener barrier type Z667/Ex.
50 m cable (a 200 pF) = 10 nF
2 x BF-35/Ex (a 10 nF) = 20 nF
7 x BH-31 A/Ex (a 30 nF) = 210 nF
1 x BJ-3 I/Ex (a 0.2 pF) 200 nF
440 nF = 0.440 |iF

2 Analogue addressable system type BS-100
2.1 Zener barrier unit type BZ-32

Barrier unit BZ-32 is mainly intended to be used together with Autronica
addressable fire alarm systems. The main component is one ac-barrier (see page
12) for each branch for connection of detectors in hazardous area.
Each unit may contain from one to four ac-barriers, and may consequently be
loaded with the same numbers of branches as the unit contains ac-barriers.
Each branch may take up to ten addresses.
The type indication includes the number of acceptable branches, indicated by a

digit placed behind a diagonal at end of type indication.
E.g. BZ-32/3 means that the maximum number of branches which may be
connected to this unit is 3.
Do remember that the total numbers of addresses at one BS-loop must be

limited to 99.
Note!
Units listed below only, may be connected to the zener barrier unit type BZ-32/
n (n being any number from 1 to 4).
Smoke detector, optical type BH-31 A/Ex and BH-31 A/S/Ex

Smoke detector, ion-chamber type BJ-33/Ex (BJ-3 I/Ex)
Heat detector type BE-30/Ex

Heat detector type BE-34/Ex
Manual Call-point type BF-32M/Ex

Manual Call-point type BF-33/Ex
Interface unit type BN-35/Ex to which

heat detector type BD-26/Ex (BE-26/Ex) and
heat detector type BD-27/Ex (BE-27/Ex may be connected.
BD-26/Ex (BE-26/Ex) and BD-27/Ex (BE-27/Ex) are conventional heat

detectors.
In order to limit the current consumption, none of these units are equipped with
alarm indicator (LED).
The four first mentioned detectors may, as described above, be connected to

one branch in number of maximum 10 units.1}
BN-35/Ex or BF-35/Ex must have the highest address numbers on the

branch.
^This is purely estimated from an electrotechnical point of view. Other criterias

to be estimated are gas group and total capacitance, C .
See page 15.

BZ- 2.2 BZ-32, connection diagram, drawing BZ-049A (BZ-047A)

connection
The diagram is separated in two main parts by a dot-dash-line. The components
located above that line is mounted in the hazardous area, and must be approved
for that purpose. At the projecting period it is important to place as little as
possible of the total equipment in the hazardous area.
Detectors which are operating independent of interface unit type BN-35/Ex

and are equipped with separate addresses, are marked with capital "D".
Conventional detectors, which need interface unit BN-35/Ex, are marked with
small "d" and all these detectors will have the same address number.
Note that, of course, all detectors must be approved for mounting inside
hazardous area, i.a. being marked B~/Ex.
Note also that the address number of BNB-35/Ex is given (n + 1) because this
unit (or BF-35/Ex) must be given the highest number of that branch.
Units loaded below the dot-dash-line are common Autronica fire alarm equip-
ments. The equipotential line is marked with PE and is connected to terminal
marked 4 on the zener barrier unit.
Note that the equipotential terminal, (marked 4 on the ac-barrier unit) must not
be connected to the system earth inside hazardous area. These two terminals
are, however, shorted inside the ac-barrier unit itself.
On branch no. 1 an interface unit type BNB-35/Ex is shown in detail for both
the input terminals "1 + 2" and "3 - 4", and the sub-loop, SL's connection to
terminals 5(-) and 6(+).
The sub-unit BNB-35/Ex is used for call-point BF-35/Ex and interface unit
BN-35/Ex which is the one shown on this drawing.
The manual call-point, BF-35/EX, has no possibility for sub-loop connection.
(The terminals 5 and 6 are used for the push-button, which is to be manually
operated.)
(The highest address number, which on the drawing BZ-049A is given to an

analogue addressable detector is "n", and unit BNB-35/Ex is given the address
number "n + 1")
Also remember that here must the equation; n < 9 be satisfied.
Zener barrier unit type BZ-32/1 contains 1 unit type Z-667/Ex

Zener barrier unit type BZ-32/2 contains 2 units type Z-667/Ex

2.3 BZ-32 functional description, drawing BZ-044C

function
This diagram shows, in detail, how the current flow in the hazardous area is
limited to an acceptable value. On page 12 you will find diagram and descrip-
tion of the barrier Z-667/Ex where the detector line Qoop) is represented by a
resistor "Ro*'.
The potential equalization terminal is, inside the barrier Z-667/Ex, shorted to
the system "earth".
Only one of the four possible branches is illustrated. The other branches, (1 to
3) would have been drawn in an equal manner. The following functional
description is referring to branch number one.
The current through the branch is fed from plus (1+2), through the emitter -
base resistor R,, through the barrier Z-667/Ex terminals 21 to 23, through the
detectors "D" (which are parallel connected in a numbers of 1 to 10), through
the barrier Z-667/Ex terminals 13 to 11, and from there to minus (3 - 4).
The emitter - base resistor R t is given a value to obtain a suitable voltage drop
so the transistor VI does not conduct if none of the detectors is conducting.
The signal answer current, caused by any of the detectors, will increase the
voltage drop across R,, causing transistor V, to conduct, passing a much greater
current through resistor R2. This causes the greater part of the signal current to
pass through the transistor and it's collector resistor R2.
In this way the necessary signal current through any of the detectors is limited
to a value which is acceptable for consumption inside the hazardous area.
(Accepted by the zener barrier's internal resistance.
All (maximum 4) branches are functioning in the same way, and perform signal
on the same terminal bloc, XI.
Observe that each detector; D,, D2etc. to Dnare individually addressed.

r r r
152 145
SAFE AREA
CONNECTIONS ONLY 152
GROUND IJ, -LJ, 130
PG16 |^| i 1 1ly 1 1
MATN LOOP ENTRY f \
] :: L :TB: 4
-P3H
fJS-
sJe*
4 pec. Mounltnfg holes

Screws MS, length 16mm 3
9
a
0

ro O IO
8 O CM f> o
CM CM CM CM
31
3
O

o
HAZARDOUS AREA
CONNECTIONS ONLY.

(&\
-
^^
I
4 PCS ^
JL L
T" f *l -H
J^.-1,1 1
PG16
BLUE COLOUR
EX-CABLE ENTRY J 3J i H 1 L ' J
ONE CABLE ENTRY 130
MOUNTED FOR EACH
ZENERBARRIER
168
MOUNTED.
I
g
CO
Note: In order to maintain encapsulation rating, IP55, mounting

I
p
holes for box to wall are concentric to the lid's fixing holes.
W
N SAFE AREA & HAZARDOUS AREA CABLES MUST BE
o SEPARATED BY MIN. 50mm INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE DIMENTIONAL SKETCH
<j\
o\ HOUSING. ZENER BARRIER UNIT TYPE BZ-32/1-4
n UNIT MAY BE MOUNTED IN ANY ORIENTATION.
Technical Documentation:
HAZARDOUS AREA SAFE AREA
r
I
R1 , 1
r-C_J t j^ i
100 _J
+23 0k ** 21 2irfiri+ I /KV,
vs^/
+
Q n
P* p* ff" -13
PE
BARRIERE
Z667
\4
11 11
o -
R3
T
riR2
I470 ...MM
v1
**
v
BS-loop
A i connection
*
^
X2
100 ^1 1 1
Fire Detectors used in hazardous areas

+23 0) <Q~~ 21 21
G) + 1 /Klx/-5
w VK^y
BARRIERE nR4
Z667 M470
-13 11 111
Q> o - T
PE ? \
1
R5
TYPE BZ-32/1-4
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
ril }
100 J
+23 &1 &
21 2ir0w~i+ /ps^
IIL 1 Vo
BARRIERE I|R6
Z667 11470
-13 11
11 o - T
PE
-
?\
X3
1=3 ,
100 _J
_Zi & G 21 21 0 + fr^va
w IK. JV4
BARRIERE
Z667
FIRS470
111
11
-13 - a 11
11_ o
_J - T
I
9 *
j
1
DO PE \4 1
tSI PCB BZA-32/01
O
n EAf?TH
*
1 branch with max.

3-4 10 addresses.
] PE core in use only for

metal box detectors.
Exi-approved addressable detectors only

HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA
Maxm
BS-100
loop in 2x1,5mm
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
TYPE BZ-32/1
BZ-047A

1-4 Loop branches, each with max.

10 addresses. . J_4_f
ol_ Addrws unft ' * ^
Sub loop for non

addressable detectors
for EX area.
:.x iapproved
JHAZARDOyS_AREA addressable detec.only
SAFE AREA
Zener barrier unit
Space for 4 pcs. zenerbarriers
BS-100
loop in
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
TYPE BZ-32/1-4 BZ-049A


Conventional
stefi 3 Conventional system type BX-40
BX
Zener barrier 3.1 Zener barrier unit type BZ-20/S

Barrier unit BZ-20/S is mainly intended to be used together with Autronica
conventional fire alarm systems. The main component is one ac-barrier (see
page 12) for each branch for connection of detectors in hazardous area.
Each unit may contain one or two ac-barriers, and may consequently be loaded
with the same number of loops as the unit contains ac-barriers.
Each loop may take up to ten detectors.
The type indication includes the number of acceptable branches, indicated by a

digit placed behind a diagonal at end of the indication.
E.g. BZ-20/2S means that the maximum number of loops which may be
connected to this unit is 2.
Note!
Units listed below only, may be connected to the zener barrier unit type
BZ-20/nS. (n being the number 1 or 2).
Smoke detector, ion-chamber type BJ-20B/Ex
Heat detector type BE-26M/Ex

Heat detector type BE-27M/Ex
Manual call-point type BF-21M/Ex
Heat detector type BD-26/Ex (BE-26/Ex)

Heat detector type BD-27/Ex (BE-27/Ex)
The detectors may, as described above, be connected to one loop in number of

maximum 10 units. n
I}
This is purely estimated from an electro-technical point of view. Other
criterias to be estimated are gas and total capacitance, C .

BZ-20/S 3.2 BZ-20/S, connection diagram, draw. BZ-076 (BZ-078)
Connection
The diagram is separated in two main parts by a dot-dash-line. The components
located above that line is mounted in the hazardous area, and must be approved
for the purpose.
At he projecting period it is important to place as little as possible of the total
equipment in the hazardous area.
Note that, of course, all detectors must be approved for mounting inside
hazardous area, i.e. being marked B/Ex.
Units located below the dot-dash-line are common Autronica fire alarm
equipments. The equipotential line is marked with PE and is connected to
terminal marked 4 on the zener barrier unit.
Note that the equipotential terminal, (marked 4 on the ac-barrier unit) must not
be connected to the system earth inside hazardous area. These two terminals
are, however, shorted inside the ac-barrier unit itself.
Zener barrier unit type BZ-20/1/S contains 1 unit type Z-667/Ex

Zener barrier unit type BZ-20/2/S contains 2 units type Z-667/Ex
| 3.3 Arranging Ex-loop

EX-loop
One zener barrier for each detector loop in central unit.
If none Ex-detector are mixed with Ex-detectors in the same loop, the Ex-
detector with it's zener barrier must be the very last element at the loop.
BZ-20/S 3.4 BZ-20/S, functional description, drawing BZ-053.

Function
description \ From the diagram containing PCB BZA-20/S, it is seen that the terminals B and
B' are shorted on terminal strip XI.
The resistors R2 have values which make transistor V, normally non-conduct-

ing . The control (base) current for these transistors passes through the detec-
tors (in parallel, also with the end load) via the zener barrier unit.
Monitoring of the loop is obtained by connecting end load BXY-40/Ex to the

last detector.
Fire alarm given by one of the detectors will cause a rise of the transistors base
current. V, will be conducting, causing a much greater current to flow through
Rj. This latter current indicates fire alarm on the central panel.
P-DET/EX/RCE/PMS/GKa/l 10995 25 Autronica AS

g
SAFE AREA
CONNECTIONS ONLY.
2 PC!
iO
^*
PG16
MAIN LOOP ENTRY
3
4 pec. Mounitnig holes 06 sr
sa.
I
I
G
HAZARDOUS AREA I
CONNECTIONS ONLY.
B'
4 PCS
PG16
ET
BLUE COLOUR
EX-CABLE ENTRY
ONE CABLE ENTRY
MOUNTED FOR EACH
ZENERBARRIER
MOUNTED.
ssssss ~\
I
C/l
n>
~Wfa i ~T
Note: In order to maintain encapsulation rating, IP55, mounting
holes for box to wall are concentric to the lid's fixing holes.
N
o SAFE AREA & HAZARDOUS AREA CABLES MUST BE
u
a\ SEPARATED BY MIN. 50mm INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE
n HOUSING.
DIMENTIONAL SKETCH
ZENER BARRIER UNIT TYPE BZ-32/1-4
UNIT MAY BE MOUNTED IN ANY ORIENTATION.
s
m
1
Q
UJ
O
CM
t
N
CD
CC
O
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
TYPE BZ-20/l-2s
BZ-053A

BXY-40/Ex
End load
Branche with max. 10 detectors
PE core in use only for

metal box detectors
Exiapproved detectors only

HAZARDOUS AREA
"SAFE AREA
TS35
21
When Ex-detectors with
zenerbarrier unit are installed
at the BX-40 loop, they
must be the very last EARTH
elements in the loop.
Hi
PCB
IB-
Min.4mm
BX-40 A- MaxlQ
B+ Earth,
loop in 2x1,5mm
ONLY FOR BX-40 SYSTEM
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
TYPE BZ-20/1S BZ-078
P-DET/EX7RCE/PM5/GKa/i 10995 28 Autronica AS

BXY-40/Ex BXY-40/Ex
1
' +* End load
Branches with PE- core in use only for

max. 10 metal box detectors
detectors each.
ixiapproved detectors only
HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA
Zener barrier unit
WHEN EX-DETECTORS
WITH ZENERBARRIER
UNIT ARE INSTALLED
AT THE BX-40 LOOP.
THEY MUST BE THE
VERY LAST ELEMENTS
IN THE LOOP.
Min.4mm
BX-40 Max
loop in Earth,

3 An other loop in
ONLY FOR BX-40 SYSTEM
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ZENER BARRIER UNIT
TYPE BZ-20/2S
BZ-076A
P-DEI7EX/RCE/PM5/GKa/l 10995 29 Autronica AS


Zenerbarriereenhet
Zener Barrier Unit BZ-32
BZ-32erenAC-zenerbarriereberegnetforinstallasjonav BZ-32 is an AC-zener barrier unit designed for
adresserbare analoge detektorer i eksplosjonsfarlige om- installation of addressable / analogue detectors in
rader. (Sone 1 og sone 2). hazardous areas. (Zone 1 and zone 2).
BZ-32 skal monteres i sikkert omrade. Enheten bar inne- BZ-32 is to be mounted in safe area. It has built-in I
bygget 1 - 4 stk. zenerbarrierer, somhver kan tilkobles en - 4pcs. of zener barriers, each able to accept 1 branch
avgrening med 1 -10 adresser avhengig av gassgruppe og with 1-10 addresses depending upon gas group and
detektortype. detector type.
Alle ma vaere Ex-godkjente detektorer. All detectors must be Ex-approved.
BZ-32/1 - 1 s!0yfe BZ-32/1 -1 loop branch
BZ-32/2 - 2 s!0yfer BZ-32/2 - 2 loop branches
;;;;:;;!;!!:;;!!!!!; iiii; i
Protecting environment, life and property . -RuTRQNICR-
Tekniske data/Technical data:
Dimensjoner / Dimensions : 220 x 168 x 145 mm Tilkoblinger / Connections:
Vekt / Weight (BZ32/4) : Max. 1100 g
Materiale / Materials Polykarbonat /

Bare Exi-godkjente detektorer /
Polycarbonate Exi approved detectors only.
Driftsspenning /
Working voltage 14V DC
Stramforbruk / Hksplosjonsfarlig omrdde '

Current consumption OmA Hazardous area
Miljekrav /
Environment requirement EN 50020
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Degree of protection IP 55
Temperatur / Temperature - 20 - 70C
Fuktighet / Humidity Max. 95% R.H.

Ingen kondensering /
Non condensing
Zenerbarriere /
Zenerbarrier Pepper L +Fuchs
Z667/Ex
Maksimalverdier for innebygget zenerbarriere Z667/Ex/

Maximum values for built-in zener barrier Z667/Ex: Slsyfe inn
Loop in
C max gas group IIC 0,44 jl F

C max gas group IIB 1,32 u. F
c
max Sas rouP IIA 3,52(1 F
Den totale kapasitansen (inkt. kabel) i hver gren ma ikke

overstige Cmax /
The total capacitance (cable incl.) in each branch must
not exceed C .
I
Vedlikehold / Maintenance: Ingen / None
Barrier Certificate Baseefa No. Ex 822097
Your local dealer:

Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: + 47 22 55 30 46.

Phone: + 47 51 89 19 60, fax: + 47 51 89 16 12.
( Oslo: 22 55 34 10, Tensberg: + 47 33 38 37 97,
Gjevik: + 47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: + 47 51 89 38 30, Autronica Industrial Ltd. Watford, England.
Bergen: + 47 55 28 30 91, Harstad: + 47 77 06 65 22,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
I Kristiansand: + 47 38 02 77 70
(Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim,Norway. Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00, Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, teleks: 55 334 autro n j
r
V
reserved Specifirotions subject to change without notice:
152
,,
' j
^ 145
r If
152
2 PCS 130
PG16
04
f
4 pec, Mounitnig holes 06

Screws M5, length 16mm
BLUE COLOUR
EX-CABLE: ENTRY
ONE CABLE ENTRY
MOUNTED FOR EACH
ZENERBARRIER 168
MOUNTED.
Merk: Festehull for boks til vegg. og lokk til boks er konsentriske.
For <S beholde beskyttelsesgrod, IP55.
Date Dsgn/Dn TPOC QODDaOD
Note: Mounting holes for box to woll ore concentric to the lid's 94-02-23 SC
'l:2 ommmmaa Autronica AS
fixing hots. Checked Spec Ctrl. Approve cmaomaa
In order to mointoin encapsulation rating, !P55. N-7005 Trondheim
BSSS58S Norway
BZ-20/BZ-32 Dimensjonstegning Ref. Next
Dimensional sketch T:\9RANN\BADWG\BZ-056 sheet
Dug no. Sh.no. Rev.
BZ-056
All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change without notice.
1 Slayfegren, med maks.

10 adresser.
1 branche with max.
3-4- 1-2
10 addresses.
PE leder benyttes bare for

metallhus detektor.
PE core in use only for
metal box detectors.
Bare Exigodkjent adresserbare detektorer
Exiapproved addressable detectors only
HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA
Zener barrier unit
BS-100 + BS-100
s!0yfe inn s!0yfe ut
loop in 2x1,5mm loop out
Dote Dsgn/Dwn Troc Scale DDDDDDD

89-03-09 RAJ./K.JO. 1:1
DPDDDDD HU01
DBOOIDO
Autrnnirn
JI IIUU
K Checked Spec Ctrl Approved

DO N-7005 Trondheim
DDDDDDD
BZ-32/1 -FlUTRQNICR-
Ref. Next
Tilkoblingsskjema T:\BRANN\BZ\DWG\BZ-047 sheet
Connection diagram Dwg no. Sh.no. Rev
BZ-047 A
lone rakdetektor
lonization smoke detector BT-31/Ex

Punkt r0kdetektor for deteksjon a v forbrennings- Smoke detector for detection of combustion gases
gasser som i hovedsak avgir sma partikler. mainly transmitting small particles.
For bruk i eksplosjonsfarlig omrader, sone 1 For use in hazardous areas zone 1 or zone 2.
eller sone 2. To be connected via zener barrier.
Tilkobles via zenerbarriere.
Principle:
Prinsipp: lonization chamber having a low level radioactiv
lonisasjonskammer med lavintensiv radioaktiv source.
kilde.
Versions:
Versjoner: BJ-31 Standard version*
BJ-31 Standardutgave.* BJ-31/Ex EEx ib-version for use in zone 1 or
BJ-31 /Ex EEx ib-utgave for bruk i sone 1 zone 2.
eller sone 2.
* Se eget datablad.
mmmmmmm
iill
Protecting environment, life and property ...

Tekniske data/Technical data: BJ-31/Ex
Bestar av / Consists of. Dimensjoner og tilkobling /

Sokkel / Socket (Base) BWA-40A/1 Dimensions and connection:
Detektorhode / Detector head BJH-31/Ex
Underlagsboks / Mounting box BWP-40B (option)
Adresseringsenhet /
Address unit Pa kort (PCB) for
BJA-31/Ex /
Situated on PCB for
BJA-31/Ex
Vekt /Weight
komplett / complete 590 g 145
underlagsboks alene /
mounting box, only 300 g
Materiale /Materials Selvslukkende poly-

carbonat./
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Farve / Colour Lys gra / Light grey
Radioaktiv kilde /
Radioactive source Am241, 0,9^1 Ci
(33kBq)
F01somhet / Sensitivity Ace. to EN-54 part 7
Spenning / Voltage 14VDC 2 V
Str0mforbruk / X
Current consumption
a) hvilestr0m / stand by 0,3mA
b) signal str0m /signal 8mA
Milj0krav /
Environmental requirem. EN-54 part 7
Beskyttelsesgrad /
Arbeidstemperatur /
Working temperature - 20C to + 70C DL- DL
Fuktighet (ikke kond.}/ Max. 90 % R.H.

Tilkobling / Connections Polaritetsavhengig /

Observe polarity.
\ Kabelinnf0ring / Cable inlets 2 x M20 (BWP-40B)
{
Maintenance h0y f01somhet indikeres. /
DL Detektorhovedsloyfe / Main detector loop.
Dust cleaning of chamber X Kabelinnf0ring, apen montasje /
when too high sensitivity is Cable inlets at open cabling, G
indicated. Stisser for kabel, innfelt montasje /
Service / Service Utskiftes ved feil / Slots for cable inlets, flush mounting. I
Replace if faulty. NC Punkt som ikke skal tilkobles /
Terminal, not to be connected.
Godkjenninger / Approvals: Detektorhodet er festet til sokkelen ved bajonettfatning.

Vri mot urviseren for a lesne.
Certificate : EEx ib IIC T6, NEMKO 89.220 The detector head is fastened to the socket (base) by means of
Data :Um = 17,5V
'
DC Ceq < 0,2
'
u F,' Leq =0 bayonet lock. Turn anti-clockwise to release.
Autronica AS, Autronica Marine, Oslo, Norway.

N - 7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: + 47 22 55 34 10, fax: +47 22 55 30 46.
Phone: + 47 73 58 10 00,
V Fax: + 47 73 91 93 00, telex: 55 334 autro n Autronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway
Phone: +47 51 89 19 60, fax: +47 51 89 16 12.
Oslo: +47 22 55 34 10, Tonsberg: +47 33 38 37 97,
Gj0vik: +47 61 17 30 30, Stavanger: +47 51 89 38 30, Autronica Industrial Ltd. Watford, England.
Connections for socket type BWA-40A/1
The figures show one of more ways to insert cables into the socket There are 8 weakenings available for
cable inlet At flush mounting the wires are entering the socket via slots in the sockets circumference.
Note! Ensure that all terminal screws are firmly tightened.
The socket must be mounted to a plane surface. The internal alarm indicator of the detector should be
easily spotted from the entrance door. Arrow marked LED shows the direction from where the alarm
indicator is visible.
Standard spacing between fitting holes is 60 mm.(Use screw DIN 96-3.5XL-ST) - Optional spacing
between fitting holes is 35 - 50 mm.(Use screw DIN 96 4.5XL-ST)
The total resistance of the detector loop must not exceed 30Q, that is 15Q in each conductor.
t LED
Fig.1 For addressable detectors.
Used with panels series BS- only.
Terminal marked 6 must not be connected for

addressable detectors.
Addressing of the detectors is independent of the
To next socket, separat description follows the detector
detector heads.
Fig. 3 Connection of short circuttj

Connection of socketcpntalning BKH-
30 or BKA-30 is^stwwn in fig. 2.
Importai
For^sectcet containing both BKA-30
(nd detector head, the contact spring
on terminal 6 has to be bent up and
towards the terminal screw by means
To of a pair of pliers in order to avoid
>ntact to detector head. See fig. 3.
Deteetprhead mounted in the same
socket witt-b^the last address before
the short circuifteeJatpr.
Socket containing BKfc8Qshould be
labelled with E-2051 (BKA^DSnsjde).
For non - addressable detecto

Used with control panels, serjes-itff- and BX- only
End load is to berpoonTed between terminal 4 and

terminal 6 irjJie"1ast socket on the detector loop.
BWA40Al/CAX/PM4/GKa/100294
DETAIL D DETAIL A
DETAIL E
DETAIL C DETAIL B
122
115
142
8.5 8.5
DETAIL A,B,C,D
19
WEAKNING PROFILES
I1 '
7 5
,f
si ^_ J - DETAIL E
08.5
60
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale 000000 AUTRONICA A/S

O^^HOO
15-02-90 Ol DO I O O
N-7005 Trondhelm
Checked Spec Cont Approv
'"^ 0000" Norway
Autronica
File ret.
D14/BW/BWA-40
DiMENTIONAL DRAWING OF DETECTOR BASE
Rev.
BWA-40A/1 Dwg no.
BW-119
~"~ M4 ikke kopieres overlotes ondre eller pi onnen mite utnyttes ut virt scmtykke. Rett ti konstruksjonsforondringer forbehides.
V
1
n 9,8 J*^
1 1
ai^r
ru
7,85 2 8.1
For lUUe toleransesotte m6l gjelden
ru
OS
ss
"rv -M 5 0.5x45;
oc 1
OS 1 * 1. . .1
wbJ'LUJ uy A t \ \ '
H /" -.1-- . ^
8 CJ
J!0,5X
/ 1 R1
2
aba i U
C*5
+1
<D
CD
44
b
S3
J~ "3 R0.5 / // $ 'y
1
f
t ^^ ^Ôs. * /
24 5
'
o 25,5
o
o
03
' I ^^^^
s^. i
0)
as.
te.
C/I .
3
0
-i
1 Merkeplate PC Lexan 940A
O5 Ant.pr, Pos.
enhet nr, Navn,type,dlm. standard Materlale
O> OverfLbeh. KUnal DDnanna A , , A

RAL7035 DDaannn AutroniCQ AS
**
(0 r u DUA otllt
Dato Konstr./Tegnet Tracet MfilestokU DBDnSaa ' * ''
*-> 08.03.91 B.F./K.J. 2,5:1 S5SS5SS N-7002 Trondheim
Kontroll ,/o Stand-kontroll Godkjent^px^ , , ^ DDDDDDa Norway
^^TT ^fV^ "^^ "^" -HUTRDNICR-
01
. , ~ i . . r /, ,_ Erstatning fan Erstattet avi
Adresse merkeplate for r0kmeidere
^
1 Detectors adressing plug
Teganr,
p,
Rev.
TnolAl
< 0)
ae
A
/"~
ti,,. 09.12.91 K.J./

X^
^
x-
r
lev. Zone Description Dote/Sign. Rev. Zone Description Date/Sign.
o a
n>
0
c*
12
,>
n
ADDRESS LABELS FOR7 DETECTORS to
a. cn 1
p 1
(O 7n' o m
rJ nn vJ
m O
30
a > ' o
m rn ^
1 TTl "D
--^
CO
m
?? I 1 s
a
o
(D
o
o
oo (S
o
Sis'
o
g s O
*"*

_,
s c_ mS -L
n
0
\a> -*"^ 2 Q cr _H x o o w
-* *-^ H1 o Q" || m CD ft)
-H (V
a "'o' ^ S^"S OD 2 S" P-
o ""* ^^ w ^ 3 Q ^
o
~O ~O -^ CD D ^ Q t)
OD
Q O (p_ ^ | n O
f)'
O
ft-
~~ > "0 ^ CO 5'^s Q. > O o"
CD
to
o JJ 0 [D ?o[[] g^^- w r- 3 cr
$ 9
.
CO
W
m
2 ! C
Q
L
CD -^ Q^.
^-^
' - * - | | j j p
S-CDx
mZ?l
w^0
Q J
d-
CL O
ro"
O
f
O
-- P ^ " ^ > > ^ , ^--CD S p
<$) * C D Q . Q . O ^Q. W _ T i
w o
O Q. Q. W CO
(D
?^
CO ^ ^jDDBDaaOD r*
II w S cT* co O
P 9
5-
O
ummmmmnu
F5 DDDDDDDD
S 2 ^| ^ O
m
x*^
:p DDaaaana
sX
^j
' " ^D. "i * o'
i m iT
2 o
8-
fp_
to
CO I |S| CO w
(C to 13
o . I tO V.
0 S 3>
I a
ff
J*
> 5 (D
3*
m
Koding av detektorer med adressebrytere
Coding of detectors with address switches
-fluTHDNlCR-
Detektorene er utstyrt med 7 adressebrytere merket med digitale verdier: 1, 2, 4,
8,o 16, 32, 64. Korrekt adresse fas ved a summere verdiene for de brytere som star
i APEN stilling. Apen stilling vil vaere nar bryterne er skjovet / vippet mot merket
verdi.
The detectors are equipped with 7 address switches marked with digital values: 1, 2,
4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Correct address is obtained by adding the values for the switches
in OPEN position. The switch is in open position when slided / tilted towards marked
value
Sett ovenfra / Top view Sett fra siden / side view
onnl
i
Skyvebrytere
Hiding switches
nnyynny: D?
64 32 16 8
On
Off
_ p Off
nnyynny
On
On
Vippebrytere
Tilting switches
P Off
Off
1
64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Lukkcl Apcn
Closed Open
(On ) (Off)
Adr.
BBBHBBH BHHflflflfl BBBHHHB

Adr. Adr.
kodc kode kodc
Addr. Addr. Addr.
~ode code code 1
64 32 16 8 4 2 1 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
^
01
t !It t 1 1 34
IIIt I\ 1 67
It t It \ |
t t 1 t 1t 1||t t 1J
ii ik jL
02 35 68
1 t It 1
03
t t t t |11 36
t 1t t it 1 69
1t t t it 1
I I 1
I I ii
I I 1
I I 1
i1
I
33 66 99
Fullstendig kodeliste folger p& baksiden

Complete code list on the back of this sheet
!] f!f] B B BB HB BB BflB f It] f!HB BB
Adr. Adr. Adr.
kode kode kode
Addr. Addr. Addr.
code rode code
&4 3 2 16 8 4 2 1 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 64 3 2 K 8 4 2 1
01 4r 4
k
4h I 1f 1 34 f 1 t t tV " 67
^ 1 L
1L f t I I
02 \ \ k
4h 4 4 ^ t 35 ^k jT t t t V 1 F 68
^ 1 k
1^ t "t t
03 ^ ^L
11 f
A 36 f J t t ir t 69 1 1 L
1k t *'
04 ik
I v '
t 37 t Jt t W t V 70 1 1 L
1k t t*
^ ir i
us i1 w '
i 3tt
t if t W V t 71 1 1L 1L ' L
1 F ir ' r
06 ik
'' v 1 t 39
t f t t Wv ^r 72 1 1k 1k f t t
t f t t t tt k 1 F
ik
07 v 1
4 40 73
^ 1k 1k f t V
OH \ \P t t 41
t it it 74 1 1L 1L " v t
09 1 ^
h 1 \h
k
t t ,
+ 42
tf tf | V 75
^ 1k 1L |
-t
10 1 h 1h \P t V 43
t t t f W" irt it r 76
^ 1k 'k ' IF t t
11
1 h
j
'
k k
t V1 44
ft ft 77 1 1Ik 1k W
t!
12
1h 1 \Ph V t t 45
t t f W t 1F 78 1 Jk
1k W
v t
13 ik t
\h
k
v j ,
1 46
t tf V v 79 1 A L
1L
r ir vt
14
\h1 i
1h
k
ITv t 47
t i ir IF . r 80 1 4
r Hr f f 11
15
' 'h '
1 v v V 48 A A f t " 81 1 4t f f tl
K 1
^ i
hk ir
t t t " 49
t t t f 1 F
82 T 4
t ir t t it
17 A
> 1
ir
t tv Jk 50
t jk.
t 1F t 83
1
4t r
f f tl
r
^
18 4
h i
hi t t t
Jl
51
f t
,k 1 r 84 4f
i t ^ t t
t ' I
i ^
19 A
r I
fk ir 52
t 't v t
85 i t *f
i 4 IF
11
r t 1 t t
ir A ^ Jt
i
i p
20 i
53 t v t |
86 i t 1 '
21 I
r i
ir
L
t 1 1 54 A
't v V 87 < r Jk
ir t ^ r
^t
22 4
t i
h irt ^ 1
55 t r f V v |
88 < r ^f
ir t t t
23 i
r I
P ir
t 1 ,r ^ 56 t t f f
89 1 p
f i
A
r A
"1
24 A
r f ri t t
1 J 57
t
^'
ir t A 90
'
r
ri
A
t t
lr
r Af
25
26
i
t
t f 'i t t ^
I
t f \ i t It
i
58
5!)
t
t
' V t ,r
W A ,r
+
t
I
91
92
'
1
r *t ^
r -1
ir v t t
|
27 A
t f ^ " 1
i 60 t ' IF V t t 93 1 r
f ir v tl
A
28 i
tL f i V t
i 1 61 t ' V V t 94 1 r A
t
f ik i
ir V It
r r w II
|
20 I
P \r i ir 1 1
t
62 t ir V it 95 1
30 \ r f i vf 63 t ir V v 96 1
f 5 1r t t t t
F
1r t t tl
1 |
31 4 r \ i v 11
i I 64
v t t t t t t
97 1
F ^ F
32 4 hk r 4th t t f t
1 65
"t t t t t |
98 1
f 1 1' " t
F
33 I
^
F k
t t t ^ 66
"t A A
t 1f
99 1
f 1 F jk
1 1vl
Autronica AS
N 7005 Trondhcim, Norway. Telephone +47 7 58 10 00, telefax: +47 7 91 93 00.
Oslo: + 47 2 55 34 10, T0nsberg: + 47 33 83 797, Gj0vik: +47 61 73 030,
Stavangcr: +47453 1525, Bergen: +475283091, Harstad: +478266522.
St. Hansgt. 8, N-4013 Stavangcr, Norway. Telephone: +47 4 89 19 60, telefax: +47 4 89 16 12.
Autronica Marine
Drammcnsveicn 126B, N 0277 Oslo, Norway. Telephone: +47 2 55 34 10, telefax: +47 2 55 30 46
Underlagsboks
Conduit box BWP-40B
Ved instailasjon i utsatte omrader som maskinrom, On installations in rough areas like engine rooms,
verksteder, lagerrom o.l. gj0res tilkoblingene til de- work shops, store houses etc., the detector terminals
tektorene dryppsikre ved hjelp av underlagsboks are made drip-proof by using conduit box BWP-40B,
type BWP-40B. Underlagsboksen har pakknippel- The conduit box has packtight cable entries.
innf0ringer. BWP-40B leveres standard mednippel Standard glands are of type skintop M20 x 1.5.
type skintop M10 x 1.5.
Kun for detektorer som benytter sokkel To befitted with detectors types using socket
BWA-40A/1. BWA-40A/1.
Utforelse: Versions:
BWP-40B : Standard BWP-40B Standard
I:::-.:::::: I
I :::::::::::::::::::: Ii I ::::::::::::::::::::
I ::::::!::::i::::
:::;
IB:::::::!::
:::::
3*B*
a WHESSOE company Protecting envkonment, life and property... -RUTRDNICH-
Tekniske data/Technical data: BWP-40B
Beskyttelsesgrad/ Dimensions and connection.
Degree of protection IP44(IEC529)
Side view
Dimensjoner/ Dimensions 0126xH46,8
Farge/ Colour Lys grS / Light Grey
Materials / Material Selvslukkende

polycarbonat/
Self extinguishing
polycarbonate
Beskyttelsesgrad/
Degree of protection IP 44 with detectors
mounted.
Vedlikehold /Maintenance: Ingen / None
Service /Service: Detektorer skiftes ved feil /

Replace if faulty.
e
o
s:
k
Godkjenning /
Approval See Autronica document I
"Type Approvals "Appro/M-E.
to
I
Nuts
I
.1
BWP-40B
BWA-40A/1
head
a
S
-X
/"Your local dealer:
Phone: 22 55 34 10, fax: 22 55 30 46.

Phone: 51 89 19 60, fax: 51 8916 12.
Oslo: 22 55 3410, Tonsberg: 33 83 797,
Gjevik: 6117 30 30, Kristiansand: 38 02 77 70,
Phone: 0923 23 37 68, fax: 0923 22 55 77.
Harstad:77066522.
Autronica AS, N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Phone: 73 5810 00, Fax: 73 9193 00, telex: 55 334 autro n
\ relieved Siietlficolkin* jl>Jecl to change villiout notice.
c
'
r c
dD \n
j IL ; a
Ptostpose
Nippelmutier M20x1.5 Messing. 6531 006.0920
Nippel Skintop M20x1.5 Polyamid. 6571 011.1920
Mantelklemme MFB 3x2. 7340-011
Kiebeskilt BWP-40B E-461/6 Vinyl
Sokkel nr.408116 BW-065 PC
Gjengebeskytter IL-4-2C3 Polyethylen. 6333-016.0209
Ant.pf Pot. Tgntng
nhtt fir. Novn.typc.dim. Standard Uolirial*
bh. Kl. mOI
3 Autronica AS
Dote Konstr./Tgnl Trocet Molcttokk
030992 J.S. 1:1 N-7B65 Trondheim
KonlroH Stand kontroU Codklcnt Norway
Er*totnlng lor ICrslottct

BWP-40B Tcgn. or. . Rtv..
Sammenstitlmg
BW-175|
.
0 I
COMPLEATE
SEEH FROM
BELOWE lBWA-WA/1
I
SCREEN
\ AxDETECWRHEAD
WP-WB
COMPLEATE
StDE VIEW
SCREEN
GLAND
CABLE
D*gn / mmmmSSm Autronica AS

QU133
Spec Cant
:::::::
SSSSS8 N-7005 Trondheim
:::::::
Detektor, monterfng i eksplosjonsfarlig ftopl by
omride.
Detector, mounting in hazardous area. Owg no.
W/Conduit- box BWP/WB BZ-077 Ul

SUPPLIED WITH 2 PCS CABLE GLANDS TYPE M 20
CONDUIT BOX BWP-40B
E-1940
DETECTOR ADRESSE LABEL
BJ-309
DETECTOR BASE BWA-40A/1
DETECTOR TYPE
BJ-31/ EX
BH-31/ EX
BE-30/EX ^
DETECTORHEADTYPE
BJH-31/ EX
BHH-31/EX
BEH-30 / EX
DDODDDD
Date Dsgn/Dwn Trac Scale aaoaaao AUTRONICA A/S
1-11-93 ET/RAJ uloalao
JLJS N-7005 Trondheim
Checked Spec Cont Approved alaaloa Mrfat*
aaaaaaa NOFWay
Autronica
File ref.
ADDRESSEABLE DETECTOR AS 1P44 24 D14/BU/ASS
ASSAMBLEY DRAWING Rev.
Dwg no.
EX-DETECTOR HEAD , BASE TYPE BWA-40A/1,
AND CONDUIT BOX BWP-40B
BU-6260
rC SIDE VIEW SEEN Fftun &LLQW AND INSIDE CQNNECJIQNS OF PE CORL ANu.
EART CORE
2 pcs. fixing holes 05,5
Weight: 0,55 kg.

Protection: IP 44
Material: Self extinguishing polycarbonate.
4.10,94 RJ. UTRDNIC
Smokedetector BJ-206/EXond BJ-31/EX mount, on

Dg no
conduitbox BWP-40B
Dint. drug. BJ-335A
Derholdemagnet, type GT-50R/62 med anker GT-50R6
Electromagnetic Door Holder, type GT-50R/62 with
Armature plate type GT-50R6
,4 x A
4 x B
. 2 Anker
Anwture plrte
Fig, 1
Dim:hxbxd Door Holtftr
D1m:hxbxd
105x86x37mm 60x60x50mm
A Festehull for magnet, 4.5 mm 0.
Oim:hxwxd 01m:hxwxd 6 Festehull for anker, 6.2 mm 0.
10Sx86x37mm 60x60x50mm
A Fixing holes for door holder,
4.5 mm 0.
8 " Fixing holes for armature plate,
6.2 mm 0.
A0
Fig.3
Tilkobling: (fig.3) Connections: (fig.)

Arbeidsspennlng inn (I) til tllkobl, Power supply In 0) to terminal block
kontakt CD. (D.
Utgang til eventuell parallel! Outputto any parallel operated door
operert darholdemagnet er vist stip- holder is shown sMppled (0).
tet(0).
Darholdemagneten er utstyrt med The magnet Is equipped with a

utloseknapp. Se fig. 3, X. release button. See fig. 3, X.
Tekniske data: Tecnical data:

Arbeidsspenning: 24V DC Power supply: 24 V DC
Polarttetsavh.: Nei Polarity dependent: No
Stramforbruk: 0.06 A Current consumption: 0&6A
Holdekraft: 60 kp Holding power: 50 kp
Vekt: 495 g Weight: 495 g
Beskyttelsesgrad: IP 54 Encapsulaton: IP 54
AutronicaAS
r r :r
50 R/62 Magnet 6731-003 CT 50 R6 Anchor 6731-00^
Max. angle 2x60
Jo be mounted on the door
Dsgn / Dwri I 6. i,tiftBl !' . .' . _-

30.3.87 1:1 g :i i. v K ; Autroiuca AS
Spec ^25^
Cont \_S Approved ""

P.O.Box 30 10,
iiiS
flîuB
N-7001
..
Trondheim
Norway
Press button to close door Door holding magnet HAHN GT 50 R/62 and Repl lor Repi by
Cable input from behind Anchor GT 50 R6 Dwg no nv\
Dimensional sketches BR-022 \B\

A S T0BHKWI 8
o p q r s
* WEIGHT : abt 2.3KG

Y2b
PILOT LAMP TL-2002M
27 BODY CAST AL PAINTING
28 1 BELL PAN SS41 3.0t 1 CR.PLATC
NO NAME MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS

TiTLE
OUT LINE ALARM BELL

W.T TYPE (1200)
SEUN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

495, JANGRIM-2DONG. SAHA-KU, BUSAN, KOREA
BUS^N KOREA
hi
-2
-3
-4
-6
-8
-9
-10
11
-12
-13
14
15
16
-17
-18
-19
63
-20
I
8)
21
-22
-23
24
-25
n WEIGHT : abt 2.2KG
-26 PILOT LAMP TL-20D.20*
27 BODY CAST AL PAINTING
-28
1 BELL PAN SS41 3.0t 1 CR.PLATE
MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS
TITLE
OUT LINE ALARM BELL

N.W.T TYPE 1120<D)

495, JANGRIM-2DONG, SAHA-KU, BUSAN, KOREA
BUSA.N KOREA
c d e f g h i m n o p q r
* WEIGHT : abt 2.9KG
TL-20D.20< TERMINAL PHENOL 1 20A3P

PILOT LAMP BLOCK
BODY CAST AL PAINTING PACKING RUBBER 5.0t
BELL PAN SS41 3.0t 1 :R.PLATE COVER 1 PAINTING
NO NAME MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS NO NAME MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS
TITLE
DWG BY CHECKED APP BY DATE DEC. 91
OUT LINE ALARM BELL
SCALE NONE
N.W.T TYPE
(2000) DWG NO. SU-1019
SHIP NO,
495, JANGRIM-2DONG, SAHA-KU, BUSAN, KOREA SHEET
BUSAN KOREA
n n q r s t
_ 100
s cj)_ r
\
^^^^
I P"Z "'t J
** WEIGHT : abt 3.0KG
TERMINAL PHENOL 1 20A3P

3 PILOT LAMP 1 TL-20Q 2.0<l 6 BLOCK RESIN
2 BODY CAST AL 1 PAINTING 5 PACKING RUBBER 1 5.0t
1 BELL PAN SS41 3.0t 1 CR. PLATE 4 COVER CAST AL 1 PAINTING
NO NAME MATERIAL Q'Tr REMARKS NO NAME MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS

TITLE
0-J3/0 DEC . 91
OUT LINE ALARM BELL NONE
W.T TYPE (2000) SU-1018
;^j SEUN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

^S^ 495, JAN6RNM-2DONG, SAHA-KU, BUSAN, KOREA
BUSAN KOREA
IM
fM
tu
o
LU O o
o a.
O
O x
o
>-
CO
Q.
o.
<
o
UJ
X
o
CD
O
O2
-J *
QC - z"
- <
O o
O
s
DC 2|
DIMENSION (abt 8 TERMINAL BLOC* PHENOL RESIN 1 10A3P oc I
NO TYPE WEIGHT FREQUENCY
A B(<t> C D E F G H (abt) (HZ) 7 NAME PLATE ACRYL. 1 50 x 15
1 1TYPE Û 146 132 100 66 110 126 120 3.6KG 200-300 6 CABLE GLAND BRASS 1
og
O LU
2 I TYPE 374 R7 132 100 66 110 128 120 3.4KG 400-600 5 PACKING RUBBER 1 5t I <?
LU 1
3 3 TYPE 205 108 132 100 4 BODY COVER CAST AL oc
86 110 126 120 3.1KG 700-600 1
3 BODY CAST AL 1
POLYCABO LU
2 HORN BODY 1 CO
1 HORN BRASS 1
NO NAME MATERIAL Q'TY REMARKS
O -
J

uTRDNICB-
J
/ .
!
AUTRONICA S MARINE AGENTS
P = Phone
F = Fax
T = Telex
C = Cable
October 11,1995
AUSTRALIA AQUIP SYSTEMS PTY LTD P: 61-9-474 3533

PO Box 404
Como,WA6152 F: 61-9-4741411
BAHRAIN SeeUA.R
BELGIUM ANTWERP MARINE RADIO CY NV P: 32-3-541-04-63

Noorderlaan 76 F: 32-3-542-61-73
B-2000 Antwerp 32-3-542-57-98
T: 31734 amrc b
C: Amrcb
BRAZIL PONTEC - Engenharia e Comercio Lda, P:

P 55-21-717-8597
Rua da Conceicao 188 F: 55-21-717-4375
grupo 703
Cep 24020-083 Niteroi-RJ T: 2138334 dnavbr
CANADA HERMONT / B. FORTIN P: 1-514-735-6185

3528 rue Griffith
Ville St-Laurent (Quebec) F: 1-514-735-0035
CHILE SCANREPLTDA P: 56-2-632-6546/47

P 030x14543,001160 21 F: 56-2-632-6545
Santiago T: 240927 scarp
PEOPLES REP. OF See HONG KONG

CHINA
CROATIA HORAELEKTRONIK P: 385-51-216361

A. K. Miosica 9/1 385-51-216405
PO Box 247,51000 Rijeka F: 385-51-216570
CYPRUS HOEM SHIPPING SERVICES LTD P: 357-5-328234

Shop 8, Block A
Christine Complex, Amathus Ave. F: 357-5-323810
Limassol
SRYDOS\WOTXT\AGENTER\AGTLIST.DOC
DENMARK I.T.M. MARINE SERVICE APS P: 45-4920-0213
Kongevejen 3 E
DK-3000 Helsing0r F: 45-4920-0813
FINLAND AUTROSAFEOY P: 358-0-270-90-120

Larsvagen 145
Pbl7 F: 358-0-270-90-129
01401 Vanda
FRANCE E.T.N.A P: 33 35 54 60 60
Route de Montivilliers F: 33 35 54 60 69
76930 Octeville-Sur-Mer T: 190865 etna
GERMANY ELNA GmbH P: 49-4101-301-00

Siemensstrasse 35 F: 49-4101-301214
Postfach 540 120 T: 2189123 elna d
25462 Rellingen/bei Hamburg C: Elektronautik
GREAT BRITAIN A-N-D ELECTRONICS LTD P: 44-91-258-1635

Tanners Bank
North Shields F: 44-91-258-1515
Tyne&WearNE301HJ T: 537600 and g
GREECE D. A. BORBILAS LTD P: 30-1-4113193 +

14PlatonosSt. 4222976 + 4128179
Piraeus F: 30-1-4222988
T: 212651 dibo gr
HOLLAND CROON ELEKTROTECHNIEKBV P: 31-10-4761144

P O Box 6073 F: 31-10-4760447
3002 AB Rotterdam T: 22451 ceo nl
HONG KONG WILSON VDC TRADING CO P: 852-2851-7015

13B, Willie Building 852-2851-7016
222-224, Des Voeux Road 852-2851-7009
Central Hong Kong F: 852-2851-7381
HUNGARY See CROATIA
INDIA NORINCO (PRIVATE) LTD P: 91-22-242042 +

Nowroji Mansion, 6th Floor 242098
31, Nathalal Parekh Marg. F: 91-22-2046576
Bombay-400 039 T: 1183988 nori
Post Box No. 871 C: Norinpaco
INDONESIA ENGTEK LIAISON OFFICE
Komplek Taman Buaran Indah I P: 62-21-8618309
Jl. Taman Buaran TV, Blok A No. 457
Jakarta 13470 F: 62-21-8618309
IRAN METIS PRIVATE JOINT STOCK P: 98-21-8820903

No 29 Shahid Malekian Ave.
North Iranshar Street F: 98-21-898-201
Tehran
ITALY PIZZORNOELINESRL P: 39-10-2471003

Via dei Pescatori
Nuova Zona Levante F: 39-10-294920
Geneva
TAPAN ASAHE MECHATRONIC CORP. P: 81-45-504-7914

4-36 3-Chome, Tsummi-chuo
Tsurumi-ku, Yokohama 230 F: 81-45-504-7926
SOUTH KOREA AUTRONICA MARINE / KOREA P: 82-51-741-9566

Room #1012
Crystal Beach Officetel F: 82-51-742-3195
1394-286, Chung 1 Dong
Haeundae-ku, Pusan
NORWAY AUTRONICA AS P: 47-22-55 34 10

Sales Office: Section: Autronica Marine F: 47-22-553046
Sigurd Syrs gt 2 T: 76274 amasn
0273 Oslo C: Autromar
Headquarter: AUTRONICA AS P: 47-73-581000

Haakon VE's gt. 4 F: 47-73-919490
7005 Trondheim C: Autronica-td
OMAN See U.A.E.
PORTUGAL ONDEX P: 351-1-4141480

Largo da Lagoa, n 8 B-C F: 351-1-4141668
2795 Linda-A-Velha T: 65841 ondex p
(Service only) P: 351-1-2740606

CONTROLIS, SOC. DE
EQUIPAMENTOS DE F: 351-1-2740897
CONTROLO,LDA
R. Conceic.ao Sameiro
Antunes, 26-E, Cova Piedade
2800 Almada
SRYDOS\WOTXT\AGEhnXR\AGTLIST.DOC
QATAR SeeU.A.E.
RUSSIA ABB INDUSTRY/MARINE LTD P: 7-812-350-4910

European Part 10, Bolshoy Prospect V.O., St. Petersburg 7-812-213-7871
Mail addr: POB 70 FIN-53501 F: 7-812-850-1950(Sat)
Lappeenranta, Finland 7-812-350-2911
RUSSIA ACROSERVICE Tel/

Far East PO Box 91-268,65-a Pologaya Street Fax: 7-4232-260981
690091, Vladivostok T: 213115 mrfacros
SINGAPORE ENGTEK PTE LTD P: 65-265-6288 +

50, Kian TeckRoad 6403 + 6402
Jurong Town F: 65-264-0254
Singapore 2262 T: 23053 engtek
SLOVAKIA See CROATIA
SLOVENIA See CROATIA
SOUTH- AFRICA F. S. AUTOMATION cc P: 27-21-72-3333

No. 8 Greenwood Walk
Tokai, 7945 T: 27-21-72-3333
SPAIN KEMIAS.L. P: 34-3-426-3221

Mejico 3 (1st floor)
08004 Barcelona F: 34-3-426-7432
SWEDEN AUTRONICA SVERIGE AB P: 46-31-49 00 45

Faltspatsgatan 8 F: 46-31-454921
421 30 Vastra Frolunda T: 21481 auto s
TAIWAN P. S. LIEN CO LTD P: 886-7-8317663

No. 88FodongRoad
Chienchen District F: 886-7-8229727
Kaohsiung, Taiwan, R.O.C
TURKEY SENAK DENIZCILIK SAN.VE TIC. P: 90-2122272834

SIT MARINE IND&TRADE CO LTD
Yildiz Ihlamur Caddesi Irem F: 90-2122272835
Apt. No. 4 Daire:5
80690 Besiktas/Istanbul
U. A. E. HAVEN AUTOMATION MIDDLE P: 971-4-381108

EAST LIMITED
P O Box 51793, Dubai F: 971-4-385815
SRYDOS\WOTXT\AGENTER\AGTL1ST.DOC

fj
^ - /
U. S. A. AUTRONICAMARINEUSAINC P: 1-201-768-1886
General Agent 234 Industrial Parkway F: 1-201-768-2570
Northvale, N. J. 07647 TWX(W.U) 710 991
9611 pyro nval
C: Retos
Florida only CALLENBERG ENGINEERING, INC P: 1-305-573-2217

2010 N. Miami Ave 2991
Miami, Fla 33127 F: 1-305-576-7868
573-3009
VENEZUELA SCANAVALCA. P: 58-2-959-4089

CCC-Tamanaco, Torre C 3827
Pisoll,OficinaC-1109 F: 58-2-959-4285
Chuao, Caracas 1064 T: 23603 scanavc
Detector Listing textpart S3-1282 Printed : 01.09.95 Page : 1
**** ****
**** BS detector listing, textpart ****
**** ****
Project name : S3-1282

Description : SAMSUNG H1139-H1140 M82-002293
31.08.95 IGF
Last edited : 31.08.95
Loop no: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
43 86
Total number of detectors decleared : 129
Number of BU100 units : 2

Detector Listing textpart S3-1282 Printed : 01.09.95 Page
0001 001 WHEEL HODSE FORE P/B

0002 002 WHEEL HOUSE AFT P/B
0003 003 BRIDGE DECK STAIR WAY
0004 004 ACC.C-DK STBD EXIT P/B
0005 005 ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0006 006 ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0007 007 ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0008 008 ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0009 009 ACC.C-DK CENT.EXIT P/B
0010 010 ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR PORT.
0011 Oil ACC.C-DK CORRIDOR PORT.
0012 012 ACC.C-DK PORT EXIT P/B
0013 013 ACC.B-DK PORT EXIT P/B
0014 014 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR PORT
0015 015 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR PORT
0016 016 ACC.B-DK STAIR WAY
0017 017 ACC.B-DK CENT.EXIT P/B
0018 018 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0019 019 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR CENT:
0020 020 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0021 021 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0022 022 ACC.B-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0023 023 ACC.B-DK STBD EXIT P/B
0024 024 ACC.A-DK STBD EXIT P/B
0025 025 ACC.A-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0026 026 ACC.A-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0027 027 ACC.A-DK CARGO CONT.RM
0028 028 ACC.A-DK CARGO CONT.RM
0029 029 ACC.A-DK CENT.EXIT P/B
0030 030 ACC.A-DK CORRIDOR PORT
Detector Listing textpart S3-1282 Printed : 01.09.95 Page :
0031 031 ACC.A-DK PORT EXIT P/B
0032 032 ACC.A-DK GALLEY
0033 033 ACC.A-DK GALLEY
0034 034 ACC.U-DK FIRE CONT.RM
0035 035 ACC.U-DK PORT EXIT P/B
0036 036 ACC.U-DK CORRIDOR PORT
0037 037 ACC.U-DK STAIR WAY
0038 038 ACC.U-DK CENT.EXIT P/B
0039 039 ACC.U-DK CORRIDOR CENT.
0040 040 ACC.U-DK CORRIDOR STBD
0041 041 ACC.U-DK STBD EXIT P/B
0042 042 ACC.U-DK PORT LOBBY P/B
0043 043 ACC.U-DK AIR COND.RM
0101 101 E/R 2-DK PORT LADDER P/B

0102 102 E/R 2-DK WORK SHOP
0103 103 E/R 2-DK WORK SHOP
0104 104 E/R 2-DK I AUX.BOILER
0105 105 E/R 2-DK MAIN ENGINE
0106 106 E/R 2-DK AUX.BOILERS
0107 107 E/R 2-DK EMCY ESCAPE P/B
0108 108 E/R 2-DK 2 AUX BOILER
0109 109 E/R 2-DK INCINERATOR
0110 110 E/R 2-DK AIR COMPRESSORS
0111 111 E/R 2-DK D/S AIR COMPRE.
0112 112 E/R 2-DK AIR COND.PLANTS
0113 113 E/R 2-DK FORE
0115 115 E/R 2-DK STORE FORE
0116 116 E/R 2-DK STORE MID
0117 117 E/R 2-DK STORE AFTER
0118 118 E/R 3-DK DUMP/CONDENSER
0119 119 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM P/B
0120 120 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM FORE
0121 121 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM FORE
0122 122 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM AFT.
0123 123 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM CENT.
0124 124 ENGINE CONTROL ROOM AFT.
0125 125 E/R 3-DK PORT LADDER P/B
0126 126 E/R 3-DK SEWAGE TR PLANT
0127 127 E/R 3-DK NO.l D/G FORE
0128 128 E/R 3-DK NO.l D/G AFT.
0129 129 E/R 3-DK NO.2 D/G AFT.
0130 130 E/R 3-DK NO.2 D/G FORE
0132 132 E/R 3-DK D/GENERATORS
0133 133 E/R 3-DK NO.3 G/E FORE
0134 134 E/R 3-DK NO.3 G/E AFT
0135 135 E/R 3-DK AIR RECHIVERS
0136 136 E/R 3-DK G/E F.O.UNIT
0137 137 E/R 3-DK STBD LADDER P/B
0138 138 E/R 3-DK M/E F.O.UNIT
0139 139 E/R 3-DK L.O.PURIFIERS
0140 140 E/R 3-DK F.O.PURIFIERS
0141 141 E/R 3-DK F.W.GENERATOR
0142 142 E/R T-DK PORT LADDER P/B
0143 143 E/R T-DK BOILER F.W.PPS
0144 144 E/R T-DK TANK CLEAN.PP
0145 145 E/R T-DK CARGO OIL PUMPS
0146 146 E/R T-DK BALLAST PUMPS
0147 147 E/R T-DK L/T C.F.W.PPS
0148 148 E/R T-DK VACUUM PP UNIT
0149 149 E/R T-DK STBD LADDER P/B
0150 150 E/R FLOOR FORE
0151 151 E/R FLR BIL.FIRE/GS PPS
0152 152 E/R FLR PORT LADDER P/B
0153 153 E/R FLR SLUDGE PUMP
0154 154 E/R FLR O.W.SEPARATOR
0155 155 E/R FLR SCAV AIR DRAIN TK
0156 156 E/R FLR EM % CY EXIT P/B
0157 157 E/R FLR M/E L.O.FILTER
0158 158 E/R FLR M/E L.O.COOLER
0159 159 E/R FLR M/E L.O.FEED PP
0160 160 E/R FLR STBD LADDER P/B
0161 161 E/R FLR V/C C.S.W.PUMP
0162 162 E/R FLOOR FORE
0163 163 CASING U-DK 1 AOX BOILER
0164 164 CASING U-DK EXIT P/B
0165 165 CASING U-DK 2 AUX BOILER
0166 166 S/G RM EXIT P/B
0167 167 S/G RM EH'CY FIRE PP RM
0168 168 S/G RM S/G PORT
0169 169 S/G RM S/G STBD
0170 170 CASING A-DK E/G ROOM P/B
0171 171 CASING A-DK EM'CY GEN RM
0172 172 CASING A-DK COMP.BOILER
0173 173 CASING A-DK COMP.BOILER
0174 174 CASING A-DK IGS & FAN RM
0175 175 CASING A-DK IGS & FAN RM
0176 176 CASING STR-DK 1/3 FAN RM
0180 180 CASING U-DK PAINT STORE
0181 181 PUMP RM U-DK EXIT P/B
0182 182 PUMP RM 2-DK
0183 183 PUMP RM T-DK
0184 184 PUMP RM-FLR CARGO OIL PP
0185 185 PUMP RM FLR CARGO OIL PP
0186 186 BOSUN STORE
Detector Listing controlpart S3-1282 Printed : 01.09.95 Page :
**** ****
**** BS detector listing, controlpart ****
**** ****
Project name : S3-1282

Description : SAMSUNG H1139-H1140 M82-002293
31.08.95 IGF
Last edited : 31.08.95
Loop no: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
43 86
Total number of detectors decleared : 129
Op = control output
AKA = AK alarm
AKW = AK warning
Zo - Zone number
lone rokdetektor
lonization smoke detector BT-31/Ex

Purikt rakdetektor for deteksjon a v forbrennings- Smoke defector for detection of combustion gases
gasser som i hovedsak avgir sma partikler. mainly transmitting small particles.
For bruk i eksplosjonsfarlig omr^der, sone 1 for use in hazardous areas zone 7 or zone 2.
ellor sone 2. To be connected via zener barrier.
Tilkobles via zenerbarriere.
Principle:
Prinsipp: lonization chamber having a low level radioactiv
lonisasjonskammer med lavintensiv radioaktiv source.
kilde.
Versions:
Versjoner: BJ-31 Standard version*
BJ-31 Stand ardutgave.* BJ-31/Ex EEx ib-version for use in zone 1 or
BJ-31 /Ex EEx ib-utgave for bruk i sone 1 zone 2.
eller sone 2.
* Seeget datablad.
!:[[:;:::::::::=::::
11
ill!
!!; m
I iiiiig
KmHiilnlBlH
a WHF.SSORcompany Protecting environment, life and property ...
Zenerbarriereenhet
Zener Barrier Unit BZ-32
BZ-32 er en AC-zenerbarriereberegnet for installasjonav BZ-32 is an AC-zener barrier unit designed for
adresscrbare analoge detektorer i eksplosjonsfarlige om- installation of addressable /analogue defectors in
rader. (Sone 1 og sone 2). hazardous areas. (Zone I and zone 2).
BZ-32 skal monteres i sikkcrt omrade. Enheten har inne- B7.-32 is lo he mounted in safe area. It has built-in 1
bygget I -4stk.zenerbarrierer,somhverkanlilkoblesen -4pcs. ofzener barriers, each able to accept I branch
avgreningmed 1 - lOadresseravhengigavgassgruppeng with I 10 addresses depending upon gas group ami
dctektortype. detector type.
Alle ma vaere Ex-godkjentc detektorer. All detectors must be Ex-approved.
BZ-32/1 - I s!0yfe BZ-32/1 - I loop branch
BZ-32/2 - 2 sl0yfer BZ-32/2 - 2 loop branches
BZ-32/3 - 3 s!0yfer BZ-32/3 - 3 hop brunches
-a wHiissoecompany Protecting environment, life and property . . .

016 - Fire - Alarms - System - BS-100-2 - Documentation PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

016 - Fire - Alarms - System - BS-100-2 - Documentation PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BLOCK DIAGRAM

FINAL COMMISSIONING HANDBOOK

AUTRONICA REF. M82-002319

fluTRDKICB- AUTRONICA REPRESENTANTIVES

G\M82\002319BS\GEM\FORSIDE 04/10-1995 RAJ 10

BRS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL BS-10Q/2-SOLAS

15 2 5861-019.0001 BASE, ZAS6 442016

28 2 BF-35 MANUAL CALL POINT

38 3 BJH-31 SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD, IONE

POS. 21-25 V -,L BE SUPPLIED SEPARATELY

POS.26-27 TO BE PACKED SEPARATELY AND

BS-f 100/2 W/PRINTER

FIRE 2 MIN. DELAYED J

. BELLS NOT DELAYED YARD EMERGENCY

DOOR HOLDING MAGNETS

BLOCK DIAGRAM Dvg no. Sh.no. Rev.

SIZE IN SQMM M82-002319 001 B

Applications Optional programmable control outputs,

-a WHESSOE company Protecting environment, life and Drooertv ra

Dimensions: Cabinet sizes vary in accordance with system specification,

Power supply: 230 V AC +IO/-15 %. Frequency: 44 - 440 Hz.

Day/Night alarm organization (D/N): I circuit, activated when connected to 0 V.

Monit. ofext. equipment (E): 1 circuit, activated when disconnected from 0 V.

General alarm (GA): 1 circuit, activated when connected to 0 V.

Group disablement (GRU1 to 3): 3 circuits, freely programmable, activated when

Remote^ alarm signal (BMA): 1 circuit, max. load 1 A / 24 V DC.

Prewarning signal (BMFO); 1 circuit, max. load l O O m A / 2 4 V DC. (NPN

Remote fault signal (BMP): 1 circuit, max. load 100 mA / 24 V DC.

Special national function (SP): 1 circuit, max. load 100mA/24 V DC.

Electromagnetic door holders IDHM); 1 circuit, max. load 1 A / 24 V DC.

Optional Control output module(s) (BSJ-100 / BSJ-101): Max. 15 modules, each

Optional Communication module(s) (data output module(s)) (BSL-100): 20 mA

American Bureau of Shipping 90-C.B23984-XNo.17, Bureau Veritas 3781/3590/AO/O, Del

Autronica AS, Autronica Offshore AS

Autronica Marine Autronica Industrial Ltd.

BSJ-100 (BSJ-101) BSL-111A Receiver unit.

Pocket pager, via ESPA 4.4.4 communication line

Output for special functions: SP

4 alarm outputs: AK-1 to AK-4 for connection of

Remote alarm signal; BMA. For alarm transmission to

Remote fault signal: BMP. For transmission to the fire

Electromagnetic door holders: DHM. Activated at alarm. > "O

Control output: AUX. Activated at alarm

Prewarning signal: BMFO. For transmission to the fire

BS-100 DYFI fire i

General alarm input: GA

3 inputs for (detector) group disablements: GRU-1 to

Input for monitoring of external equipment: E (EKFE)

Input for day-Might alarm organization of the fire alarm

BS-100 DYFP fire

General alarm input: GA

3 inputs for (detector) group disablements: GRU-1 to

Input for monitoring of external equipment: E (EKFE)

Input for day-/night alarm organization of the fire alarm

Short circuit Optical smoke Heat detector Ion chamber smoke

Fire Alarm Control Panel

Autronica Offshore AS, Stavanger, Norway

Autronica Marine, Oslo, Norway

Autronica Industrial Ltd., Watford, England

9.4 Sounders ..29

10.1 Sensitivity ..31

10.2 Internal ..34

10.3 Configuration .35

Print-out on the optional printer: *FIRE**